JP7762011B2 - gaming machines - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine that displays variable normal symbols.

2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, a gaming machine that performs a variable display of normal symbols has been known (see Patent Document 1).
In this gaming machine, when the game ball passes through the gate, a decision is made as to whether to execute an auxiliary game that opens the electric chute, and after the normal symbols are displayed in a variable manner, the normal symbols are displayed stationary in a manner that indicates the result of the decision.

Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2020-116317

However, with conventional gaming machines, there is a risk that the status of the gaming machine may not be properly notified.
In other words, in conventional gaming machines, an external signal is not output based on the display of changing normal symbols, so even during a period in which a game is being played based on the display of changing normal symbols, an external signal cannot be output based on the display of changing normal symbols, and there is a risk that the status of the gaming machine will not be properly notified.
An object of the present invention is to provide appropriate notification of the status of a gaming machine.

In order to achieve the above object, a gaming machine according to a first aspect of the present invention comprises first identification information display means for executing display of first identification information corresponding to a special symbol lottery, second identification information display means for executing display of second identification information corresponding to a normal symbol lottery, output means for outputting an external signal, and gaming state control means for causing any one of a plurality of gaming states including a first gaming state and a second gaming state, wherein after the first identification information is statically displayed during the occurrence of the first gaming state, the external signal is output, and the second identification information whose variable display has started during the occurrence of the second gaming state is statically displayed. After the external signal is output , the display of the first identification information becomes the main focus of the game while the first game state is occurring, and the display of a performance pattern corresponding to the display of the first identification information is executed, and while the second game state is occurring, the display of the second identification information becomes the main focus of the game, and the display of a performance pattern corresponding to the display of the second identification information is executed, and the display of a mini performance pattern corresponding to the display of the second identification information can be executed, and the form of the mini performance pattern that is stopped and displayed when the result of the normal pattern lottery is a specific result can be made different depending on the game state .
In the gaming machine according to the first aspect of the present invention, when the first gaming state is occurring, an external signal is output based on the display variation of the first identification information corresponding to the special symbol lottery, and when the second gaming state is occurring, an external signal is output based on the display variation of the second identification information corresponding to the normal symbol lottery. Therefore, it is possible to output an external signal appropriately according to the gaming state, and to appropriately notify the state of the gaming machine.
Here, the first identification information corresponds to the first special symbol, which will be described later. The first identification information display means corresponds to the main control board 200 (step S11-13), which will be described later. The second identification information corresponds to the normal symbol, which will be described later. The second identification information display means corresponds to the main control board 200 (step S20-11), which will be described later. The external signal corresponds to the symbol determination count signal, which will be described later. The output means corresponds to the main control board 200 (step S4-19) and the external terminal board 450, which will be described later. The first gaming state corresponds to the normal state, which will be described later. The second gaming state corresponds to the time-saving state (time-saving state 1 to time-saving state 3), which will be described later. The gaming state control means corresponds to the main control board 200 (step S43-2), which will be described later.

This invention makes it possible to properly notify users of the status of a gaming machine.

1 is a perspective view showing the overall configuration of a pachinko machine. FIG. 2 is a diagram showing the front of the game board, and is a schematic diagram showing parts particularly necessary for explanation. FIG. 2 is a block diagram showing the configuration of a control system of a pachinko machine. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing the winning probabilities of various lotteries. A diagram showing the types of winnings in the regular pattern lottery. A diagram showing the types of winnings in the special pattern lottery. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing the transition of game states. 10 is a flowchart showing a CPU initialization process. 10 is a flowchart showing a main loop process. 10 is a flowchart showing a save process when power is cut off. 10 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process. 10 is a flowchart illustrating a dynamic port output process. 10 is a flowchart showing a performance display device output process. 10 is a flowchart showing a setting-related process. 10 is a flowchart illustrating a switch management process. 10 is a flowchart showing the normal starting ball detection process. FIG. 1 is a flowchart showing the starting ball detection process. This is a flowchart showing the starting ball detection process for Special Chart 2. 10 is a flowchart showing a special pattern random number acquisition process. 10 is a flowchart showing a special game management process. 10 is a flowchart showing a special chart change waiting process. 10 is a flowchart showing a number of cutoff management process; 10 is a flowchart showing processing during special chart change. 10 is a flowchart showing processing during special chart stop. This is a flowchart showing the processing before opening the first large prize opening. A flowchart showing the first large prize opening opening control process. This is a flowchart showing the first large prize opening closure validity process. This is a flowchart showing the waiting process for the end of the first large prize opening. This is a flowchart showing the processing before opening the second large prize opening. A flowchart showing the second large prize opening control process. This is a flowchart showing the second large prize opening closure validity process. This is a flowchart showing the waiting process for the end of the second large prize opening. 10 is a flowchart showing a special electric utility opening/closing switching process. 10 is a flowchart showing a normal game management process. 10 is a flowchart showing the process of waiting for a change in the general map. 10 is a flowchart showing a number of cutoff management process; This is a flowchart showing the processing during normal map changes. 10 is a flowchart showing the processing performed when the map is stopped. This is a flowchart showing the pre-opening process for normal electric devices. 10 is a flowchart showing the normal electric utility opening/closing switching process. 10 is a flowchart showing the normal electric accessory opening control process. This is a flowchart showing the normal electric device closure validity process. This is a flowchart showing the waiting process for the end of the release of a normal electric device. 10 is a flowchart showing a performance display device control process. FIG. 3 is a diagram showing an example of a display screen 31a. FIG. FIG. 2 is a diagram showing the configuration of an outer rail. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing the arrangement of guide holes gh in the outer rail. FIG. A diagram showing the output timing of the pattern determination count signal.

Hereinafter, an embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings.
In this embodiment, the gaming machine according to the present invention is applied to a pachinko machine 1.

(Overall configuration of pachinko machine 1)
First, the overall configuration of the pachinko machine 1 will be described.
FIG. 1 is a perspective view showing the overall configuration of a pachinko machine.
The pachinko machine 1 is configured to include an outer frame unit 2, an inner frame unit 3, a front frame unit 4, and a game board unit 10.
The outer frame unit 2, inner frame unit 3, and front frame unit 4 are fixed to one another via a hinge mechanism, which allows the inner frame unit 3 to be opened and closed relative to the outer frame unit 2. The front frame unit 4 can also be opened and closed relative to both the inner frame unit 3 and the outer frame unit 2.

The outer frame unit 2 is configured to include a rectangular frame body (outer frame). The outer frame of the outer frame unit 2 is fixed to the island equipment of the game center.
The inner frame unit 3 is configured to include a rectangular frame body (inner frame). The inner frame unit 3 is disposed inside the outer frame unit 2.
The front frame unit 4 is formed in the shape of a rectangular door and includes a transparent plate 4a disposed in the approximate center, a decorative portion 4b disposed around the transparent plate 4a, a tray unit 5 disposed below the transparent plate 4a, and a launch handle 6 disposed to the side of the tray unit 5.
The transparent plate 4a is formed in a flat plate shape from a transparent material such as resin or glass. The decorative portion 4b is formed from a transparent or translucent resin material and has a shape that bulges forward. Each upper corner of the decorative portion 4b is provided with a sound vent 4c, inside which a speaker 22 (see FIG. 3) is disposed. Each sound vent 4c has a plurality of sound holes that allow sound output from the speaker 22 to pass through. The decorative portion 4b is also provided with a frame lamp 20 (see FIG. 3). The frame lamp 20 is configured to include a plurality of light-emitting elements (LEDs) driven by dynamic lighting control.

The tray unit 5 has a tray 5a for receiving game balls (loan balls and prize balls), and an effect button 5b and a rotary selector 5c arranged in front of the tray 5a.
The effect button 5b is formed in a roughly cylindrical shape and is arranged to protrude upward from the tray unit 5. The effect button 5b can be pressed (pushed downward) by the player. A first operation detection switch 24 (see FIG. 3) that detects the pressing of the effect button 5b is arranged inside the tray unit 5. The first operation detection switch 24 outputs a first operation signal to the effect control board 300 (see FIG. 3) each time the effect button 5b is pressed.
The rotary selector 5c (so-called "jog dial") is formed in a roughly cylindrical shape and is arranged to surround the effect button 5b. The rotary selector 5c can be rotated by the player (by rotating it around its cylindrical axis). A second operation detection switch 25 (see Figure 3) that detects the rotation of the rotary selector 5c is arranged inside the tray unit 5. The second operation detection switch 25 outputs a second operation signal to the effect control board 300 each time the rotary selector 5c is rotated a predetermined angle (for example, 60°).

A loan operation unit 7 is disposed on the top surface of the tray unit 5. The loan operation unit 7 has a ball loan button 7a, a return button 7b, and a degree display device 7c.
Here, the pachinko machine 1 is communicably connected to a CR unit (not shown) that can read and update information recorded on a prepaid card. When a prepaid card (not shown) is inserted into the CR unit, the remaining number of points of the valuable medium recorded on the prepaid card inserted into the CR unit is displayed on the point display device 7c.
When the ball loan button 7a is operated with the prepaid card inserted in the CR unit, a predetermined number of game balls are dispensed into the tray 5a. At this time, the remaining number of points of the valuable medium recorded on the prepaid card is updated according to the number of game balls dispensed, and the updated remaining number of points of the valuable medium is displayed on the point display device 7c.
Furthermore, when the return button 7b is operated while a prepaid card with remaining credits of the valuable medium is inserted into the CR unit, the prepaid card is returned from the CR unit.
Here, examples of prepaid cards include magnetic storage media, media with built-in storage ICs, and the like.
The launch handle 6 can be rotated by the player. A launch volume 410 (see FIG. 3) is disposed inside the launch handle 6, which detects the angle at which the launch handle 6 is rotated. The launch volume 410 outputs a detection signal corresponding to the detected angle to the payout control board 400 (see FIG. 3).

(Configuration of game board unit 10)
Next, the configuration of the game board unit 10 will be described.
Fig. 2 shows the front of the game board unit, and is a diagram that schematically illustrates parts particularly necessary for explanation. Fig. 45 is a diagram showing an example of the display screen 31a. Fig. 46 is an exploded perspective view of the game board. Fig. 47 is a diagram showing the configuration of the outer rail. Fig. 48 is a diagram showing the arrangement of guide holes gh in the outer rail. Fig. 49 is a cross-sectional view of the rail base.
Note that the rail base 13 and the like are not shown in Fig. 2. Fig. 47(a) shows the outer rail 14 as seen from the side, and Fig. 47(b) shows the outer rail 14 as seen from the front. Fig. 48 shows the outer rail 14 attached to the game board 11 as seen from the front. In Fig. 49, the game ball is indicated by the symbol "B".
The game board unit 10 is supported by the inner frame unit 3. Specifically, the game board unit 10 is attached to the inside of the inner frame of the inner frame unit 3. This allows the game board unit 10 to be positioned on the back side of the front frame unit 4. The player can then view the game board 11 (play area 30), which will be described later, through the transparent plate 4a. In this embodiment, the play area 30, which will be described later, is configured between the back side of the transparent plate 4a and the front side of the game board 11.
As shown in Figure 2, the game board unit 10 comprises a set board (not shown), a game board 11 attached to the set board, and various presentation devices (main image display device 31, sub-image display device 32, movable body unit, etc.) attached to the set board.
The set plate is formed in a box shape with an open front side, and an opening formed as a through hole is provided in the approximate center of the rear plate of the set plate.

The game board 11 is attached to the front side of the set board.
As shown in Figure 46, the gaming board 11 is made of resin and is formed into a flat plate. An opening (not shown in Figure 46) consisting of a through-hole is provided in approximately the center of the gaming board 11. The player can view the display screen 31a of the main image display device 31 through the opening provided in the gaming board 11 and the opening provided in the set board.
An inner rail 12, a rail base 13, and an outer rail 14 are attached to the front of the game board 11. A game area 30 is defined by the inner rail 12, the outer rail 14, etc.
The inner rail 12 is made of resin or the like. When viewed from the front, the inner rail 12 is configured in an arc shape. The outer peripheral surface of the inner rail 12 forms an inner guide surface 12a that guides the game balls. A return ball prevention piece 12b is provided at the tip of the inner rail 12. The return ball prevention piece 12b prevents game balls that have been launched from the launch passage r1 into the game area 30 from returning to the launch passage r1 again.

The rail base 13 is made of resin or the like. As shown in Fig. 46, the rail base 13 is provided with a guide surface 13b that supports the outer rail 14. The guide surface 13b extends in an arc shape when viewed from the front side.
At least a portion of the guide surface 13b in the longitudinal direction is inclined toward the rear side (the front side of the gaming board 11). In this embodiment, substantially the entire longitudinal area of the guide surface 13b is inclined toward the rear side. This allows at least a portion (substantially the entire longitudinal area, in this embodiment) of the outer guide surface 14c of the outer rail 14 supported by the guide surface 13b to be inclined toward the rear side (the front side of the gaming board 11). This makes it difficult for the gaming balls launched by the gaming ball launching device 430 to flow toward the front side (the transparent plate g2 side), making it possible to suppress contact with the transparent plate g2.
The guide surface 13b is provided with a plurality of protrusions (bosses) pr. Each protrusion pr is formed as a substantially elliptical convex portion and is provided so as to protrude from the guide surface 13b. Each protrusion pr is fitted into a guide hole gh provided in the outer rail 14, and determines the position of the outer rail 14 relative to the rail base 13 (game board 11).
A base end (starting end) of the rail base 13 is provided with a base end support portion (not shown) that supports the base end bent portion 14a provided on the outer rail 14. The base end support portion is configured as a recess into which the base end bent portion 14a can be inserted. Furthermore, a tip end support portion (not shown) that supports the tip end bent portion 14b provided on the outer rail 14 is provided at the tip end (terminal end) of the rail base 13. The tip end support portion is configured as a recess into which the tip end bent portion 14b can be inserted.
The rail base 13 is also provided with a covering portion 13a that covers (supports) the side surface (front side surface) of the outer rail 14 when viewed from the front side.

The outer rail 14 is made of metal. As shown in Figures 46 and 47, the outer rail 14 is formed in a flat plate shape and extends in an arc shape when viewed from the front side.
A base end (starting end) of the outer rail 14 is provided with a base end bent portion 14a. The base end bent portion 14a is formed by bending the base end of the outer rail 14 into a substantially L-shape. A tip end bent portion 14b is provided at the tip end (terminal end) of the outer rail 14. The tip end bent portion 14b is formed by bending the tip end of the outer rail 14 into a substantially U-shape.
The outer peripheral surface of the arc-shaped outer rail 14 is supported by the guide surface 13b of the rail base 13. The inner peripheral surface of the arc-shaped outer rail 14 forms an outer guide surface 14c that guides the game ball.
The outer rail 14 (outer guide surface 14c) is provided with a plurality of guide holes gh. Each guide hole gh is a through-hole that penetrates the outer rail 14 in the thickness direction. Each guide hole gh is a substantially elliptical through-hole that can fit the protrusion pr.
In the outer rail 14 (outer guide surface 14c), guide holes gh are provided at positions corresponding to the protrusions pr provided on the guide surface 13b when the outer rail 14 is supported (attached) on the guide surface 13b. As a result, the guide holes gh and the protrusions pr guide (prescribe) the attachment position of the outer rail 14 relative to the rail base 13 (guide surface 13b), and ultimately guide (prescribe) the attachment position of the outer rail 14 relative to the game board 11.

Next, the arrangement of the guide holes gh in the outer rail 14 (outer guide surface 14c) will be described.
Here, the arrangement of the plurality of guide holes gh in the outer rail 14 and the arrangement of the plurality of protrusions pr on the guide surface 13b correspond to each other.
Therefore, the arrangement conditions of the plurality of guide holes gh in the outer rail 14 and the arrangement conditions of the plurality of protrusions pr on the guide surface 13b are the same.
Therefore, the following will explain the arrangement conditions of the multiple guide holes gh in the outer rail 14, and will omit explanation of the arrangement conditions of the multiple protrusions pr on the guide surface 13b.
The outer rail 14 is attached to the front of the game board 11 via the rail base 13. The outer rail 14 (outer guide surface 14c) extends in an arc shape when viewed from the front side while attached to the game board 11.
As shown in Figure 48, in the following explanation, when viewing the outer rail 14 attached to the game board 11 from the front side, the uppermost part of the outer rail 14 (upper vertex) will be referred to as the "upper vertex P1," and the leftmost part of the outer rail 14 (left vertex) will be referred to as the "left vertex P2."
The range from the base end (starting end) of the outer rail 14 to the left vertex P2 is referred to as the "first range H1," the range from the left vertex P2 of the outer rail 14 to the upper vertex P1 is referred to as the "second range H2," and the range from the upper vertex P1 of the outer rail 14 to the tip (end) is referred to as the "third range H3."
The range from the left vertex P2 of the outer rail 14 to the leading end (terminal end) is defined as a "fourth range." That is, the fourth range = the second range H2 + the third range H3.
The range from the base end (starting end) of the outer rail 14 to the upper vertex P1 is defined as a "fifth range." That is, the fifth range = the first range H1 + the second range H2.
The range from the base end (starting end) of the outer rail 14 to the middle portion is referred to as the "sixth range," and the range from the middle portion to the tip (ending end) of the outer rail 14 is referred to as the "seventh range." Here, the "middle portion" refers to the middle (center) portion of the outer rail 14 in the longitudinal direction.

In this embodiment, the first range H1 has a greater number of guide holes gh than the second range H2, and the second range H2 has a greater number of guide holes gh than the third range H3.
In addition, in this embodiment, the number of guide holes gh provided in the first range H1 is greater than or equal to the number of guide holes gh provided in the second range H2, and the number of guide holes gh provided in the second range H2 is greater than or equal to the number of guide holes gh provided in the third range H3.
In addition, in this embodiment, the number of guide holes gh provided in the first range H1 is greater than or equal to the number of guide holes gh provided in the third range H3, and the number of guide holes gh provided in the second range H2 is greater than or equal to the number of guide holes gh provided in the third range H3.
In addition, in this embodiment, the number of guide holes gh provided in the first range H1 is greater than or equal to the number of guide holes gh provided in the second range H2, and the number of guide holes gh provided in the first range H1 is greater than or equal to the number of guide holes gh provided in the third range H3.
In this embodiment, the number of guide holes gh provided in the first range H1 is greater than that in the fourth range.
In this embodiment, the number of guide holes gh provided in the fifth range H3 is greater than that in the third range H3.
In this embodiment, the number of guide holes gh provided in the sixth range is greater than that in the seventh range.

Specifically, the first region H1 has three guide holes gh along the longitudinal direction, the second region H2 has two guide holes gh along the longitudinal direction, and the third region H3 has no guide holes gh.
As a result, two guide holes gh are provided along the longitudinal direction in the fourth region, five guide holes gh are provided along the longitudinal direction in the fifth region, four guide holes gh are provided along the longitudinal direction in the sixth region, and one guide hole gh is provided along the longitudinal direction in the seventh region.
In other words, on the outer rail 14, the portion on the base end side (towards the game ball launching device 430) receives a greater impact from the collision of the game ball launched by the game ball launching device 430 than the portion on the tip end side (terminal end side), and the impact on the launch direction of the game ball launched by the game ball launching device 430 is greater.
As a result, the outer rail 14 requires higher mounting strength and more accurate positioning at the base end (towards the game ball launcher 430) than at the tip end (terminal end).
Therefore, in this embodiment, by increasing the number of guide holes gh provided in the base end portion (the gaming ball launcher 430 side) of the outer rail 14, it is possible to prevent positional deviation and vibration in the base end portion. Furthermore, the trajectory of the gaming ball is stabilized, making it possible to play according to the design values. In particular, it is possible to prevent damage and vibration of the outer rail 14 due to the impact of the launched gaming ball. This makes it possible to prevent the launched gaming ball from shaking due to such damage or vibration, and it is possible to stably send the launched gaming ball to the surface of the gaming board 11. As a result, irregular movement of the gaming ball is reduced, making it possible to play stably.
On the other hand, by reducing the number of guide holes gh provided at the tip (end) side of the outer rail 14, it is possible to make it easier to process the outer rail 14 and attach it to the rail base 13.
As a result, it is possible to prevent the outer rail 14 from shifting out of position or vibrating, while also facilitating the processing of the outer rail 14 and its attachment to the game board 11.

In particular, in this embodiment, the guide holes gh are not formed at the upper vertex P1 and the left vertex P2 of the outer rail 14.
That is, when an impact is applied to the top or bottom side or the left or right side of the game board 11, the impact is transmitted strongly to the upper vertex P1 or the left vertex P2 of the outer rail 14. As a result, if guide holes gh are formed at the upper vertex P1 and the left vertex P2 of the outer rail 14, the formation of the guide holes gh reduces the strength of the upper vertex P1 and the left vertex P2, and there is a risk that the outer rail 14 will be damaged when the above-mentioned impact is transmitted. Therefore, by forming the guide holes gh so as to avoid the upper vertex P1 and the left vertex P2 of the outer rail 14, it is possible to prevent damage to the outer rail 14.
In this embodiment, no guide hole gh is formed in the third region H3, which makes it possible to easily process the outer rail 14 and attach it to the rail base 13. Note that one or more guide holes gh may be formed in the third region H3.

As described above, in this embodiment, five guide holes gh are formed in the outer rail 14 along the longitudinal direction. The five guide holes gh are arranged at uneven intervals. In particular, the intervals between the five guide holes gh are set to be wider toward the tip (end) end. In other words, the intervals between the five guide holes gh are set to be narrower toward the base (start) end.
Each guide hole gh is formed at a position where it will not come into contact with a game ball launched by the game ball launching device 430. That is, as shown in Fig. 49, each guide hole gh is formed at the end of the innermost side (the front side of the game board 11) in the width direction of the outer rail 14. In particular, each guide hole gh is formed at a position on the innermost side (the front side of the game board 11) in the width direction of the outer rail 14, which is a distance from the front of the game board 11 that is a radius of the game ball toward the front side.

Next, a method for attaching the rails 12 and 14 to the game board 11 will be described.
To attach the inner rail 12 to the gaming board 11, a positioning protrusion (not shown) provided on the back side of the inner rail 12 is inserted into a positioning recess (not shown) provided on the front side of the gaming board 11. This positions the inner rail 12 in a predetermined position on the front side of the gaming board 11. The inner rail 12 is then fixed to the front side of the gaming board 11 with screws.
To attach the outer rail 14 to the game board 11, first, the rail base 13 is attached to the front of the game board 11. To do this, a positioning protrusion (not shown) on the back side of the rail base 13 is inserted into a positioning recess (not shown) on the front of the game board 11. This positions the rail base 13 in a predetermined position on the front of the game board 11. The rail base 13 is then fixed to the front of the game board 11 with screws.
Next, the outer rail 14 is attached to the rail base 13. To do this, the outer peripheral surface of the outer rail 14 is aligned with the guide surface 13b of the rail base 13. The base-end bent portion 14a of the outer rail 14 is inserted (fitted) into the base-end support portion of the rail base 13, and the tip-end bent portion 14b of the outer rail 14 is inserted (fitted) into the tip-end support portion of the rail base 13. Furthermore, the protrusions pr provided on the guide surface 13b are inserted (fitted) into the guide holes gh provided in the outer rail 14. As a result, the outer rail 14 is attached to the rail base 13 with substantially the entire outer peripheral surface of the outer rail 14 in the longitudinal direction supported by the guide surface 13b.

A game area 30 is defined in front of the game board 11 by an inner rail 12, an outer rail 14, etc. In the game area 30, a left-side path (left-hitting area) formed on the left side of the main image display device 31 and a right-side path (right-hitting area) formed on the right side of the main image display device 31 are configured as paths along which game balls flow.
Furthermore, on the front side of the game board 11, the inner guide surface 12a of the inner rail 12 and the outer guide surface 14c of the outer rail 14 are arranged facing each other at a predetermined distance. A launch passage r1 that guides game balls launched by the game ball launcher 430 to the game area 30 is formed between the inner guide surface 12a and the outer guide surface 14c.
In addition, a guide path r2 is formed in the gaming area 30 to guide (guide) the gaming balls launched from the launch path r1 to the right path. The guide path r2 is formed at the upper end of the gaming area 30. The guide path r2 is formed above the main image display device 31. The guide path r2 extends in an arc shape when viewed from the front side.
In this embodiment, the outer guide surface 14c constitutes the outer peripheral surface ra of the guide passage r2. A decorative portion 33 is provided above the opening in the front of the game board 11. The upper surface of the decorative portion 33 constitutes the inner peripheral surface rb of the guide passage r2.
A game ball launched by the game ball launcher 430 passes through the launch passage r1 and flows into the game area 30. If the momentum of the launched game ball is weak, the game ball that passes through the launch passage r1 flows into the left path. On the other hand, if the momentum of the launched game ball is strong, the game ball that passes through the launch passage r1 passes through the guide passage r2 and flows into the right path.

A board lamp 21 (see FIG. 3) is disposed in the play area 30 of the game board 11. The board lamp 21 includes a plurality of light-emitting elements (LEDs) that are driven by dynamic lighting control.
The main image display device 31 is attached to the back side of the set board. The main image display device 31 is configured with a variable display device such as a liquid crystal display, a CRT (Cathode Ray Tube) display, etc. The main image display device 31 has a display screen 31a that can display effect images.
As shown in Figure 45, the display screen 31a can be configured to have the following display areas for identification information for performance: special mini pattern display area A1, special 1 fourth pattern display area A2, special 2 fourth pattern display area A3, regular mini pattern display area A4, regular 4th pattern display area A5, and main performance pattern display area A6.

The special mini symbol display area A1 is configured to include three special symbol display areas (not shown). In each special symbol display area, it is possible to display the variable and stationary display of the special mini performance symbol a1. Each special mini performance symbol a1 is a symbol for performance, and is configured to include identification information (symbols) such as numbers, letters, symbols, characters, etc. In this embodiment, nine types of special mini performance symbols a1 (special mini performance symbols a1 that display each identification information of the numbers "1" to "9") are specified.
In the special chart 1 fourth pattern display area A2, it is possible to perform variable display and stop display of the special chart 1 fourth performance pattern a2. The special chart 1 fourth performance pattern a2 is a pattern for performance and is composed of identification information (patterns) such as numbers, letters, symbols, characters, etc. In this embodiment, two types of special chart 1 fourth performance pattern a2 (special chart 1 fourth performance pattern a2 that displays the identification information of "◯" and "X") are specified.
In the special chart 2 fourth pattern display area A3, it is possible to perform variable display and stop display of the special chart 2 fourth performance pattern a3. The special chart 2 fourth performance pattern a3 is a pattern for performance and is composed of identification information (patterns) such as numbers, letters, symbols, characters, etc. In this embodiment, two types of special chart 2 fourth performance pattern a3 (special chart 2 fourth performance pattern a3 that displays each identification information of "◯" and "X") are specified.

In the special mini symbol display area A1 and the special 1 fourth symbol display area A2, a display for notifying the result of the first special symbol lottery, which will be described later, is executed. Then, the result of the first special symbol lottery is notified by a combination of the three special mini effect symbols a1 stopped and displayed in the special mini symbol display area A1 and the special 1 fourth effect symbol a2 stopped and displayed in the special 1 fourth symbol display area A2.
That is, the variable display of the effect symbols a1 and a2 executed in the special mini symbol display area A1 and the special symbol 1 fourth symbol display area A2 corresponds to the variable display of the first special symbol executed in the special symbol 1 display device described later. Also, the stop display of the effect symbols a1 and a2 executed in the special mini symbol display area A1 and the special symbol 1 fourth symbol display area A2 corresponds to the stop display of the first special symbol executed in the special symbol 1 display device.
Specifically, during the variable display of the first special pattern on the special pattern 1 display device, a variable display of the special pattern mini performance pattern a1 is executed in the special pattern mini pattern display area A1 (each special pattern display area) as a display corresponding to the variable display of the first special pattern, and a variable display of the special pattern 1 fourth performance pattern a2 is executed in the special pattern 1 fourth pattern display area A2. Also, during the stopped display of the first special pattern on the special pattern 1 display device, a stopped display of the special pattern mini performance pattern a1 is executed in the special pattern mini pattern display area A1 (each special pattern display area) as a display corresponding to the stopped display of the first special pattern, and a stopped display of the special pattern 1 fourth performance pattern a2 is executed in the special pattern 1 fourth pattern display area A2.
In this case, the display of the first special pattern on the special chart 1 display device and the display of the performance patterns a1 and a2 in the special chart mini pattern display area A1 and the special chart 1 fourth pattern display area A2 are respectively associated with the time when the variable display starts, the content of the variable display, the time when the variable display ends, the time when the stopped display starts, and the lottery result indicated by the stopped displayed pattern.
Here, the variable display of the effect symbols a1 and a2 refers to a display in which the type of the special mini effect symbol a1 displayed in each special symbol display area of the special mini symbol display area A1 is sequentially changed, and the type of the special symbol 1 fourth symbol a2 displayed in the special symbol 1 fourth symbol display area A2 is sequentially changed. Also, the stop display of the effect symbols a1 and a2 refers to a display in which one type of special symbol mini effect symbol a1 is stopped in each special symbol display area of the special symbol mini symbol display area A1, and one type of special symbol 1 fourth symbol a2 is stopped in the special symbol 1 fourth symbol display area A2.

In the special mini symbol display area A1 and the special 2 fourth symbol display area A3, a display for notifying the result of the second special symbol lottery, which will be described later, is executed. Then, the result of the second special symbol lottery is notified by a combination of the three special mini effect symbols a1 stopped and displayed in the special mini symbol display area A1 and the special 2 fourth effect symbol a3 stopped and displayed in the special 2 fourth symbol display area A3.
That is, the variable display of the effect symbols a1 and a3 executed in the special mini symbol display area A1 and the special 2 fourth symbol display area A3 corresponds to the variable display of the second special symbol executed in the special symbol 2 display device described later. Also, the stop display of the effect symbols a1 and a3 executed in the special mini symbol display area A1 and the special symbol 2 fourth symbol display area A3 corresponds to the stop display of the second special symbol executed in the special symbol 2 display device.
Specifically, during the variable display of the second special pattern on the special pattern 2 display device, a variable display of the special pattern mini performance pattern a1 is executed in the special pattern mini pattern display area A1 (each special pattern display area) as a display corresponding to the variable display of the second special pattern, and a variable display of the special pattern 2 fourth performance pattern a3 is executed in the special pattern 2 fourth pattern display area A3. Also, during the stopped display of the second special pattern on the special pattern 2 display device, a stopped display of the special pattern mini performance pattern a1 is executed in the special pattern mini pattern display area A1 (each special pattern display area) as a display corresponding to the stopped display of the second special pattern, and a stopped display of the special pattern 2 fourth performance pattern a3 is executed in the special pattern 2 fourth pattern display area A3.
In this case, the display of the second special pattern on the special chart 2 display device and the display of the performance patterns a1 and a3 in the special chart mini pattern display area A1 and the special chart 2 fourth pattern display area A3 are respectively associated with the time when the variable display starts, the content of the variable display, the time when the variable display ends, the time when the stopped display starts, and the lottery result indicated by the stopped displayed pattern.
Here, the variable display of the effect symbols a1 and a3 refers to a display in which the type of the special mini effect symbol a1 displayed in each special symbol display area of the special mini symbol display area A1 is sequentially changed, and the type of the special symbol 2 fourth symbol a3 displayed in the special symbol 2 fourth symbol display area A3 is sequentially changed. Also, the stop display of the effect symbols a1 and a3 refers to a display in which one type of special symbol mini effect symbol a1 is stopped in each special symbol display area of the special symbol mini symbol display area A1, and one type of special symbol 2 fourth symbol a3 is stopped in the special symbol 2 fourth symbol display area A3.

The normal map mini-pattern display area A4 is configured to include three normal map display areas (not shown). In each normal map display area, it is possible to display the variable and stationary normal map mini-performance pattern a4. Each normal map mini-performance pattern a4 is a performance pattern and is configured to include identification information (pattern) such as numbers, letters, symbols, characters, etc. In this embodiment, nine types of normal map mini-performance patterns a4 (normal map mini-performance patterns a4 that display each identification information of the numbers "1" to "9") are specified.
The special mini-effect symbol a1 and the regular mini-effect symbol a4 are configured in different display modes. That is, the special mini-effect symbol a1 and the regular mini-effect symbol a4 differ in at least one of the "design (shape)" and "color (color scheme)." Specifically, the special mini-effect symbol a1 is configured with a first design (shape) and a first color (color scheme). On the other hand, the regular mini-effect symbol a4 is configured with a second design (shape) different from the first design (shape) and a second color (color scheme) different from the first color (color scheme). This makes it easy for players to distinguish between the special mini-effect symbol a1 corresponding to the special symbol and the regular mini-effect symbol a4 corresponding to the regular symbol.
In the normal map fourth pattern display area A5, it is possible to display the variable and stationary display of the normal map fourth performance pattern a5. The normal map fourth performance pattern a5 is a pattern for performance, and is composed of identification information (patterns) such as numbers, letters, symbols, characters, etc. In this embodiment, two types of normal map fourth performance patterns a5 (normal map fourth performance patterns a5 that display the identification information of "◯" and "X") are specified.

In the normal mini symbol display area A4 and the normal fourth symbol display area A5, a display for notifying the result of the normal symbol lottery, which will be described later, is executed. Then, the result of the normal symbol lottery is notified by the combination of the three normal mini effect symbols a4 stopped and displayed in the normal mini symbol display area A4 and the normal fourth effect symbol a5 stopped and displayed in the normal fourth symbol display area A5.
That is, the variable display of the effect symbols a4 and a5 executed in the normal mini symbol display area A4 and the normal fourth symbol display area A5 corresponds to the variable display of the normal symbol executed in the normal symbol display device described later. Also, the stop display of the effect symbols a4 and a5 executed in the normal mini symbol display area A4 and the normal fourth symbol display area A5 corresponds to the stop display of the normal symbol executed in the normal symbol display device.
Specifically, during the variable display of the normal pattern on the normal map display device, the variable display of the normal map mini performance pattern a4 is executed in the normal map mini pattern display area A4 (each special pattern display area), and the variable display of the normal map fourth performance pattern a5 is executed in the normal map fourth pattern display area A5. Also, during the stopped display of the normal pattern on the normal map display device, the stopped display of the normal map mini performance pattern a4 is executed in the normal map mini pattern display area A4 (each special pattern display area), and the stopped display of the normal map fourth performance pattern a5 is executed in the normal map fourth pattern display area A5.
In this case, the display of the normal pattern on the normal map display device and the display of the performance patterns a4, a5 in the normal map mini pattern display area A4 and the normal map fourth pattern display area A5 are respectively associated with the time when the variable display starts, the content of the variable display, the time when the variable display ends, the time when the stop display starts, and the lottery result indicated by the stopped displayed pattern.
Here, the variable display of the performance symbols a4 and a5 refers to a display in which the type of the normal mini performance symbol a4 displayed in each special symbol display area of the normal mini symbol display area A4 is sequentially changed, and the type of the normal fourth symbol a5 displayed in the normal fourth symbol display area A5 is sequentially changed. Also, the stop display of the performance symbols a4 and a5 refers to a display in which one type of normal mini performance symbol a4 is stopped in each special symbol display area of the normal mini symbol display area A4, and one type of normal fourth symbol a5 is stopped in the normal fourth symbol display area A5.

The main effect symbol display area A6 is configured to include three effect symbol display areas (not shown). In each effect symbol display area, it is possible to display the main effect symbol a6 in a variable and stationary state. Each main effect symbol a6 is a symbol for effecting a game, and is configured to include identification information (symbols) such as numbers, letters, symbols, characters, etc. In this embodiment, nine types of main effect symbols a6 (main effect symbols a6 that display each identification information of the numbers "1" to "9") are defined.
In particular, a first main effect symbol a6 and a second effect symbol a6 are defined as types of the main effect symbol a6. That is, in this embodiment, nine types of first main effect symbols a6 (first main effect symbols a6 displaying each identification information of the numbers "1" to "9") and nine types of second main effect symbols a6 (second main effect symbols a6 displaying each identification information of the numbers "1" to "9") are defined.
The first main effect symbol a6 and the second main effect symbol a6 are configured in different display modes. That is, the first main effect symbol a6 and the second main effect symbol a6 are different in at least one of the "design (shape)" and "color (color scheme)." Specifically, the first main effect symbol a6 is configured in a first design (shape) and a first color (color scheme). On the other hand, the second main effect symbol a6 is configured in a second design (shape) different from the first design (shape) and a second color (color scheme) different from the first color (color scheme). This makes it easy for the player to distinguish between the first main effect symbol a6 corresponding to the special symbol and the second main effect symbol a6 corresponding to the normal symbol.

When the normal state or the time-saving state 1 described later is occurring, a display is executed in the main effect symbol display area A6 to notify the result of the special symbol lottery (first special symbol lottery or second special symbol lottery). At this time, a display is executed in the main effect symbol display area A6 to notify the result of the special symbol lottery (first special symbol lottery or second special symbol lottery) using the first main effect symbol a6. Then, the result of the special symbol lottery (first special symbol lottery or second special symbol lottery) is notified by the combination of the three first main effect symbols a6 stopped and displayed in the main effect symbol display area A6.
That is, when the normal state or time-saving state 1 is occurring, the variable display of the first main effect symbol a6 executed in the main effect symbol display area A6 corresponds to the variable display of the special mini effect symbol a1 executed in the special mini effect symbol display area A1. Also, when the normal state or time-saving state 1 is occurring, the stopped display of the first main effect symbol a6 executed in the main effect symbol display area A6 corresponds to the stopped display of the special mini effect symbol a1 executed in the special mini effect symbol display area A1.
Specifically, when the normal state or time-saving state 1 is occurring, during the variable display of the special pattern (first special pattern or second special pattern) on the special pattern display device (special pattern 1 display device or special pattern 2 display device), a variable display of the first main effect pattern a6 is executed in the main effect pattern display area A6 (each effect pattern display area) as a display corresponding to the variable display of the special pattern. In other words, during the normal state or time-saving state 1 is occurring, during the variable display of the special pattern mini effect pattern a1, a variable display of the first main effect pattern a6 is executed in the main effect pattern display area A6 (each effect pattern display area) as a display corresponding to the variable display of the special pattern mini effect pattern a1. Also, when the normal state or time-saving state 1 is occurring, during the stopped display of a special pattern (first special pattern or second special pattern) on the special pattern display device (special pattern 1 display device or special pattern 2 display device), a stopped display of the first main effect pattern a6 is executed in the main effect pattern display area A6 (each effect pattern display area) as a display corresponding to the stopped display of the special pattern. In other words, during the normal state or time-saving state 1 is occurring, during the stopped display of the special pattern mini effect pattern a1, a stopped display of the first main effect pattern a6 is executed in the main effect pattern display area A6 (each effect pattern display area) as a display corresponding to the stopped display of the special pattern mini effect pattern a1.

Here, the first main performance pattern a6 and the special mini performance pattern a1 are configured with a common (identical/similar) display mode. That is, the first main performance pattern a6 and the special mini performance pattern a1 have at least one of the "design (shape)" and "color (color scheme)" in common (they are identical/similar). In this embodiment, the first main performance pattern a6 and the special mini performance pattern a1 have both the "design (shape)" and the "color (color scheme)" in common (they are identical/similar). Specifically, the first main performance pattern a6 is configured with a first design (shape) and a first color (color scheme). On the other hand, the special mini performance pattern a1 is configured with a first design (shape) and a first color (color scheme). However, the special mini performance pattern a1 is configured to be smaller in size than the first main performance pattern a6. This allows the player to easily recognize that the first main performance pattern a6 and the special mini performance pattern a1 correspond to each other.
Furthermore, the same number of effect symbols are displayed in the main effect symbol display area A6 and the special mini symbol display area A1. That is, three first main effect symbols a6 are displayed in the main effect symbol display area A6, and three special mini symbol effect symbols a1 are displayed in the special mini symbol display area A1. Specifically, the main effect symbol display area A6 is configured to include a first effect symbol display area, a second effect symbol display area, and a third effect symbol display area. Furthermore, the special mini symbol display area A1 is configured to include a first special symbol display area, a second special symbol display area, and a third special symbol display area. The first main effect symbol a6 displayed in the first effect symbol display area of the main effect symbol display area A6 corresponds to the special mini symbol effect symbol a1 displayed in the first special symbol display area of the special mini symbol display area A1. The first main performance pattern a6 displayed in the first performance pattern display area of the main performance pattern display area A6, and the special mini performance pattern a1 displayed in the first special pattern display area of the special mini pattern display area A1, are configured with a common (identical/similar) display mode (in this embodiment, the same "design (shape)" and "color (color scheme)"). Also, the first main performance pattern a6 displayed in the second performance pattern display area of the main performance pattern display area A6 corresponds to the special mini performance pattern a1 displayed in the second special pattern display area of the special mini pattern display area A1. The first main performance pattern a6 displayed in the second performance pattern display area of the main performance pattern display area A6, and the special mini performance pattern a1 displayed in the second special pattern display area of the special mini pattern display area A1 are configured with a common (identical/similar) display mode (in this embodiment, the same "design (shape)" and "color (color scheme)"). Furthermore, the first main effect pattern a6 displayed in the third effect pattern display area of the main effect pattern display area A6 corresponds to the special mini effect pattern a1 displayed in the third special pattern display area of the special mini effect pattern display area A1. The first main effect pattern a6 displayed in the third effect pattern display area of the main effect pattern display area A6 and the special mini effect pattern a1 displayed in the third special pattern display area of the special mini effect pattern display area A1 are configured with a common (identical/similar) display mode (in this embodiment, the same "design (shape)" and "color (color scheme)").
As a result of the above, when the normal state or time-saving state 1 occurs, the player can easily recognize that the three first main performance patterns a6 displayed in the main performance pattern display area A6 correspond to the three special mini performance patterns a1 displayed in the special mini pattern display area A1.

On the other hand, when the time-saving state 2 or time-saving state 3 described below is occurring, a display to notify the result of the normal symbol lottery is executed in the main effect symbol display area A6. At this time, a display to notify the result of the normal symbol lottery is executed in the main effect symbol display area A6 using the second main effect symbols a6. Then, the result of the normal symbol lottery is notified by the combination of the three second main effect symbols a6 stopped and displayed in the main effect symbol display area A6.
That is, when time-saving state 2 or time-saving state 3 is occurring, the variable display of the second main effect symbol a6 executed in the main effect symbol display area A6 corresponds to the variable display of the normal mini effect symbol a4 executed in the normal mini effect symbol display area A4. Also, when time-saving state 2 or time-saving state 3 is occurring, the stop display of the second main effect symbol a6 executed in the main effect symbol display area A6 corresponds to the stop display of the normal mini effect symbol a4 executed in the normal mini effect symbol display area A4.
Specifically, when time-shortening state 2 or time-shortening state 3 is occurring, during the variable display of the normal pattern on the normal map display device, a variable display of the second main effect pattern a6 is executed in the main effect pattern display area A6 (each effect pattern display area) as a display corresponding to the variable display of the normal pattern. In other words, during time-shortening state 2 or time-shortening state 3 is occurring, during the variable display of the normal mini effect pattern a4, a variable display of the second main effect pattern a6 is executed in the main effect pattern display area A6 (each effect pattern display area) as a display corresponding to the variable display of the normal mini effect pattern a4. Also, during time-shortening state 2 or time-shortening state 3 is occurring, during the stopped display of the normal pattern on the normal map display device, a stopped display of the second main effect pattern a6 is executed in the main effect pattern display area A6 (each effect pattern display area) as a display corresponding to the stopped display of the normal pattern. In other words, when time-saving state 2 or time-saving state 3 is occurring, while the normal mini performance pattern a4 is displayed, the second main performance pattern a6 is displayed in the main performance pattern display area A6 (each performance pattern display area) as a display corresponding to the display of the normal mini performance pattern a4.

Here, the second main performance symbol a6 and the regular mini performance symbol a4 are configured with a common (identical/similar) display mode. That is, the second main performance symbol a6 and the regular mini performance symbol a4 have at least one of the "design (shape)" and "color (color scheme)" in common (they are identical/similar). In this embodiment, the second main performance symbol a6 and the regular mini performance symbol a4 have both the "design (shape)" and the "color (color scheme)" in common (they are identical/similar). Specifically, the second main performance symbol a6 is configured with a second design (shape) and a second color (color scheme). On the other hand, the regular mini performance symbol a4 is configured with a second design (shape) and a second color (color scheme). However, the regular mini performance symbol a4 is configured to be smaller in size than the second main performance symbol a6. This allows the player to easily recognize that the second main performance symbol a6 corresponds to the regular mini performance symbol a4.
Furthermore, the same number of effect symbols are displayed in the main effect symbol display area A6 and the regular mini-symbol display area A4. That is, three second main effect symbols a6 are displayed in the main effect symbol display area A6, and three regular mini-symbol effect symbols a4 are displayed in the regular mini-symbol display area A4. Specifically, the main effect symbol display area A6 is configured to include a first effect symbol display area, a second effect symbol display area, and a third effect symbol display area. Furthermore, the regular mini-symbol display area A4 is configured to include a first regular symbol display area, a second regular symbol display area, and a third regular symbol display area. The second main effect symbol a6 displayed in the first effect symbol display area of the main effect symbol display area A6 corresponds to the regular mini-symbol effect symbol a4 displayed in the first regular symbol display area of the regular mini-symbol display area A4. The second main performance pattern a6 displayed in the first performance pattern display area of the main performance pattern display area A6, and the regular mini performance pattern a4 displayed in the first regular pattern display area of the regular mini pattern display area A4, are configured with a common (identical/similar) display mode (in this embodiment, the same "design (shape)" and "color (color scheme)"). Also, the second main performance pattern a6 displayed in the second performance pattern display area of the main performance pattern display area A6 corresponds to the regular mini performance pattern a4 displayed in the second regular pattern display area of the regular mini pattern display area A4. The second main performance pattern a6 displayed in the second performance pattern display area of the main performance pattern display area A6, and the regular mini performance pattern a4 displayed in the second regular pattern display area of the regular mini pattern display area A4, are configured with a common (identical/similar) display mode (in this embodiment, the same "design (shape)" and "color (color scheme)"). Furthermore, the second main effect pattern a6 displayed in the third effect pattern display area of the main effect pattern display area A6 corresponds to the regular mini effect pattern a4 displayed in the third regular display area of the regular mini effect pattern display area A4. The second main effect pattern a6 displayed in the third effect pattern display area of the main effect pattern display area A6 and the regular mini effect pattern a4 displayed in the third regular display area of the regular mini effect pattern display area A4 are configured with a common (identical/similar) display mode (in this embodiment, the same "design (shape)" and "color (color scheme)").
As a result of the above, when time-saving state 2 or time-saving state 3 occurs, the player can easily recognize that the three second main performance patterns a6 displayed in the main performance pattern display area A6 correspond to the three regular mini performance patterns a4 displayed in the regular mini pattern display area A4.

In addition, the display screen 31a can be configured to have the following display areas related to reservations: a pre-change reserved pattern display area B1, a changing reserved pattern display area B2, a special reserved pattern number display area B3, and a regular reserved pattern number display area B4.
When the normal state or time-saving state 1 is occurring, the reserved pattern h corresponding to the special pattern 1 game information before the special pattern hit determination (start determination) is executed (before the first special pattern variable display starts) is displayed in the pre-variation reserved pattern display area B1. Also, when the normal state or time-saving state 1 is occurring, the reserved pattern h corresponding to the special pattern game information (special pattern 1 game information or special pattern 2 game information) after the special pattern hit determination (start determination) is executed (during the execution of the variable display/stop display of the special pattern) is displayed in the variable reserved pattern display area B2.
On the other hand, when time-saving state 2 or time-saving state 3 is occurring, the reserved pattern h corresponding to the normal pattern game information before the normal pattern hit/miss judgment (start judgment) is executed (before the normal pattern variable display starts) is displayed in the reserved pattern display area B1 before variation. Also, when the time-saving state (time-saving state 1 or time-saving state 2) is occurring, the reserved pattern h corresponding to the normal pattern game information after the normal pattern hit/miss judgment (start judgment) is executed (during the normal pattern variable display/stop display) is displayed in the variable reserved pattern display area B2.
The special drawing reservation number display area B3 displays the number of special drawing 1 reservations described below.
The regular map reservation number display area B4 displays the regular map reservation number described below.

As a result of the above, during the normal state, an effect to announce the result of the first special pattern lottery is executed mainly in the main effect pattern display area A6 using the first main effect pattern a6, and a reserved pattern h corresponding to the first special pattern lottery (special pattern 1 game information) is displayed in the reserved pattern display areas B1 and B2.
On the other hand, during the occurrence of the time-saving state 1, an effect to notify the result of the second special pattern lottery is executed mainly in the main effect pattern display area A6 using the first main effect pattern a6, and a reserved pattern h corresponding to the first special pattern lottery (special pattern 1 game information) is displayed in the reserved pattern display area B2.
On the other hand, when time-saving state 2 or time-saving state 3 occurs, an effect to notify the result of the normal pattern lottery is executed mainly in the main effect pattern display area A6 using the second main effect pattern a6, and a reserved pattern h corresponding to the normal pattern lottery (normal pattern game information) is displayed in the reserved pattern display areas B1 and B2.
As a result, in the pachinko machine 1, when the normal state or time-shortened state 1 occurs, a presentation is mainly executed to notify the result of the special symbol lottery, and when the time-shortened state 2 or time-shortened state 3 occurs, a presentation is mainly executed to notify the result of the normal symbol lottery.

The sub-image display device 32 is disposed at a position on the front side of the main image display device 31 .
The sub-image display device 32 is configured by a variable display device such as a liquid crystal display, a CRT display, etc. The sub-image display device 32 has a display screen 32a capable of displaying a performance image.
The sub-image display device 32 can be displaced (moved) in the vertical direction by a drive mechanism (not shown). Specifically, the sub-image display device 32 can be displaced within a predetermined range including an origin position (see FIG. 2) and a performance position (not shown) below the origin position.
The sub-image display device 32 disposed (displaced) at the origin position is disposed above the display screen 31a of the main image display device 31 and does not cover the display screen 31a. On the other hand, the sub-image display device 32 disposed (displaced) at the performance position is disposed in front of the display screen 31a of the main image display device 31 and covers part of the display screen 31a.

The left path is provided with a first starting opening 51. The first starting opening 51 is an entry opening (a so-called "navel") that opens upward and allows game balls to enter at all times. The first starting opening 51 allows game balls flowing down the left path to enter (game balls flowing down the right path cannot enter).
A special symbol 1 start port switch 101 (see FIG. 3) is disposed within the first start port 51. The special symbol 1 start port switch 101 outputs a detection signal to the main control board 200 in response to the detection of a game ball entering the first start port 51 (entry of a game ball into the first start port 51). The main control board 200 executes a first special symbol lottery in response to the input of the detection signal from the special symbol 1 start port switch 101.

To the left of the first starting opening 51 on the left path are an upper left other winning opening 57a, a middle left other winning opening 57b, and a lower left other winning opening 57c. Each of the other winning openings 57a-57c is an opening that opens upward and allows game balls to enter at all times. Each of the other winning openings 57a-57c allows game balls that flow down the left path to enter (but not game balls that flow down the right path).
A left prize opening switch 106 (see FIG. 3) is disposed on the gaming board 11. In response to the detection of a gaming ball entering one of the other prize openings 57a to 57c (entry of a gaming ball into one of the other prize openings 57a to 57c), the left prize opening switch 106 outputs a detection signal to the main control board 200. In response to the input of the detection signal from the left prize opening switch 106, the main control board 200 causes the gaming ball payout device 440 to perform a payout operation of prize balls.

At the most upstream of the right-hand path, there is provided a large prize opening 55. The large prize opening 55 is provided with a special electric device (special electric device) 55a that can be displaced between a closed state that makes it impossible (difficult) for a game ball to enter the large prize opening 55 and an open state that makes it possible (easy) for a game ball to enter the large prize opening 55.
The special electric device 55a is opened and closed by a special electric device solenoid 65 (see FIG. 3). Normally, the special electric device 55a is closed, making it impossible (difficult) for game balls to enter the large prize opening 55, but when a small win game state or a large win game state occurs, the special electric device 55a is opened, making it possible (easy) for game balls to enter. The large prize opening 55 allows game balls flowing down the right path to enter (game balls flowing down the left path cannot enter).
A count switch 103 (see FIG. 3) is disposed within the large prize opening 55. The count switch 103 outputs a detection signal to the main control board 200 in response to the detection of a game ball entering the large prize opening 55 (entry of a game ball into the large prize opening 55). In response to the input of the detection signal from the count switch 103, the main control board 200 causes the game ball payout device 440 to perform the payout operation of the prize ball.
In addition, within the large prize opening 55, there are provided a V area (not shown), a discharge area (not shown), and a distribution means (not shown) that distributes game balls that enter the large prize opening 55 to either the V area or the discharge area.
A V-area switch 110 (see FIG. 3) is disposed in the V-area. The V-area switch 110 outputs a detection signal to the main control board 200 in response to the detection of a gaming ball passing through the V-area (passage of the gaming ball through the V-area). In response to the input of the detection signal from the V-area switch 110, the main control board 200 sets "1" in the V winning flag area of the RAM 230, which will be described later.
The distribution means can be switched between a V-passing state in which the game balls entering the large winning opening 55 are distributed to the V region, and a non-V-passing state in which the game balls entering the large winning opening 55 are distributed to the discharge region.
That is, when the distribution means is displaced to the V-passing state, the game ball that has entered the large prize opening 55 is distributed to the V-area. This makes it impossible for the game ball that has entered the large prize opening 55 to pass through the discharge area.
On the other hand, when the distribution means is displaced to the non-V passing state, the game ball that has entered the large prize opening 55 is distributed to the discharge area. This makes it impossible for the game ball that has entered the large prize opening 55 to pass through the V area.
The distribution means is displaced by a V-zone solenoid 66 (see FIG. 3).
A gaming ball that enters the big prize opening 55 is first detected by the count switch 103, then sorted by the sorting means into either the V area or the discharge area, and after passing through the area, is discharged into the discharge path. At this time, the gaming ball sorted into the V area is detected by the V area switch 110.

A second starting opening 52 is provided downstream of the big winning opening 55 on the right path. The second starting opening 52 is provided with a normal electric device (normal electric device) 52a that can be displaced between a closed state that makes it impossible (difficult) for a game ball to enter the second starting opening 52 and an open state that makes it possible (easy) for a game ball to enter the second starting opening 52.
The normal electric device 52a is opened and closed by a normal electric device solenoid 64 (see FIG. 3). Normally, the second starting port 52 is closed, making it impossible (difficult) for game balls to enter, but when a normal winning game state occurs, the normal electric device 52a is opened, making it possible for game balls to enter. The second starting port 52 allows game balls flowing down the right path to enter (but not game balls flowing down the left path).
A special symbol 2 start port switch 102 (see FIG. 3) is disposed within the second start port 52. The special symbol 2 start port switch 102 outputs a detection signal to the main control board 200 in response to the detection of a game ball entering the second start port 52 (entry of a game ball into the second start port 52). The main control board 200 executes a second special symbol lottery in response to the input of the detection signal from the special symbol 2 start port switch 102.

A start gate 41 is provided downstream of the second start port 52 on the right-hand path. The start gate 41 is formed to allow game balls to pass through at all times. The start gate 41 allows game balls flowing down the right-hand path to pass through (but does not allow game balls flowing down the left-hand path to pass through).
A gate switch 104 (see FIG. 3) is provided in the start gate 41. The gate switch 104 outputs a detection signal to the main control board 200 in response to the detection of a gaming ball passing through the start gate 41 (passage of the gaming ball through the start gate 41). In response to the input of the detection signal from the gate switch 104, the main control board 200 executes a normal symbol lottery.
It is also acceptable to provide an actuation port instead of the start gate 41. The actuation port is a ball entrance port that opens upward, etc., and is configured to allow game balls to enter at all times. When an actuation port is provided, a gate switch 104 is provided within the actuation port. The gate switch 104 is configured to output a detection signal to the main control board 200 in response to the detection of a game ball entering the actuation port (entry of a game ball into the actuation port). The main control board 200 is configured to execute a normal symbol lottery in response to the input of the detection signal from the gate switch 104.

A right other winning opening 56 is provided downstream of the start gate 41 on the right path. The right other winning opening 56 is an opening that opens upward and allows game balls to enter at all times. The right other winning opening 56 allows game balls that flow down the right path to enter (game balls that flow down the left path cannot enter).
A right prize opening switch 105 (see FIG. 3) is disposed inside the right prize opening 56. The right prize opening switch 105 outputs a detection signal to the main control board 200 in response to the detection of a game ball entering the right prize opening 56 (entry of a game ball into the right prize opening 56). In response to the input of the detection signal from the right prize opening switch 105, the main control board 200 causes the game ball payout device 440 to perform the payout operation of the prize balls.

An outlet 58 is provided at the most downstream side of the game area 30 for discharging game balls that do not enter any of the winning holes 51, 52, 55, 56, 57a to 57c (win).
Here, the inner frame unit 3 includes a discharge path (not shown) through which game balls discharged from the play area 30 pass. Specifically, the discharge path is attached to the back side of the inner frame of the inner frame unit 3. The pachinko machine 1 is configured so that all game balls shot into the play area 30 (all game balls discharged from the play area 30) pass through the discharge path. That is, game balls shot into the play area 30 are discharged from the play area 30 by entering any of the winning holes 51, 52, 55, 56, 57a to 57c or by passing through the outlet 58, and then flow into the discharge path.
Specifically, game balls that enter each of the winning holes 51, 52, 55, 56, 57a to 57c are detected by switches 101, 102, 103, 105, 106, 110 disposed in the winning hole, and then guided to the discharge path. In addition, game balls that are discharged from the outlet 58 are also guided to the discharge path.
An out switch 109 (see FIG. 3) is disposed in the inner frame unit 3. The out switch 109 outputs a detection signal to the main control board 200 in response to the detection of a game ball passing through the discharge path (a game ball discharged from the game area 30). As a result, all game balls discharged from the game area 30 are detected by the out switch 109.
Furthermore, in the game area 30, a plurality of nails (not shown) are arranged so as to guide the game balls to each of the winning holes 51, 52, 55, 56, 57a to 57c and the starting gate 41.

A main display device 60 is disposed on the gaming board 11. The main display device 60 is configured to include a plurality of lighting elements (segments). Each lighting element is configured as a light-emitting element (in this embodiment, an LED).
The main display device 60 displays information related to the game.
The main display device 60 is configured to include a special chart 1 display device, a special chart 2 display device, a normal chart display device, a special chart 1 reserve display device, a special chart 2 reserve display device, a normal chart reserve display device, a round display device, a right-hand hit display device, a probability variable display device, and a time-saving display device. Note that in this embodiment, the special chart 2 reserve display device and the probability variable display device are not used.
Specifically, the main display device 60 is configured to include 32 lighting elements (LED1 to LED32).
In the main display device 60, LED1 to LED8 constitute the special chart 1 display device, LED7 to LED16 constitute the special chart 2 display device, LED17 and 18 constitute the normal chart display device, LED19 to LED23 constitute the round display device, LED24 constitutes the right-hit display device, LED25 and 26 constitute the special chart 1 reserve display device, LED27 and 28 constitute the special chart 2 reserve display device, LED29 and 30 constitute the normal chart reserve display device, LED31 constitutes the probability change display device, and LED32 constitutes the time-saving display device.

The special symbol 1 display device is capable of displaying the variation and stopping of the first special symbol consisting of numbers, symbols, etc. The special symbol 1 display device displays the result of the first special symbol lottery by the first special symbol that is stopped and displayed.
The special symbol 2 display device is capable of displaying the variation and stopping of the second special symbol consisting of numbers, symbols, etc. The special symbol 2 display device then displays the result of the second special symbol lottery by the second special symbol that is stopped and displayed.
Here, the display of the first special pattern on the special chart 1 display device and the display of the performance patterns a1 and a2 in the special chart mini pattern display area A1 and the special chart 1 fourth pattern display area A2 are respectively associated with the time when the variable display starts, the time when the variable display ends, the time when the stopped display starts, and the lottery result indicated by the stopped displayed pattern.
In addition, the display of the second special pattern on the special chart 2 display device and the display of the performance patterns a1 and a3 in the special chart mini pattern display area A1 and the special chart 2 fourth pattern display area A3 are respectively associated with the time when the variable display starts, the time when the variable display ends, the time when the stopped display starts, and the lottery result indicated by the stopped displayed pattern.
Then, when the first special pattern (stop pattern) displayed in a stopped state on the special chart 1 display device becomes a specific pattern (jackpot pattern), or when the second special pattern (stop pattern) displayed in a stopped state on the special chart 2 display device becomes a specific pattern (jackpot pattern), a jackpot game state, which is a game state advantageous to the player, is created.
In addition, when the second special pattern (stop pattern) displayed in a stopped state on the special pattern 2 display device becomes a specific pattern (small win pattern), a small win game state, which is a game state advantageous to the player, is generated.
The normal symbol display device is capable of displaying the fluctuations and stopping of normal symbols consisting of numbers, symbols, etc. The normal symbol display device then displays the results of the normal symbol lottery based on the normal symbol that is displayed in a stopped state.
Here, the display of the normal pattern on the normal map display device and the display of the performance patterns a4 and a5 in the normal map mini pattern display area A4 and the normal map fourth pattern display area A5 are associated with the time when the variable display starts, the time when the variable display ends, the time when the stopped display starts, and the lottery result indicated by the stopped displayed pattern.
When the normal symbol displayed on the normal symbol display device becomes a specific symbol (normal symbol winning symbol), a normal symbol winning game state, which is a game state advantageous to the player, is generated.

The special pattern 1 pending display device displays the number of times the display of the lottery results of the first special pattern lottery has been pending (number of special pattern 1 pending).
As described above, in this embodiment, the special chart 2 reservation display device is not used.
The regular symbol reserved display device displays the number of times the display of the lottery result of the regular symbol lottery has been reserved (number of reserved regular symbols).
The round display device displays the number of rounds of play executed during the jackpot game state (type of jackpot game state).
The right-hand shot display device displays the path (left-hand path or right-hand path) along which the game ball should be shot.
As described above, in this embodiment, a probability change display device is not used.
The time-saving display device displays the current game status (time-saving control is running or stopped).

One or more movable body units (not shown) are also provided in the pachinko machine 1. In this embodiment, one or more movable body units are provided in the front frame unit 4, and one or more movable body units are provided in the game board unit 10.
Each movable body unit of the front frame unit 4 is arranged on the front of the decorative part 4b, on the top surface of the tray unit 5, etc., and is capable of performing predetermined performance operations.
Each movable body unit of the game board unit 10 is attached to the front side of the set board. Specifically, each movable body unit is disposed in the space (hereinafter referred to as the "performance space") between the game board 11 and the main image display device 31 (display screen 31a). Each movable body unit is capable of performing a predetermined performance action in the performance space.
Each movable body unit includes a performance member, a drive mechanism, a drive source, and a position detection sensor 26 (see FIG. 3). In this embodiment, a motor 23 (see FIG. 3) is used as the drive source. The motor 23 is a stepping motor. Note that a solenoid may also be used as the drive source.
The effect member can be displaced in a predetermined direction by a drive mechanism. Specifically, the effect member can be displaced to a plurality of positions including an initial position and an effect position. The effect member is driven (displaced) by a motor 23.

The position detection sensor 26 is composed of a photosensor or the like. The position detection sensor 26 detects the position of the performance component. Specifically, the position detection sensor 26 includes a light-projecting unit and a light-receiving unit that receives light projected from the light-projecting unit. The position detection sensor 26 outputs a detection signal to the performance control board 300 in response to the light-receiving unit receiving (detecting) the light projected from the light-projecting unit. On the other hand, the position detection sensor 26 stops outputting the detection signal to the performance control board 300 when the light-receiving unit does not receive (detect) the light projected from the light-projecting unit.
Furthermore, a shielding plate is provided at a predetermined position on the performance member. When the performance member is placed in its initial position, the shielding plate is placed between the light-emitting portion and light-receiving portion of the position detection sensor 26, blocking light from entering the light-receiving portion. As a result, when the performance member is placed in its initial position, the output of a detection signal from the position detection sensor 26 to the performance control board 300 is stopped. On the other hand, when the performance member is not placed in its initial position, a detection signal is output from the position detection sensor 26 to the performance control board 300.
This makes it possible for the performance control board 300 to detect whether or not the performance component is positioned in the initial position based on the input status of the detection signal from the position detection sensor 26.

The pachinko machine 1 is also provided with detection sensors that detect various abnormal conditions.
In this embodiment, the detection sensors provided include a glass frame opening sensor 107 (see Figure 3), an inner frame opening sensor 108 (see Figure 3), a vibration detection sensor 113 (see Figure 3), a radio wave detection sensor 114 (see Figure 3), and a magnetic detection sensor 115 (see Figure 3).
The glass frame opening sensor 107 detects the opening of the front frame unit 4 relative to the inner frame unit 3. Then, in response to the opening of the front frame unit 4 relative to the inner frame unit 3, the glass frame opening sensor 107 transmits a detection signal to the main control board 200 via the dispensing control board 400.
The inner frame opening sensor 108 detects the opening of the inner frame unit 3 relative to the outer frame unit 2. Then, in response to the opening of the inner frame unit 3 relative to the outer frame unit 2, the inner frame opening sensor 108 transmits a detection signal to the main control board 200 via the dispensing control board 400.
The vibration detection sensor 113 detects vibrations of the game board 11. In this embodiment, the vibration detection sensor 113 is disposed on the game board 11. Then, the vibration detection sensor 113 transmits a detection signal to the main control board 200 in response to detecting vibrations of the game board 11.
The radio wave detection sensors 114 detect radio waves generated around the gaming board 11. In this embodiment, two radio wave detection sensors 114 are arranged on the gaming board 11. Each radio wave detection sensor 114 transmits a detection signal to the main control board 200 in response to the detection of radio waves.
The magnetic detection sensors 115 detect magnetism generated around the gaming board 11. In this embodiment, three magnetic detection sensors 115 are provided. Specifically, one magnetic detection sensor 115 is provided in the inner frame unit 3 (discharge path). Two magnetic detection sensors 115 are provided in the gaming board 11. The magnetic detection sensor 115 provided in the inner frame unit 3 transmits a detection signal to the main control board 200 via the payout control board 400 in response to the detection of magnetism. Each magnetic detection sensor 115 provided on the gaming board 11 transmits a detection signal to the main control board 200 in response to the detection of magnetism.

(Control system configuration)
Next, the configuration of the control system in the pachinko machine 1 will be described.
FIG. 3 is a block diagram showing the configuration of a control system of a pachinko machine.
The pachinko machine 1 is equipped with various control boards.
Specifically, as shown in Figure 3, the pachinko machine 1 is equipped with multiple control boards, such as a main control board 200, a performance control board 300, a payout control board 400, a power supply board 600 that supplies power (electricity) to each of the control boards 200, 300, 400, etc., a driver board 310, a sub-connection board 320, etc.
The control boards 200, 300, 400, and 600 are independent (separate) circuit boards, and are housed in individual board cases (such as the main board case 250, which will be described later).
The main control board 200 and the presentation control board 300 are included in the game board unit 10. Specifically, the main control board 200 and the presentation control board 300 are attached to the back side of the game board 11.
The dispensing control board 400 is included in the inner frame unit 3. Specifically, the dispensing control board 400 is attached to the back side of the inner frame provided in the inner frame unit 3.

(Configuration of main control board 200)
First, the configuration of the main control board 200 will be described.
The main control board 200 controls the progress of the game.
The main control board 200 is composed of a one-chip microcomputer, a clock generating circuit 202, a random number generating circuit 203, an input port 204, an output port 205, a performance display device 206, a RAM clear switch 207, a setting key switch 208, a sink driver 240, source drivers 250a, 250b, etc.
The one-chip microcomputer is an LSI that integrates a CPU core, a register, a semiconductor memory, etc. Specifically, the one-chip microcomputer includes a CPU 210, a ROM 220, a RAM 230, etc.

The main control board 200 is configured to include a memory area used by the CPU 210. The memory area used by the CPU 210 is configured to include a memory area (0000H to 2FFFH) allocated to the ROM 220 and a memory area (F000H to F3FFH) allocated to the RAM 230.
The ROM 220 (memory area of the ROM 220) is configured to include a used area m1 (0000H to 1A7AH) and an unused area m2 (2000H to 2BFFH).
The used area m1 is configured to include a program area, an unused area, and a data area. The program area stores a program (program code) for controlling the progress of the game. The data area stores data (program data) for controlling the progress of the game. Note that the used area m1 may be configured without including the unused area.
The unused area m2 includes a program area and a data area.
The program area stores a program (program code) for executing processing related to tests defined in the Gaming Machine Regulations, and a program (program code) for controlling the display of the performance display device 206 (specifically, calculating the base ratio). The data area stores data (program data) for executing processing related to tests defined in the Gaming Machine Regulations, and data (program data) for controlling the display of the performance display device 206.
In addition to the used area m1 and unused area m2, the ROM 220 also has an unused area, a ROM comment area, a program management area, and the like.
The ROM comment area stores arbitrary data such as the program title, version, etc. On the other hand, the program management area stores information necessary for the CPU 210 to execute various programs.
In addition, the ROM 220 has an unused area m3 of a predetermined number of bytes (for example, 16 bytes or more) between the used area m1 and the unused area m2, thereby clearly defining the boundary between the used area m1 and the unused area m2.

The RAM 230 (memory area of the RAM 230) is configured to include a used area M1 (F000H to F1FFH) and a non-used area M2 (F300H to F3FFH).
The used area M1 includes a work area and a stack area.
The work area is used as an area for temporarily storing various data during execution of the program (program for controlling the progress of the game) stored in the used area m1. On the other hand, the stack area is used as an area for temporarily saving various data during execution of the program (program for controlling the progress of the game) stored in the used area m1. Note that the used area M1 does not have to be configured to include an unused area.
Specifically, the work area is composed of a setting value area, a gaming machine status flag area, a checksum area, a backup flag area, an error-related area, a normal game-related area 1, and a normal game-related area 2.
The set value area stores a set value. The gaming machine status flag area stores a gaming machine status flag. The checksum area stores a checksum. The backup flag area stores a backup flag. The error-related area stores information related to errors. The normal game-related area 1 stores subcommand pointers and the like. The normal game-related area 2 stores input/output data for the main control board 200, data for arithmetic processing, various counters (random number counter, timer counter, etc.), flags for managing lottery results and gaming status, etc. In particular, the normal game-related area 2 includes an area (a game information storage area described later) for storing game information acquired in response to the input of detection signals from the special chart 1 start port switch 101, the special chart 2 start port switch 102, and the gate switch 104, a special chart 1 display pattern counter, a special chart 2 display pattern counter, a normal chart display pattern counter, etc.

The unused area M2 is configured to include a work area and a stack area.
The work area is used as an area for temporarily storing various data during execution of a program stored in the unused area m2 (a program for executing processing related to a test defined by the gaming machine regulations, or a program for controlling the display of the performance display device 206). On the other hand, the stack area is used as an area for temporarily saving various data during execution of a program stored in the unused area m2 (a program for executing processing related to a test defined by the gaming machine regulations, or a program for controlling the display of the performance display device 206).
Specifically, the work area includes a performance display related area, which is used as an area for temporarily storing various data during execution of a program for controlling the display of the performance display device 206.
Additionally, an unused area M3 of a predetermined number of bytes (16 bytes or more) is provided between the used area M1 and the unused area M2 in the RAM 230. This clarifies the boundary between the used area M1 and the unused area M2.

In this embodiment, processing based on a program (a program for controlling the progress of the game) stored in the use area m1 is permitted to refer to data stored in the non-use area M2.
On the other hand, data stored in the non-use area M2 is prohibited from being rewritten (changed) by processing based on the program stored in the use area m1 (a program for controlling the progress of the game).
In addition, in processing based on a program stored in the unused area m2 (a program for executing processing related to tests specified in the gaming machine regulations, or a program for controlling the display of the performance display device 206), it is permitted to refer to data stored in the used area M1.
On the other hand, it is prohibited for the data stored in the use area M1 to be rewritten (changed) by processing based on a program stored in the non-use area m2 (a program for executing processing related to tests specified in the gaming machine regulations, or a program for controlling the display of the performance display device 206).
The game on the pachinko machine 1 can be progressed (completed) by the program (program for controlling the progress of the game) stored in the use area m1.

The clock generation circuit 202 generates a clock (synchronization signal) at a predetermined clock frequency (12 MHz in this embodiment) and outputs this clock to the CPU 210 and the random number generation circuit 203 .
The random number generating circuit 203 is configured to include a first loop counter that generates a winning random number for the normal symbol lottery, a second loop counter that generates a jackpot random number for the first special symbol lottery, a third loop counter that generates a jackpot random number for the second special symbol lottery, and a fourth loop counter that generates a reach group random number.
The first loop counter generates a winning random number for the normal symbol lottery by updating the loop counter value by one within a predetermined range (in this embodiment, within the range of 0 to 65535) every time one clock is input from the clock generation circuit 202. In this embodiment, the value of the first loop counter is updated every 0.083 μs (1 s/12 MHz = 0.083 μs).
The second loop counter generates a jackpot random number for the first special symbol lottery by updating the loop counter value by one within a predetermined range (in this embodiment, within the range of 0 to 65535) every time one clock is input from the clock generation circuit 202. In this embodiment, the value of the second loop counter is updated every 0.083 μs (1 s/12 MHz = 0.083 μs).

The third loop counter generates a jackpot random number for the second special symbol lottery by updating the value of the loop counter by one within a predetermined range (in this embodiment, within the range of 0 to 65535) every time one clock is input from the clock generation circuit 202. In this embodiment, the value of the third loop counter is updated every 0.083 μs (1 s/12 MHz = 0.083 μs).
The fourth loop counter generates a reach group random number by updating the loop counter value by one within a predetermined range (in this embodiment, within the range of 0 to 10006) every time 32 clocks are input from the clock generation circuit 202 (once per 32 divisions of the clock frequency). In this embodiment, the value of the fourth loop counter is updated every 2.666 μs (32 s/12 MHz = 2.666 μs).

The input port 204 is configured to include a plurality of input ports (in this embodiment, input port 0 to input port 3).
Input port 0 receives detection signals from the glass frame opening sensor 107, the inner frame opening sensor 108, the vibration detection sensor 113, the radio wave detection sensor 114, and the magnetic detection sensor 115.
To the input port 1, a RAM clear signal from a RAM clear switch 207, a detection signal from a setting key switch 208, etc. are input.
Input port 2 receives detection signals from the count switch 103, the right prize slot switch 105, the left prize slot switch 106, the out switch 109, and the other radio wave detection sensor 114.
The input port 3 receives a detection signal from the special diagram 1 start port switch 101, a detection signal from the special diagram 2 start port switch 102, a detection signal from the gate switch 104, a detection signal from the V area switch 110, etc.
Each input port (input port 0 to input port 3) is provided with a reception storage area corresponding to each switch/sensor (detection signal). In the reception storage area corresponding to each switch/sensor, one bit of data is set that indicates the reception state of the detection signal from that switch/sensor.
Specifically, the receiving memory area corresponding to each switch/sensor is set to "1" when a detection signal is input from the switch/sensor (high level), and is set to "0" when a detection signal is not input from the switch/sensor (low level).

The output port 205 is configured to include a plurality of output ports (output port 0 to output port 4 in this embodiment).
Output port 0 outputs data signals ("SEGDATA0" to "SEGDATA7") for controlling the lighting of the main display device 60. The data signals output from output port 0 are then input to the source driver 250a.
Output port 1 outputs common signals (“COM0” to “COM3”) for controlling the lighting of the main display device 60 and the performance display device 206. The common signals output from output port 1 are input to the sink driver 240.
The output port 2 outputs an external signal. At this time, the external signal output from the output port 2 is input to the hall computer via the payout control board 400 and the external terminal board 450.
The output port 3 outputs a control signal for controlling the operation of the normal electric role solenoid 64, a control signal for controlling the operation of the special electric role solenoid 65, a control signal for controlling the V-area solenoid 66, etc.
Output port 4 outputs data signals ("7SEGDATA0" to "7SEGDATA7") for controlling the lighting of the performance display device 206. The data signals output from output port 4 are then input to source driver 250b.

The main control board 200 is configured to include a command output port 1 and a command output port 2. The CPU 210 transmits a control command (sub-command) from the command output port 1 to the performance control board 300, and transmits a control command (payout command) from the command output port 2 to the payout control board 400.
Each of the command output ports 1 and 2 has a transmission data register (not shown), a FIFO (First In First Out) buffer (not shown), and a transmission shift register (not shown).
The transmission data register outputs the control command input based on the subcommand transmission process (step S2-4) described later to the FIFO buffer.
The FIFO buffer is made up of multiple registers and is capable of storing multiple control commands. The FIFO buffer stores the control commands input from the transmission data register and outputs the stored control commands to the transmission shift register in the order in which they were input.
The transmitting shift register performs parallel-to-serial conversion on the control commands input from the FIFO buffer and transmits them as serial data to the performance control board 300 or the payout control board 400.

The performance display device 206 is configured to include a plurality of lighting elements (segments). Each lighting element is configured as a light-emitting element (in this embodiment, an LED). The performance display device 206 is arranged on the back side of the gaming board 11, so that it cannot be seen by the player.
As will be described later, the gaming machine states (hereinafter referred to as "gaming machine states") of the pachinko machine 1 are defined as a playable state, a setting change state, a setting check state, a setting abnormal state, a RAM abnormal state, and a backup abnormal state. The information displayed on the performance display device 206 changes depending on the gaming machine state that has occurred.

The performance display device 206 is configured to include four (four-digit) display units (not shown). Each display unit is made up of eight lighting elements. That is, each display unit is made up of a 7-segment LED capable of displaying numbers, symbols, etc., and a dot-segment LED capable of displaying dots such as decimal points.
Specifically, the performance display device 206 is configured to include 32 lighting elements (LEDs 33 to 64). In the performance display device 206, LEDs 33 to 40 are the display unit for the first digit, LEDs 41 to 48 are the display unit for the second digit, LEDs 49 to 56 are the display unit for the third digit, and LEDs 57 to 64 are the display unit for the fourth digit.

During the playable state, the game can proceed. During the playable state, the performance display device 206 displays the base ratio.
In this embodiment, while a playable state is occurring, the performance display device 206 alternately displays the first base ratio and the second base ratio every predetermined time (5.0 [s] in this embodiment).
The "first base ratio" is the base ratio of the current section (the base ratio calculated for the period from the start of the current section to the present time).
The "second base ratio" is the base ratio of the previous section (the final base ratio calculated for the previous section).
Specifically, in the performance display device 206, the top two digits of the four-digit display section display information for identifying the type of base ratio (first base ratio or second base ratio), and the bottom two digits display a number indicating the base ratio (percentage).

When the setting change state is occurring, the setting values can be changed. During the setting change state, the setting values stored (set) in the setting value area of the RAM 230 are displayed on the performance display device 206.
Specifically, in the performance display device 206, the top three digits of the four-digit display section display information indicating that a setting change state is occurring (specifically, the top one digit displays "r", the second top digit displays "n.", and the third top digit displays "-"), and the bottom one digit displays a number indicating the setting value stored in the setting value area.
During the setting confirmation state, the setting values can be confirmed. During the setting confirmation state, the setting values stored (set) in the setting value area of the RAM 230 are displayed on the performance display device 206.
Specifically, in the performance display device 206, the top three digits of the four-digit display section display information indicating that the setting confirmation state is occurring (specifically, the top one digit displays "r", the second top digit displays "n.", and the top three digit displays no information), and the bottom one digit displays a number indicating the setting value stored in the setting value area.

During a game stop state (setting abnormal state, RAM abnormal state, or backup abnormal state), game progress becomes impossible. During a game stop state, an error code corresponding to the abnormality that has occurred is displayed on the performance display device 206.
Specifically, in the performance display device 206, the top three digits of the four-digit display section display information indicating that a game stop state is occurring (specifically, the top digit is "E", the second top digit is "r.", and the top digit is empty), and the bottom digit display section displays a number indicating an error code corresponding to the abnormality that has occurred (setting abnormality state, RAM abnormality state, or backup abnormality state).

The RAM clear switch 207 is a tactile switch. That is, the RAM clear switch 207 includes an operation portion that can be pressed. When the operation portion is pressed, the RAM clear switch 207 outputs a RAM clear signal to input port 1.
The setting key switch 208 is a key lock switch. That is, the setting key switch 208 is configured to include an operating unit with a keyhole. The operating unit is unlocked by inserting a dedicated key into the keyhole, and can be rotated (switched) from the OFF state to the ON state. When the operating unit of the setting key switch 208 is in the ON state, it outputs a detection signal to input port 1.

The sink driver 240 controls the output of common signals to the display devices 60 and 206 in accordance with the common signals (“COM0” to “COM3”) output from the output port 1.
The source driver 250a controls the output of data signals to the main display device 60 in accordance with the data signals ("SEGDATA0" to "SEGDATA7") output from output port 0.
The source driver 250 b controls the output of data signals to the performance display device 206 in accordance with the data signals (“7SEGDATA0” to “7SEGDATA7”) output from the output port 4 .
As a result, the source driver 250 a and the sink driver 240 control the lighting of the lighting elements (LED 1 to LED 32 ) included in the main display device 60 .
Furthermore, the source driver 250 b and the sink driver 240 control the lighting of the lighting elements (LED 33 to LED 64 ) included in the performance display device 206 .

The main control board 200 also includes a test signal output circuit (not shown).
In the test signal output process (step S4-24) described below, the CPU 210 generates test information (test signal) indicating the internal state (jackpot game state, game state (normal state, time-saving state 1 to time-saving state 3), left-hit period, right-hit period, etc.), and stores the generated test signal in the port output request buffer of the RAM 230. As a result, the test signal stored in the port output request buffer is output from a specified output port. The test signal output from the specified output port is then input to the interface board of the test computer (not shown) via the test signal output circuit.
In addition, in the main control board 200, detection signals from the special chart 1 start port switch 101, the special chart 2 start port switch 102, the gate switch 104, the count switch 103, the right prize port switch 105, the left prize port switch 106, the out switch 109, etc. are input to the input port 204 and input to the interface board of the test computer via the test signal output circuit.
Furthermore, in the main control board 200, control signals for controlling the operation of each solenoid (normal electric feature solenoid 64, special electric feature solenoid 65, V-area solenoid 66, etc.) output from output port 3 are input to each solenoid 64, 65, 66, and also input to the interface board of the test computer via the test signal output circuit.

(Configuration of dispensing control board 400)
Next, the configuration of the dispensing control board 400 will be described.
The payout control board 400 controls the launch of game balls into the game area 30 and the payout of game balls.
The dispensing control board 400 is configured to include a one-chip microcomputer.
A one-chip microcomputer is an LSI that integrates a CPU core, a register, a semiconductor memory, etc. Specifically, a one-chip microcomputer is configured to include a CPU, a ROM, a RAM, etc.
The payout control board 400 controls the game ball payout operation by the game ball payout device 440 based on the control command received from the main control board 200 and the ball lending instruction signal received from the CR unit.
Furthermore, the payout control board 400 controls the game ball launching operation by the game ball launcher 430 based on the detection signal input from the launch volume 410. Specifically, it controls the game ball launching operation by the game ball launcher 430 so that the game ball is launched into the game area 30 with a strength according to the detection signal input from the launch volume 410.

(Configuration of the performance control board 300)
Next, the configuration of the performance control board 300 will be described.
The performance control board 300 controls the performance.
The performance control board 300 is configured to include a one-chip microcomputer.
A one-chip microcomputer is an LSI that integrates a CPU core, registers, semiconductor memory, etc. Specifically, a one-chip microcomputer is configured to include a CPU, ROM, RAM, VDP, sound processor, lighting controller, motor controller, etc.
Based on control commands received from the main control board 200, the performance control board 300 controls the display of performance images on various image display devices 31, 32, the lighting of various lamps 20, 21, the output of sound from various speakers 22, and the driving of motors 23 that drive various movable body units.

The ROM of the performance control board 300 stores programs related to the progress of the performance, data necessary for the progress of the performance, etc.
The RAM of the performance control board 300 temporarily stores control commands received from the main control board 200, data for performing arithmetic processing, etc.
The CPU of the performance control board 300 determines the performance content to be executed based on the control command received from the main control board 200, and sets a performance program (performance control table) corresponding to the determined performance content.
The VDP generates display control data (display control signals) in accordance with a performance program (performance control table) set by the CPU, and outputs the generated display control data to the various image display devices 31 and 32 .
The sound processor generates sound control data (sound control signals) in accordance with a performance program (performance control table) set by the CPU, and outputs the generated sound control data to a digital audio power amplifier (not shown). The digital audio power amplifier then generates control signals corresponding to the various speakers 22 based on the sound control data input from the sound processor, and outputs the generated control signals to the various speakers 22 via the sub-connection board 320.
The lighting controller generates lamp control data (lamp control signal) according to the performance program (performance control table) set by the CPU, and outputs the generated lamp control data to each of the driver board 310 and the sub-connection board 320.
The motor controller generates motor control data (motor control signals) according to the performance program (performance control table) set by the CPU, and outputs the generated motor control data to each of the driver board 310 and the sub-connection board 320.

The driver board 310 includes a motor driver (not shown) and a lamp driver (not shown).
The motor control data output from the performance control board 300 is input to the motor driver. Then, the motor driver controls the output of excitation signals (drive currents) to the various motors 23 (such as the motors 23 that make up the movable body units) arranged in the game board unit 10 in accordance with the motor control data input from the performance control board 300.
The lamp control data output from the performance control board 300 is input to the lamp driver. Then, the lamp driver controls the driving (light emission) of the light-emitting element groups of each system that make up the panel lamp 21 in accordance with the lamp control data input from the performance control board 300.
The sub-connection board 320 includes a motor driver (not shown) and a lamp driver (not shown).
The motor control data output from the performance control board 300 is input to the motor driver. Then, the motor driver controls the output of excitation signals (drive currents) to the various motors 23 (such as the motors 23 that make up the movable body units) arranged in the front frame unit 4 in accordance with the motor control data input from the performance control board 300.
The lamp control data output from the performance control board 300 is input to the lamp driver. Then, the lamp driver controls the driving (light emission) of the light-emitting element groups of each system that make up the frame lamp 20 in accordance with the lamp control data input from the performance control board 300.

(Regarding gaming machine status)
In the pachinko machine 1, six states (specifically, playable state, setting change state, setting confirmation state, setting abnormal state, RAM abnormal state, and backup abnormal state) are defined as gaming machine states.
A gaming machine state flag area is provided in the RAM 230 of the main control board 200. In the gaming machine state flag area, a value corresponding to one of six gaming machine states (specifically, playable state, setting change state, setting check state, setting abnormal state, RAM abnormal state, and backup abnormal state) is stored (set) as a gaming machine state flag. Then, in the pachinko machine 1, a gaming machine state corresponding to the value stored in the gaming machine state flag area is generated.
The "playable state" is a gaming machine state in which game progress is possible.
While the game is enabled, the execution of steps S4-9 to S4-18, which will be described later, is permitted, thereby allowing the game (normal game and special game) to proceed.
Furthermore, while the game is in a playable state, the base ratio is displayed on the performance display device 206. Furthermore, information relating to the game is displayed on the main display device 60.

The "setting change state" is a gaming machine state in which the setting values stored in the setting value area of RAM 230 can be changed.
The setting change state occurs when the setting change conditions are met. In this embodiment, the setting change conditions are met when a detection signal is input from the inner frame open sensor 108, a detection signal is input from the setting key switch 208, and a detection signal is input from the RAM clear switch 207 at power-on. In other words, the setting change state occurs when the inner frame unit 3 is open at power-on, the key switch 208 is turned ON, and the RAM clear switch 207 is pressed.
While the setting change state is occurring, the execution of the processes of steps S4-9 to S4-18, which will be described later, is prohibited, and the game (specifically, the normal game and the special game) is stopped.
Furthermore, while the setting change state is occurring, the setting value stored in the setting value area is displayed on the performance display device 206. Furthermore, all lighting elements constituting the main display device 60 are turned off. Furthermore, security information (external information) is output to an external device.
Furthermore, while the setting change state is occurring, it is possible to change the setting values stored in the setting value area by pressing the RAM clear switch 207. Then, when the key switch 208 is rotated to the OFF state while the setting change state is occurring, the setting change state is replaced by a playable state, whereby the setting values stored in the setting value area are confirmed.

The "setting confirmation state" is a gaming machine state in which the setting values stored in the setting value area of RAM 230 can be confirmed.
The setting confirmation state is established when the setting confirmation conditions are met. In this embodiment, the setting confirmation conditions are established when, at power-on, a detection signal is input from the inner frame open sensor 108, a detection signal is input from the setting key switch 208, and a detection signal is not input from the RAM clear switch 207. In other words, at power-on, the setting confirmation state is established if the inner frame unit 3 is open, the key switch 208 is turned ON, and the RAM clear switch 207 is not pressed.
During the setting confirmation state, the execution of the processes of steps S4-9 to S4-18, which will be described later, is prohibited, and the game (specifically, the normal game and the special game) is stopped.
Furthermore, while the setting confirmation state is occurring, the setting values stored in the setting value area are displayed on the performance display device 206. This allows the setting values stored in the setting value area to be confirmed. Furthermore, all lighting elements constituting the main display device 60 are turned off. Furthermore, security information (external information) is output to an external device.
It should be noted that while the setting confirmation state is occurring, the setting values stored in the setting value area cannot be changed.
When the key switch 208 is rotated to the OFF state while the setting confirmation state is occurring, the setting confirmation state is replaced with a playable state.

The "setting abnormality state" is the state of the gaming machine in which a setting abnormality has occurred.
The abnormal setting state occurs when, during a playable state, it is determined that the setting value set in the setting value area is not within a specified range.
During the occurrence of the abnormal setting state, the execution of the processes of steps S4-9 to S4-18, which will be described later, is prohibited, and the game (specifically, the normal game and the special game) is stopped.
Furthermore, when a setting abnormality occurs, an error code indicating the occurrence of a setting abnormality is displayed on the performance display device 206. Furthermore, all lighting elements constituting the main display device 60 are turned off. Furthermore, security information (external information) is output to an external device.
To recover from the abnormal setting state, it is necessary to turn the power off and on again to cause a setting change state.

"RAM abnormal state" is the state of the gaming machine in which a RAM abnormality has occurred.
The RAM abnormal state occurs when it is determined that a read/write abnormality has occurred in the RAM 230 when the power is turned on.
During the occurrence of the RAM abnormal state, the execution of the processes of steps S4-9 to S4-18, which will be described later, is prohibited, and the game (specifically, the normal game and the special game) is stopped.
Furthermore, when a RAM abnormality occurs, an error code specifying the occurrence of a RAM abnormality is displayed on the performance display device 206. Furthermore, all lighting elements constituting the main display device 60 are turned off. Furthermore, security information (external information) is output to an external device.
To recover from the RAM abnormal state, it is necessary to perform a power-off and power-on to cause a setting change state.

The "backup abnormality state" is the state of the gaming machine in which a backup abnormality has occurred.
The backup abnormality state occurs when it is determined that a backup abnormality (specifically, an abnormality in the backup flag or an abnormality in the checksum) has occurred in the RAM 230 when the power is turned on.
During the occurrence of the backup abnormal state, the execution of the processes of steps S4-9 to S4-18, which will be described later, is prohibited, and the game (specifically, the normal game and the special game) is stopped.
Furthermore, when a backup abnormality occurs, an error code specifying the occurrence of a backup abnormality is displayed on the performance display device 206. Furthermore, all lighting elements constituting the main display device 60 are turned off. Furthermore, security information (external information) is output to an external device.
To recover from the backup abnormality state, it is necessary to perform a power-off and power-on to cause a setting change state.

(Regarding setting values)
Next, the setting values (setting information) set in the pachinko machine 1 will be explained.
The "setting value" is information that specifies the probability of winning the special symbol lottery (first special symbol lottery and second special symbol lottery). In this embodiment, the setting value is defined as a value between "0" and "5".
A set value area is provided in the RAM 230 of the main control board 200. In the set value area, one of values "0" to "5" is stored (set) as a set value. The probability of winning the special symbol lottery is determined to be the probability corresponding to the value set in the set value area.
In this embodiment, the probability of winning a "jackpot" through the special symbol lottery (first special symbol lottery and second special symbol lottery) varies depending on the value set in the setting value area.
The winning probability of the special pattern lottery corresponding to each setting value (probability of winning the "jackpot") is, in order from highest to lowest, as follows: winning probability corresponding to setting value = "5", winning probability corresponding to setting value = "4", winning probability corresponding to setting value = "3", winning probability corresponding to setting value = "2", winning probability corresponding to setting value = "1", winning probability corresponding to setting value = "0" (winning probability "high" → winning probability "low").

In particular, in the pachinko machine 1, the setting value stored in the setting value area is fixed at "3" and cannot be changed to another value. Note that the configuration may be such that the setting value stored in the setting value area can be changed (selected) while the setting change state is occurring. Here, the setting value is changed by the administrator of the pachinko machine 1 (such as an employee of the gaming parlor where the pachinko machine 1 is installed).
That is, as described above, when the power is turned on, if the inner frame unit 3 is open, the key switch 208 is rotated to the ON state, and the RAM clear switch 207 is pressed, a setting change state is generated.
While the setting change state is occurring, the setting value stored in the setting value area is displayed on the performance display device 206. Furthermore, each time the RAM clear switch 207 is pressed, the setting value stored in the setting value area is changed. At this time, if the setting value set in the setting value area is changed, the setting value displayed on the performance display device 206 is also changed accordingly.
When the key switch 208 is turned to the OFF state while the setting change state is occurring, the setting change state is replaced by a playable state, whereby the setting value stored in the setting value area is confirmed.

(Base ratio)
In the pachinko machine 1, while a playable state is occurring, a base ratio (base value) is calculated by the CPU 210. In this embodiment, the base ratio is calculated only while a predetermined play state is occurring (specifically, while a special low probability state is occurring and while time-saving control is stopped).
Then, while the game is in a playable state, the calculated base ratio is displayed on the performance display device 206.
The "base ratio" is information calculated based on the number of game balls shot into the game area 30 and the number of prize balls paid out in response to the game balls entering predetermined entry ports (in this embodiment, the starting ports 51, 52 and the other entry ports 56, 57a to 57c). Specifically, the base ratio is the ratio (percentage) of the number of payouts (the number of prize balls paid out) to the number of out balls (the number of game balls shot out).
In this embodiment, the base ratio for each predetermined interval (period) is calculated. The predetermined interval is defined as an interval in which a predetermined number of out balls (60,000 balls in this embodiment) are detected (discharged). That is, each interval begins at the end of the previous interval and ends when the number of out balls detected during the current interval reaches the predetermined number (60,000 balls). The CPU 210 then calculates the base ratio as needed (in real time) during each interval.
Note that a predetermined time may be defined as the predetermined interval, and the CPU 210 may calculate the base ratio for each predetermined time.
The "number of out balls" refers to the number of out balls. "Out balls" refer to game balls that have been discharged from the game area 30. Specifically, out balls are game balls that have passed through the discharge path (game balls detected by the out switch 109).
It is also possible to use the gaming ball discharged from outlet 58 as the out ball. Specifically, out switch 109 may be configured to detect only gaming balls discharged from outlet 58, and the gaming ball detected by out switch 109 may be used as the out ball.
The "number of payouts" refers to the total number of prize balls paid out in response to game balls entering the starting holes 51, 52 and the other winning holes 56, 57a to 57c.

(Regarding game status)
Next, the game states defined in the pachinko machine 1 will be explained.
In the pachinko machine 1, it is possible to execute time-saving control 1, time-saving control 2, and time-saving control 3 as auxiliary controls that are advantageous to the player. In the following explanation, the gaming state while time-saving control 1 is stopped, while time-saving control 2 is stopped, and while time-saving control 3 is stopped will be referred to as the "normal state." Furthermore, the gaming state while time-saving control 1 is being executed will be referred to as the "time-saving state (easy to win a prize) 1." Furthermore, the gaming state while time-saving control 2 is being executed will be referred to as the "time-saving state (easy to win a prize) 2." Furthermore, the gaming state while time-saving control 3 is being executed will be referred to as the "time-saving state (easy to win a prize) 3."
When the time-saving control (time-saving control 1 to time-saving control 3) is being executed (when time-saving state 1 to time-saving state 3 are occurring), it is easier for the game ball to enter the second starting hole 52 in the normal winning game state described below, compared to when the time-saving control (time-saving control 1 to time-saving control 3) is stopped (when the normal state is occurring).
Furthermore, while time-saving control 1 is being executed (while time-saving state 1 is occurring), it is easier for the game ball to enter the second starting hole 52 in the normal winning game state compared to while time-saving control 2 or time-saving control 3 is being executed (while time-saving state 2 or time-saving control 3 is occurring).
In this embodiment, the ease of a game ball entering the second starting hole 52 in a normal winning game state is the same during execution of time-saving control 2 (when time-saving state 2 is occurring) and during execution of time-saving control 3 (when time-saving state 3 is occurring). Note that the normal winning game state (average) is longer during execution of time-saving control 3 (when time-saving state 3 is occurring) than during execution of time-saving control 2 (when time-saving state 2 is occurring).
Specifically, when the time-saving control (time-saving control 1 to time-saving control 3) is being executed (when time-saving state 1 to time-saving state 3 are occurring), the probability that the "long opening pattern" described below will be selected as the opening pattern of the normal electric role device 52a is higher if a "normal win" is won by the normal symbol lottery, compared to when the time-saving control (time-saving control 1 to time-saving control 3) is stopped (when the normal state is occurring). In other words, when the time-saving control (time-saving control 1 to time-saving control 3) is being executed (when time-saving state 1 to time-saving state 3 are occurring), the probability of winning the "long opening pattern" based on the normal symbol lottery is higher, compared to when the time-saving control (time-saving control 1 to time-saving control 3) is stopped (when the normal state is occurring).
Furthermore, when time-saving control 1 is being executed (when time-saving state 1 is occurring), the probability that the "long opening pattern" will be selected as the opening pattern of normal electric role device 52a when a "normal symbol hit" is won by the normal symbol lottery is higher than when time-saving control 2 and time-saving control 3 are being executed (when time-saving state 2 and time-saving control 3 are occurring). In other words, when time-saving control 1 is being executed (when time-saving state 1 is occurring), the probability of winning the "long opening pattern" based on the normal symbol lottery is higher than when time-saving control 2 and time-saving control 3 are being executed (when time-saving state 2 and time-saving control 3 are occurring).
Furthermore, in this embodiment, when a "normal symbol hit" is won by the normal symbol lottery, the probability that the "long opening pattern" will be selected as the opening pattern of the normal electric device 52a is the same during the execution of time-saving control 2 (when time-saving state 2 is occurring) and during the execution of time-saving control 3 (when time-saving state 3 is occurring). In other words, the probability of winning the "long opening pattern" based on the normal symbol lottery is the same during the execution of time-saving control 2 (when time-saving state 2 is occurring) and during the execution of time-saving control 3 (when time-saving state 3 is occurring).
On the other hand, in this embodiment, the probability of winning a "normal symbol win" through the normal symbol lottery does not change depending on the game state. That is, the probability of winning a "normal symbol win" through the normal symbol lottery is the same while the time-saving control (time-saving control 1 to time-saving control 3) is being executed (while time-saving state 1 to time-saving state 3 are occurring) and while the time-saving control (time-saving control 1 to time-saving control 3) is stopped (while the normal state is occurring). Also, the probability of winning a "normal symbol win" through the normal symbol lottery is the same while time-saving control 1 is being executed (while time-saving state 1 is occurring), while time-saving control 2 is being executed (while time-saving state 2 is occurring), and while time-saving control 3 is being executed (while time-saving state 3 is occurring).
In addition, in this embodiment, the probability of winning a "big win" or a "small win" through the special symbol lottery does not change depending on the gaming state.

(Regarding various lotteries)
Next, various lotteries executed in the pachinko machine 1 will be described.
Fig. 4 is a diagram showing the winning probabilities of various lotteries, Fig. 5 is a diagram showing the winning types of the normal symbol lottery, and Fig. 6 is a diagram showing the winning types of the special symbol lottery.
4(a) shows the winning probability of the normal symbol lottery, FIG. 4(b) shows the winning probability of the first special symbol lottery, and FIG. 4(c) shows the winning probability of the second special symbol lottery. Also, FIG. 5 shows the winning type (type of "normal symbol winning") selected when a "normal symbol winning" is won in the normal symbol lottery. Furthermore, FIG. 6(a) shows the winning type (type of "jackpot symbol") selected when a "jackpot" is won in the first special symbol lottery, FIG. 6(b) shows the winning type (type of "jackpot symbol") selected when a "jackpot" is won in the second special symbol lottery, and FIG. 6(c) shows the winning type (type of "small prize symbol") selected when a "small prize" is won in the second special symbol lottery.

In the pachinko machine 1, the passing of the game ball through the start gate 41 triggers the execution of a regular symbol lottery.
In this embodiment, only "normal winning" is defined as the result of the normal symbol lottery. However, it is also acceptable to have a configuration in which "normal winning" and "losing" are defined as the result of the normal symbol lottery.
As shown in FIG. 4A, in the normal symbol lottery (normal symbol win/lose determination), the probability of winning a "normal symbol win" is 1/1. In this embodiment, the probability of winning a "normal symbol win" through the normal symbol lottery does not change depending on the game state. Note that the configuration may be such that the probability of winning a "normal symbol win" through the normal symbol lottery executed during the time-saving state (time-saving state 1 to time-saving state 3) is higher than the probability of winning a "normal symbol win" through the normal symbol lottery executed during the normal state.

As shown in Figure 5, in the pachinko machine 1, the winning types (types of "regular winning patterns") that are selected when a "regular winning pattern" is won in the regular pattern lottery are specified as "regular winning pattern 1,""regular winning pattern 2," and "regular winning pattern 3."
In the regular pattern lottery (regular pattern stop determination), if you win a "regular pattern win," the probability of winning "regular pattern win 1" is 65,000/65,536, the probability of winning "regular pattern win 2" is 156/65,536, and the probability of winning "regular pattern win 3" is 380/65,536.
When "normal winning symbol 1" is won, the normal symbol display device displays a stopped symbol corresponding to "normal winning symbol 1". In particular, when "normal winning symbol 1" is won based on the normal symbol lottery executed during the normal state, a stopped symbol corresponding to a "losing symbol" is displayed in the normal mini symbol display area A4 and the normal fourth symbol display area A5. On the other hand, when "normal winning symbol 1" is won based on the normal symbol lottery executed during the time-saving state 1, a stopped symbol corresponding to a "winning symbol" is displayed in the normal mini symbol display area A4 and the normal fourth symbol display area A5. On the other hand, if the "normal winning pattern 1" is won based on the normal pattern lottery executed during the occurrence of time-saving state 2 or time-saving state 3, the stopping pattern corresponding to the "losing pattern" is displayed in the normal mini pattern display area A4 and the normal fourth pattern display area A5, and the stopping pattern corresponding to the "losing pattern" is displayed in the main performance pattern display area A6.

Here, the "losing patterns" displayed in the normal mini pattern display area A4 and the normal fourth pattern display area A5 are, for example, a pattern in which the normal mini performance pattern a4 displayed in the three normal pattern display areas of the normal mini pattern display area A4 has a combination of numbers (identification information) such as "1, 6, 9" that is different from the numbers (identification information) shown by the normal mini performance pattern a4 displayed in at least one of the normal pattern display areas, and the normal mini performance pattern a5 displayed in the normal fourth pattern display area A5 has a display mode that shows "X".
On the other hand, the "winning patterns" displayed in the normal mini pattern display area A4 and the normal fourth pattern display area A5 are displayed in a manner such that, for example, the normal mini performance patterns a4 displayed in the three normal display areas of the normal mini pattern display area A4 are all normal mini performance patterns a4 showing the same numbers (identification information), such as "1, 1, 1," and the normal fourth performance pattern a5 displayed in the normal fourth pattern display area A5 shows a "circle."
In addition, the "losing pattern" displayed in a stopped state in the main performance pattern display area A6 is displayed in a manner such that, for example, the main performance pattern a6 displayed in a stopped state in the three performance pattern display areas has a combination of numbers (identification information), such as "1, 6, 9," that is different from the numbers (identification information) shown by the main performance pattern a6 displayed in a stopped state in at least one of the performance pattern display areas.
On the other hand, the "winning pattern" displayed in the main performance pattern display area A6 is a display mode in which, for example, the main performance pattern a6 displayed in the three performance pattern display areas is a combination that is aligned with the regular mini performance pattern a4 that shows the same numbers (identification information), such as "1, 1, 1."

When "normal winning symbol 2" is won, the normal symbol display device displays a stopped symbol corresponding to "normal winning symbol 2". In particular, when "normal winning symbol 2" is won based on the normal symbol lottery executed during the normal state, a stopped symbol corresponding to a "losing symbol" is displayed in the normal mini symbol display area A4 and the normal fourth symbol display area A5. On the other hand, when "normal winning symbol 2" is won based on the normal symbol lottery executed during the time-saving state 1, a stopped symbol corresponding to a "winning symbol" is displayed in the normal mini symbol display area A4 and the normal fourth symbol display area A5. On the other hand, if the "normal winning pattern 2" is won based on the normal pattern lottery executed during the occurrence of time-saving state 2 or time-saving state 3, the stopping pattern corresponding to the "losing pattern" is displayed in the normal mini pattern display area A4 and the normal fourth pattern display area A5, and the stopping pattern corresponding to the "losing pattern" is displayed in the main performance pattern display area A6.
When "normal winning symbol 3" is won, the normal symbol display device displays a stopped symbol corresponding to "normal winning symbol 3". In particular, when "normal winning symbol 3" is won based on the normal symbol lottery executed during the normal state, a stopped symbol corresponding to a "missing symbol" is displayed in the normal mini symbol display area A4 and the normal fourth symbol display area A5. On the other hand, when "normal winning symbol 3" is won based on the normal symbol lottery executed during the time-saving state 1, a stopped symbol corresponding to a "winning symbol" is displayed in the normal mini symbol display area A4 and the normal fourth symbol display area A5. On the other hand, if the "normal winning pattern 3" is won based on the normal pattern lottery executed during the occurrence of time-saving state 2 or time-saving state 3, the stopping pattern corresponding to the "winning pattern" will be displayed in a stopped state in the normal mini pattern display area A4 and the normal fourth pattern display area A5, and the stopping pattern corresponding to the "winning pattern" will be displayed in a stopped state in the main performance pattern display area A6.

When a "normal winning"("normal winning symbol 1" to "normal winning symbol 3") is won, a normal winning game state is generated. In the normal winning game state, the normal electric device 52a is shifted from a closed state to an open state, making it possible (easy) for a game ball to enter the second starting hole 52.
In this embodiment, a "short opening pattern" and a "long opening pattern" are defined as the types of opening patterns (opening mode/opening/closing mode) of the normal electric device 52a during a normal winning game state.
The "short opening pattern" is an opening pattern (opening mode/opening and closing mode) that makes it difficult for a game ball to enter the second starting hole 52 during a normal winning game state. In the "short opening pattern," the time that the normal electric device 52a is in an open state during a normal winning game state is shorter than in the "long opening pattern." Specifically, in the "short opening pattern," the number of times that the normal electric device 52a is opened is set to 1 [time], and the opening time of the normal electric device 52a each time is set to 0.044 [s].
The "long opening pattern" is an opening pattern (opening mode/opening/closing mode) that makes it easier for a game ball to enter the second starting hole 52 during a normal winning game state. In the "long opening pattern," the time during which the normal electric device 52a is in an open state during a normal winning game state is longer than in the "short opening pattern." Specifically, in the "long opening pattern," the number of times the normal electric device 52a is opened is set to 3, the opening time of the normal electric device 52a for the first and second times is set to 2.7 seconds, and the opening time of the normal electric device 52a for the third time is set to 0.1 seconds.

As shown in Figure 5, when "normal winning symbol 1", "normal winning symbol 2" or "normal winning symbol 3" is won based on the normal symbol lottery executed during the normal state, a "short opening pattern" is selected and set as the opening pattern of the normal electric device 52a during the normal winning game state. As a result, in the normal symbol lottery executed during the normal state, the "short opening pattern" is selected and set with a probability of 1/1.
When "normal winning symbol 1,""normal winning symbol 2," or "normal winning symbol 3" is selected based on the normal symbol lottery performed during the normal state, a first predetermined time (0.004 [s] in this embodiment) is set as the normal symbol stop time (determined time). Then, as described above, the stop symbol corresponding to the "losing symbol" is displayed in the normal mini symbol display area A4 and the normal fourth symbol display area A5.
Here, the "normal symbol stop time (confirmed time)" is the time when the normal symbol stop display is executed on the normal symbol display device.
On the other hand, if "normal winning symbol 1,""normal winning symbol 2," or "normal winning symbol 3" is won based on the normal symbol lottery executed during the occurrence of time-shortened state 1, a "long opening pattern" is selected and set as the opening pattern of the normal electric device 52a during the occurrence of the normal winning game state. As a result, in the normal symbol lottery executed during the occurrence of time-shortened state 1, the "long opening pattern" is selected and set with a probability of 1/1.
When "normal winning symbol 1,""normal winning symbol 2," or "normal winning symbol 3" is selected based on the normal symbol lottery executed during the occurrence of time-saving state 1, a second predetermined time (0.5 [s] in this embodiment) longer than the first predetermined time (0.004 [s] in this embodiment) is set as the normal symbol stop time (determined time). Then, as described above, the stop symbol corresponding to the "winning symbol" is displayed in the normal mini symbol display area A4 and the normal fourth symbol display area A5.

On the other hand, if "normal winning symbol 1" or "normal winning symbol 2" is won based on the normal symbol lottery executed during time-saving state 2 or time-saving state 3, a "short opening pattern" is selected and set as the opening pattern of the normal electric device 52a during the normal winning game state. On the other hand, if "normal winning symbol 3" is won based on the normal symbol lottery executed during time-saving state 2 or time-saving state 3, a "long opening pattern" is selected and set as the opening pattern of the normal electric device 52a during the normal winning game state. As a result, in the normal symbol lottery executed during time-saving state 2 or time-saving state 3, the "long opening pattern" is selected and set with a probability of 380/65536.
When "normal winning symbol 1" or "normal winning symbol 2" is selected based on the normal symbol lottery executed during the time-saving state 2 or the time-saving state 3, a first predetermined time (0.004 [s] in this embodiment) is set as the stop time (fixed time) of the normal symbol. Then, as described above, the stopped symbol corresponding to the "losing symbol" is displayed in the normal mini symbol display area A4 and the normal fourth symbol display area A5. On the other hand, when "normal winning symbol 3" is selected based on the normal symbol lottery executed during the time-saving state 2 or the time-saving state 3, a second predetermined time (0.5 [s] in this embodiment) is set as the stop time (fixed time) of the normal symbol. Then, as described above, the stopped symbol corresponding to the "winning symbol" is displayed in the normal mini symbol display area A4 and the normal fourth symbol display area A5.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1, a first special symbol lottery is executed when a game ball enters the first starting hole 51, and a second special symbol lottery is executed when a game ball enters the second starting hole 52.
In this embodiment, a "big win" and a "miss" are defined as the results of the first special pattern drawing. Meanwhile, a "big win" and a "small win" are defined as the results of the second special pattern drawing. Note that this embodiment is configured such that a "small win" cannot be won in the first special pattern drawing. However, a "small win" may be won in the first special pattern drawing with a lower probability than in the second special pattern drawing. Also, a "big win", a "small win", and a "miss" may be defined as the results of the first special pattern drawing. Furthermore, a "big win", a "small win", and a "miss" may be defined as the results of the second special pattern drawing.
As shown in Figures 4(b) and (c), the probability of winning a "jackpot" in the special pattern lottery (first special pattern lottery or second special pattern lottery) is 1/219. In this embodiment, the probability of winning a "jackpot" or a "small jackpot" through the special pattern lottery does not change depending on the game state. In addition, in this embodiment, since the setting value is fixed at "3", the probability of winning a "jackpot" through the special pattern lottery does not change depending on the setting value. In addition, the probability of winning a "small jackpot" through the special pattern lottery does not change depending on the setting value. Note that the probability of winning a "jackpot" through the special pattern lottery may be configured to change depending on the setting value.

As shown in Figure 6 (a), in pachinko machine 1, "jackpot pattern 1" and "jackpot pattern 2" are specified as the winning types (types of "jackpot pattern") to be selected when a "jackpot" is won in the first special pattern lottery.
In the first special symbol lottery (special symbol determination), if a "jackpot" is won, the probability of winning "jackpot symbol 1" is 98/100, and the probability of winning "jackpot symbol 2" is 2/100.
When "jackpot symbol 1" is won, a stop symbol corresponding to "jackpot symbol 1" is displayed in a stopped state on the special symbol 1 display device. In particular, when "jackpot symbol 1" is won based on the first special symbol lottery executed during normal mode or time-saving mode 1, a stop symbol corresponding to a "single win symbol" is displayed in the special symbol mini symbol display area A1 and the special symbol 1 fourth symbol display area A2, and a stop symbol corresponding to a "single win symbol" is displayed in the main effect symbol display area A6. On the other hand, when "jackpot symbol 1" is won based on the first special symbol lottery executed during time-saving mode 2 or time-saving mode 3, a stop symbol corresponding to a "single win symbol" is displayed in the special symbol mini symbol display area A1 and the special symbol 1 fourth symbol display area A2.
Here, the "single winning patterns" displayed in a stopped state in the special chart mini pattern display area A1 and the special chart 1 fourth pattern display area A2 are, for example, displayed in a manner such that the special chart mini performance patterns a1 displayed in a stopped state in the three special chart display areas of the special chart mini pattern display area A1 are aligned with the special chart mini performance patterns a1 showing the same even numbers (identification information), such as "6, 6, 6," and the special chart fourth performance pattern a2 displayed in a stopped state in the special chart 1 fourth pattern display area A2 shows a "circle."
In addition, the "single winning pattern" displayed in the main performance pattern display area A6 is displayed in a manner such that, for example, the main performance patterns a6 displayed in the three performance pattern display areas are aligned with the main performance patterns a6 that show the same even numbers (identification information), such as "6, 6, 6."

If "jackpot pattern 2" is won, a stop symbol corresponding to "jackpot pattern 2" is displayed on the special chart 1 display device. In particular, if "jackpot pattern 2" is won based on the first special symbol lottery executed during normal mode or time-saving mode 1, a stop symbol corresponding to a "consecutive winning symbol" is displayed on the special chart mini symbol display area A1 and the special chart 1 fourth symbol display area A2, and a stop symbol corresponding to a "consecutive winning symbol" is displayed on the main performance symbol display area A6. On the other hand, if "jackpot pattern 2" is won based on the first special symbol lottery executed during time-saving mode 2 or time-saving mode 3, a stop symbol corresponding to a "consecutive winning symbol" is displayed on the special chart mini symbol display area A1 and the special chart 1 fourth symbol display area A2.
Here, the "consecutive winning patterns" stopped and displayed in the special chart mini pattern display area A1 and the special chart 1 fourth pattern display area A2 are, for example, displayed in such a manner that the special chart mini performance patterns a1 stopped and displayed in the three special chart display areas of the special chart mini pattern display area A1 are aligned with the special chart mini performance patterns a1 showing the same odd numbers (identification information), such as "7, 7, 7," and the special chart fourth performance pattern a2 stopped and displayed in the special chart 1 fourth pattern display area A2 shows a "circle."
In addition, the "consecutive winning pattern" stopped and displayed in the main performance pattern display area A6 is displayed in a manner such that, for example, the main performance patterns a6 stopped and displayed in the three performance pattern display areas are aligned with the main performance patterns a6 that show the same odd numbers (identification information), such as "7, 7, 7."

As shown in Figure 6 (b), in pachinko machine 1, the winning types (types of "jackpot patterns") that are selected when a "jackpot" is won in the second special pattern lottery are specified as "jackpot pattern 3,""jackpot pattern 4,""jackpot pattern 5,""jackpot pattern 6,""jackpot pattern 7," and "jackpot pattern 8."
In the second special symbol lottery (special symbol determination), if a "jackpot" is won, the probability of winning "jackpot symbol 3" is 20/100, the probability of winning "jackpot symbol 4" is 15/100, the probability of winning "jackpot symbol 5" is 15/100, the probability of winning "jackpot symbol 6" is 30/100, the probability of winning "jackpot symbol 7" is 8/100, and the probability of winning "jackpot symbol 8" is 12/100.
If "jackpot pattern 3" is won, a stop pattern corresponding to "jackpot pattern 3" is displayed in a stopped state on the special chart 2 display device. In particular, if "jackpot pattern 3" is won based on the second special pattern lottery executed during normal mode or time-saving mode 1, a stop pattern corresponding to a "consecutive winning pattern" is displayed in the special chart mini pattern display area A1 and the special chart 2 fourth pattern display area A3, and a stop pattern corresponding to a "consecutive winning pattern" is displayed in the main performance pattern display area A6. On the other hand, if "jackpot pattern 3" is won based on the second special pattern lottery executed during time-saving mode 2 or time-saving mode 3, a stop pattern corresponding to a "consecutive winning pattern" is displayed in the special chart mini pattern display area A1 and the special chart 2 fourth pattern display area A3.
Here, the "consecutive winning patterns" stopped and displayed in the special chart mini pattern display area A1 and the special chart 2 fourth pattern display area A3 are, for example, displayed in such a manner that the special chart mini performance patterns a1 stopped and displayed in the three special chart display areas of the special chart mini pattern display area A1 are aligned with the special chart mini performance patterns a1 showing the same odd numbers (identification information), such as "7, 7, 7," and the special chart fourth performance pattern a3 stopped and displayed in the special chart 2 fourth pattern display area A3 shows a "circle."

If "jackpot pattern 4" is won, a stop symbol corresponding to "jackpot pattern 4" is displayed in a stopped state on the special chart 2 display device. In particular, if "jackpot pattern 4" is won based on the second special pattern lottery executed during normal mode or time-saving mode 1, a stop symbol corresponding to a "consecutive winning pattern" is displayed in the special chart mini pattern display area A1 and the special chart 2 fourth pattern display area A3, and a stop symbol corresponding to a "consecutive winning pattern" is displayed in the main performance pattern display area A6. On the other hand, if "jackpot pattern 4" is won based on the second special pattern lottery executed during time-saving mode 2 or time-saving mode 3, a stop symbol corresponding to a "consecutive winning pattern" is displayed in the special chart mini pattern display area A1 and the special chart 2 fourth pattern display area A3.
If the "jackpot symbol 5" is won, a stop symbol corresponding to the "jackpot symbol 5" is displayed in the special symbol 2 display device. In particular, if the "jackpot symbol 5" is won based on the second special symbol lottery executed during normal mode or time-saving mode 1, a stop symbol corresponding to the "consecutive winning symbol" is displayed in the special symbol mini symbol display area A1 and the special symbol 2 fourth symbol display area A3, and a stop symbol corresponding to the "consecutive winning symbol" is displayed in the main performance symbol display area A6. On the other hand, if the "jackpot symbol 5" is won based on the second special symbol lottery executed during time-saving mode 2 or time-saving mode 3, a stop symbol corresponding to the "consecutive winning symbol" is displayed in the special symbol mini symbol display area A1 and the special symbol 2 fourth symbol display area A3.
When "jackpot pattern 6" is won, a stop symbol corresponding to "jackpot pattern 6" is displayed on the special chart 2 display device. In particular, when "jackpot pattern 6" is won based on the second special symbol lottery executed during normal mode or time-saving mode 1, a stop symbol corresponding to "consecutive winning symbol" is displayed on the special chart mini symbol display area A1 and the special chart 2 fourth symbol display area A3, and a stop symbol corresponding to "consecutive winning symbol" is displayed on the main performance symbol display area A6. On the other hand, when "jackpot pattern 6" is won based on the second special symbol lottery executed during time-saving mode 2 or time-saving mode 3, a stop symbol corresponding to "consecutive winning symbol" is displayed on the special chart mini symbol display area A1 and the special chart 2 fourth symbol display area A3.

If the "jackpot symbol 7" is won, a stop symbol corresponding to the "jackpot symbol 7" is displayed in the special symbol 2 display device. In particular, if the "jackpot symbol 7" is won based on the second special symbol lottery executed during normal mode or time-saving mode 1, a stop symbol corresponding to the "consecutive winning symbol" is displayed in the special symbol mini symbol display area A1 and the special symbol 2 fourth symbol display area A3, and a stop symbol corresponding to the "consecutive winning symbol" is displayed in the main performance symbol display area A6. On the other hand, if the "jackpot symbol 7" is won based on the second special symbol lottery executed during time-saving mode 2 or time-saving mode 3, a stop symbol corresponding to the "consecutive winning symbol" is displayed in the special symbol mini symbol display area A1 and the special symbol 2 fourth symbol display area A3.
If the "jackpot symbol 8" is won, a stop symbol corresponding to the "jackpot symbol 8" is displayed in a frozen state on the special symbol 2 display device. In particular, if the "jackpot symbol 8" is won based on the second special symbol lottery executed during normal mode or time-saving state 1, a stop symbol corresponding to the "single hit symbol" is displayed in the special symbol mini symbol display area A1 and the special symbol 2 fourth symbol display area A3, and a stop symbol corresponding to the "single hit symbol" is displayed in the main effect symbol display area A6. On the other hand, if the "jackpot symbol 8" is won based on the second special symbol lottery executed during time-saving state 2 or time-saving state 3, a stop symbol corresponding to the "single hit symbol" is displayed in the special symbol mini symbol display area A1 and the special symbol 2 fourth symbol display area A3.
Here, the "single winning patterns" displayed in a stopped state in the special chart mini pattern display area A1 and the special chart 2 fourth pattern display area A3 are, for example, displayed in a manner such that the special chart mini performance patterns a1 displayed in a stopped state in the three special chart display areas of the special chart mini pattern display area A1 are aligned with the special chart mini performance patterns a1 showing the same even numbers (identification information), such as "6, 6, 6," and the special chart fourth performance pattern a3 displayed in a stopped state in the special chart 2 fourth pattern display area A3 shows a "circle."

As shown in Figure 6 (c), in the pachinko machine 1, the winning types (types of "small win patterns") that are selected when a "small win" is won in the second special pattern lottery are specified as "small win pattern 1,""small win pattern 2,""small win pattern 3,""small win pattern 4,""small win pattern 5," and "small win pattern 6."
In the second special pattern lottery (special pattern determination), if a "small win" is won, the probability of winning "small win pattern 1" is 20/100, the probability of winning "small win pattern 2" is 15/100, the probability of winning "small win pattern 3" is 15/100, the probability of winning "small win pattern 4" is 30/100, the probability of winning "small win pattern 5" is 8/100, and the probability of winning "small win pattern 6" is 12/100.
When "small win symbol 1" is won, a stop symbol corresponding to "small win symbol 1" is displayed on the special symbol 2 display device. In particular, when "small win symbol 1" is won based on the second special symbol lottery executed during normal mode or time-saving mode 1, a stop symbol corresponding to "consecutive win symbol" is displayed on the special symbol mini symbol display area A1 and the special symbol 2 fourth symbol display area A3, and a stop symbol corresponding to "consecutive win symbol" is displayed on the main performance symbol display area A6. On the other hand, when "small win symbol 1" is won based on the second special symbol lottery executed during time-saving mode 2 or time-saving mode 3, a stop symbol corresponding to "consecutive win symbol" is displayed on the special symbol mini symbol display area A1 and the special symbol 2 fourth symbol display area A3.

When "small win symbol 2" is won, a stop symbol corresponding to "small win symbol 2" is displayed on the special symbol 2 display device. In particular, when "small win symbol 2" is won based on the second special symbol lottery executed during normal mode or time-saving mode 1, a stop symbol corresponding to "consecutive win symbol" is displayed on the special symbol mini symbol display area A1 and the special symbol 2 fourth symbol display area A3, and a stop symbol corresponding to "consecutive win symbol" is displayed on the main performance symbol display area A6. On the other hand, when "small win symbol 2" is won based on the second special symbol lottery executed during time-saving mode 2 or time-saving mode 3, a stop symbol corresponding to "consecutive win symbol" is displayed on the special symbol mini symbol display area A1 and the special symbol 2 fourth symbol display area A3.
When "small win symbol 3" is won, a stop symbol corresponding to "small win symbol 3" is displayed on the special symbol 2 display device. In particular, when "small win symbol 3" is won based on the second special symbol lottery executed during normal mode or time-saving mode 1, a stop symbol corresponding to "consecutive win symbol" is displayed on the special symbol mini symbol display area A1 and the special symbol 2 fourth symbol display area A3, and a stop symbol corresponding to "consecutive win symbol" is displayed on the main performance symbol display area A6. On the other hand, when "small win symbol 3" is won based on the second special symbol lottery executed during time-saving mode 2 or time-saving mode 3, a stop symbol corresponding to "consecutive win symbol" is displayed on the special symbol mini symbol display area A1 and the special symbol 2 fourth symbol display area A3.
When "small win symbol 4" is won, a stop symbol corresponding to "small win symbol 4" is displayed on the special symbol 2 display device. In particular, when "small win symbol 4" is won based on the second special symbol lottery executed during normal mode or time-saving mode 1, a stop symbol corresponding to "consecutive win symbol" is displayed on the special symbol mini symbol display area A1 and the special symbol 2 fourth symbol display area A3, and a stop symbol corresponding to "consecutive win symbol" is displayed on the main performance symbol display area A6. On the other hand, when "small win symbol 4" is won based on the second special symbol lottery executed during time-saving mode 2 or time-saving mode 3, a stop symbol corresponding to "consecutive win symbol" is displayed on the special symbol mini symbol display area A1 and the special symbol 2 fourth symbol display area A3.

When the "small win symbol 5" is won, the stop symbol corresponding to the "small win symbol 5" is displayed in a frozen state on the special symbol 2 display device. In particular, when the "small win symbol 5" is won based on the second special symbol lottery executed during normal mode or time-saving mode 1, the stop symbol corresponding to the "consecutive win symbol" is displayed in the special symbol mini symbol display area A1 and the special symbol 2 fourth symbol display area A3, and the stop symbol corresponding to the "consecutive win symbol" is displayed in the main effect symbol display area A6. On the other hand, when the "small win symbol 5" is won based on the second special symbol lottery executed during time-saving mode 2 or time-saving mode 3, the stop symbol corresponding to the "consecutive win symbol" is displayed in the special symbol mini symbol display area A1 and the special symbol 2 fourth symbol display area A3.
If the "small win symbol 6" is won, the stop symbol corresponding to the "small win symbol 6" is displayed in a frozen state on the special symbol 2 display device. In particular, if the "small win symbol 6" is won based on the second special symbol lottery executed during normal mode or time-saving mode 1, the stop symbol corresponding to the "single win symbol" is displayed in the special symbol mini symbol display area A1 and the special symbol 2 fourth symbol display area A3, and the stop symbol corresponding to the "single win symbol" is displayed in the main effect symbol display area A6. On the other hand, if the "small win symbol 6" is won based on the second special symbol lottery executed during time-saving mode 2 or time-saving mode 3, the stop symbol corresponding to the "single win symbol" is displayed in the special symbol mini symbol display area A1 and the special symbol 2 fourth symbol display area A3.

On the other hand, if the first special symbol lottery is unsuccessful (in the case of a "lose"), a stop symbol corresponding to the "losing symbol" is displayed in the special symbol 1 display device. In particular, if the first special symbol lottery executed during the normal state or time-saving state 1 is unsuccessful, a stop symbol corresponding to the "losing symbol" is displayed in the special symbol mini symbol display area A1 and the special symbol 1 fourth symbol display area A2, and a stop symbol corresponding to the "losing symbol" is displayed in the main effect symbol display area A6. On the other hand, if the first special symbol lottery executed during the time-saving state 2 or time-saving state 3 is unsuccessful, a stop symbol corresponding to the "losing symbol" is displayed in the special symbol mini symbol display area A1 and the special symbol 1 fourth symbol display area A2.
Here, the "losing patterns" displayed in a stopped state in the special chart mini pattern display area A1 and the special chart 1 fourth pattern display area A2 are, for example, a display mode in which the special chart mini performance pattern a1 displayed in a stopped state in the three special chart display areas of the special chart mini pattern display area A1 has a number (identification information) such as "1, 6, 9" that is different from the number (identification information) that is shown by the special chart mini performance pattern a1 displayed in a stopped state in at least one special chart display area, and the special chart 1 fourth performance pattern a2 displayed in a stopped state in the special chart 1 fourth pattern display area A2 has an "X" sign.
In addition, the "losing pattern" displayed in a stopped state in the main performance pattern display area A6 is displayed in a manner such that, for example, the main performance pattern a6 displayed in a stopped state in the three performance pattern display areas has a combination of numbers (identification information), such as "1, 6, 9," that is different from the numbers (identification information) shown by the main performance pattern a6 displayed in a stopped state in at least one of the performance pattern display areas.

When the "jackpot symbol 1" to "jackpot symbol 8" are selected, a jackpot game state is generated. In the jackpot game state, the special electric device 55a is shifted from a closed state to an open state, and it becomes possible (easy) for a game ball to enter the big prize opening 55.
During the jackpot game state, a predetermined number of rounds of play are executed. If "jackpot symbol 1,""jackpot symbol 2,""jackpot symbol 6,""jackpot symbol 7," or "jackpot symbol 8" is won, the number of rounds of play is set to 3. On the other hand, if "jackpot symbol 3" is won, the number of rounds of play is set to 10. On the other hand, if "jackpot symbol 4" is won, the number of rounds of play is set to 7. On the other hand, if "jackpot symbol 5" is won, the number of rounds of play is set to 5.
In addition, if the player wins any of "jackpot pattern 1" to "jackpot pattern 8," the maximum opening time of the special electric device 55a in each round of play is set to a predetermined time (29.0 [s] in this embodiment).
Each round of play ends when one of the following conditions is met: (1) the longest opening time has elapsed since the special electric device 55a was opened, and (2) the number of game balls entering the large prize opening 55 during the round of play reaches a predetermined upper limit (10 balls in this embodiment).

At the end of the jackpot gaming state, a predetermined number of time-saving times (first time-saving number of times, second time-saving number of times, third time-saving number of times) is set. Then, depending on the end of the jackpot gaming state, time-saving control (time-saving control 1, time-saving control 2, or time-saving control 3) is initiated according to the set number of time-saving times. As a result, depending on the end of the jackpot gaming state, a time-saving state (time-saving state 1, time-saving state 2, or time-saving state 3) is initiated.
In this embodiment, time-saving control 1 (time-saving state 1), time-saving control 2 (time-saving state 2), and time-saving control 3 (time-saving state 3) are defined as types of time-saving control (time-saving state). In time-saving control 1 (time-saving state 1), time-saving control 2 (time-saving state 2), and time-saving control 3 (time-saving state 3), the probability of selecting a "long opening pattern" when a "normal symbol hit" is won by the normal symbol lottery is different. In other words, in time-saving control 1 (time-saving state 1), time-saving control 2 (time-saving state 2), and time-saving control 3 (time-saving state 3), the probability of winning a "long opening pattern" based on the normal symbol lottery is different.
In other words, the probability that the "long opening pattern" will be selected when a "normal winning" is won in the normal symbol lottery is higher in time-saving control 1 (time-saving state 1) than in time-saving control 2 (time-saving state 2) and time-saving control 3 (time-saving state 3), which is advantageous to the player. In this embodiment, the probability that the "long opening pattern" will be selected when a "normal winning" is won in the normal symbol lottery is the same in time-saving control 2 (time-saving state 2) and time-saving control 3 (time-saving state 3).
Specifically, if a "normal win" is won based on the normal symbol lottery executed during the occurrence of time-saving state 1, a "long opening pattern" is selected and set with a probability of 1/1. On the other hand, if a "normal win" is won based on the normal symbol lottery executed during the occurrence of time-saving state 2 or time-saving state 3, a "long opening pattern" is selected and set with a probability of 380/65536.

In this embodiment, the termination conditions (hereinafter referred to as "time-saving termination conditions") for the time-saving controls (time-saving control 1, time-saving control 2, time-saving control 3) are specified as "time-saving termination condition 1,""time-saving termination condition 2,""time-saving termination condition 3," and "time-saving termination condition 4."
"Time-saving end condition 1" is a condition based on the normal symbol lottery (normal symbol winning/losing judgment). In other words, time-saving end condition 1 is a condition based on the number of times the normal symbol changes. In this embodiment, time-saving end condition 1 is established when the number of times the normal symbol changes during time-saving reaches the first time-saving number (prescribed number) set at the end of the jackpot game state.
"Number of times normal symbols change during time-saving control" is the number of times the normal symbol change display is executed (started) during time-saving control (time-saving control 1, time-saving control 2, or time-saving control 3).
When the time-saving termination condition 1 is met, the time-saving control (time-saving control 1, time-saving control 2 or time-saving control 3) is terminated at the start of the variable display of the normal pattern that triggered the time-saving termination condition 1 to be met.
Specifically, the main control board 200 is configured with a first time-saving counter that counts the number of times the normal symbol changes during the time-saving period. At the end of the jackpot game state, the CPU 210 sets the value of the first time-saving counter to a first time-saving number corresponding to the type of winning (the type of winning symbol). Furthermore, each time a start determination (normal symbol win/loss determination) based on the normal symbol game information is executed (each time the normal symbol variable display begins), "1" is subtracted from the value of the first time-saving counter. Then, when the value of the first time-saving counter is subtracted from "1" to "0," time-saving termination condition 1 is established, and time-saving control (time-saving control 1, time-saving control 2, or time-saving control 3) is stopped. As a result, time-saving termination condition 1 is established when the number of start determinations (normal symbol win/loss determinations) executed during time-saving control (time-saving control 1, time-saving control 2, or time-saving control 3) reaches the first time-saving number (predetermined number) set at the end of the jackpot game state.
In addition, the time-saving termination condition 1 may be established when the number of times the normal electric device 52a is operated (the number of times the normal symbol win game state is played) reaches the first time-saving number. Alternatively, the time-saving termination condition 1 may be established when the number of times the "normal symbol win" is won by the normal symbol lottery reaches the first time-saving number.

"Time-saving end condition 2" is a condition based on the second special symbol lottery (special symbol hit determination based on special symbol 2 game information). In other words, time-saving end condition 2 is a condition based on the number of times the second special symbol changes. In this embodiment, time-saving end condition 2 is established when the number of times the special symbol 2 changes during time-saving reaches the second time-saving number (specified number) set at the end of the jackpot game state.
"Number of times special symbol 2 changes during time-saving control" is the number of times the second special symbol changes display that is executed (started) during time-saving control (time-saving control 1, time-saving control 2, or time-saving control 3).
When the time-saving termination condition 2 is met, the time-saving control (time-saving control 1, time-saving control 2 or time-saving control 3) is terminated at the start of the variable display of the second special pattern that triggered the time-saving termination condition 2 to be met.
Specifically, the main control board 200 is configured with a second time-saving counter that counts the number of times the special symbol 2 changes during the time-saving mode. At the end of the jackpot game state, the CPU 210 sets the value of the second time-saving counter to the number of times the second time-saving mode is activated, corresponding to the type of win (the type of winning symbol). Furthermore, each time a start determination (special symbol win determination) based on the special symbol 2 game information is executed (each time the variable display of the second special symbol starts), "1" is subtracted from the value of the second time-saving counter. When the value of the second time-saving counter is subtracted from "1" to "0," the time-saving termination condition 2 is established, and the time-saving control (time-saving control 1, time-saving control 2, or time-saving control 3) is stopped. As a result, when the number of start judgments (special chart hit judgments) based on special chart 2 game information executed during time-saving control (time-saving control 1, time-saving control 2 or time-saving control 3) reaches the second time-saving number of times (specified number of times) set at the end of the jackpot game state, time-saving end condition 2 will be established.

The "time-saving end condition 3" is a condition based on the special symbol lottery (special symbol winning/losing determination). In other words, the time-saving end condition 3 is a condition based on the number of times the special symbol changes. In this embodiment, the time-saving end condition 3 is met when the total number of times the special symbol changes during the time-saving period reaches the third time-saving number (prescribed number) set at the end of the jackpot game state.
The "total number of times special symbols change during time-saving control" is the sum of the number of times the first special symbol changes (starts) during time-saving control (time-saving control 1, time-saving control 2, or time-saving control 3) and the number of times the second special symbol changes (starts) during the time-saving control (time-saving control 1, time-saving control 2, or time-saving control 3).
When the time-saving termination condition 3 is satisfied, the time-saving control (time-saving control 1, time-saving control 2 or time-saving control 3) is terminated at the start of the variable display of the special pattern that triggered the time-saving termination condition 3 to be satisfied.
Specifically, the main control board 200 is configured with a third time-saving counter that counts the total number of times the special symbol changes during the time-saving mode. At the end of the jackpot game state, the CPU 210 sets the value of the third time-saving counter to the third number of times the special symbol changes according to the type of win (type of winning symbol). In addition, each time a start determination (special symbol win determination) based on the special symbol game information (special symbol 1 game information or special symbol 2 game information) is made (each time the variable display of the special symbol (first special symbol or second special symbol) starts), "1" is subtracted from the value of the third time-saving counter. Then, in response to the value of the second time-saving counter being subtracted from "1" to "0," time-saving termination condition 3 is established, and time-saving control (time-saving control 1, time-saving control 2, or time-saving control 3) is stopped. As a result, when the number of start judgments (special chart hit judgments) based on special chart game information (special chart 1 game information or special chart 2 game information) executed during time-saving control (time-saving control 1, time-saving control 2 or time-saving control 3) reaches the third time-saving number of times (specified number of times) set at the end of the jackpot game state, time-saving end condition 3 will be established.

The "time-saving termination condition 4" is a condition based on winning a "jackpot" (a jackpot gaming state). In this embodiment, the time-saving termination condition 4 is met when a "jackpot" is won (when a jackpot gaming state occurs).
If the time-saving termination condition 4 is met, the time-saving control (time-saving control 1, time-saving control 2 or time-saving control 3) is terminated when the stopped display of the "jackpot pattern" ends.
The time-saving termination conditions may include "time-saving termination condition 5.""Time-saving termination condition 5" is a condition based on winning a "small win" (small win gaming state). In other words, when a "small win" is won (when a small win gaming state occurs), time-saving termination condition 5 is met. In this case, when time-saving termination condition 5 is met, the time-saving control (time-saving control 1, time-saving control 2, or time-saving control 3) may be configured to end at any of the following times: the start of the variable display of the special symbol based on the special symbol lottery (start determination) that won the "small win," the start of the static display of the special symbol based on the special symbol lottery (start determination) that won the "small win," the start of the small win gaming state (or small win gaming), and the end of the small win gaming state (or small win gaming).
Furthermore, in this embodiment, the time-saving termination condition 1 may be established when the number of times that a normal symbol is won during the time-saving period reaches the first time-saving period set at the end of the jackpot game state. The "number of times that a normal symbol is won during the time-saving period" is the number of times that a "normal symbol win" is won based on the normal symbol lottery executed during the time-saving control (time-saving control 1, time-saving control 2, or time-saving control 3). In other words, the time-saving control (time-saving control 1 or time-saving control 2) may be terminated on the condition that the number of times that a "normal symbol win" is won based on the normal symbol lottery executed during the time-saving control (time-saving control 1, time-saving control 2, or time-saving control 3) reaches the first time-saving period.

As shown in Figure 6(a) or (b), if "jackpot symbol 1" is selected based on the start determination performed during the "normal state" or "time-saving state 1" to "time-saving state 3," at the end of the jackpot gaming state, the first time-saving count is set to 100 [times], the second time-saving count is set to 1 [time], and the third time-saving count is set to 5 [times]. Then, in response to the end of the jackpot gaming state, time-saving control 2 is initiated. As a result, the gaming state after the end of the jackpot gaming state becomes time-saving state 2.
On the other hand, if "jackpot pattern 2" to "jackpot pattern 7" are selected based on the start determination performed during the "normal state" or "time-saving state 1" to "time-saving state 3," at the end of the jackpot gaming state, the first time-saving number of times is set to 100 [times], the second time-saving number of times is set to 1 [time], and the third time-saving number of times is set to 5 [times]. Then, in response to the end of the jackpot gaming state, time-saving control 1 is initiated. As a result, the gaming state after the end of the jackpot gaming state becomes time-saving state 1.
On the other hand, if "jackpot pattern 8" is hit based on the start determination executed during the "normal state" or "time-saving state 1" to "time-saving state 3," at the end of the jackpot gaming state, the first time-saving number of times is set to 33 [times], the second time-saving number of times is set to 1 [time], and the third time-saving number of times is set to 5 [times]. Then, in response to the end of the jackpot gaming state, time-saving control 3 is started. As a result, the gaming state after the end of the jackpot gaming state becomes time-saving state 3.

When the "small win symbol 1" to the "small win symbol 6" are selected, a small win game state is generated. In the small win game state, the special electric device 55a is shifted from a closed state to an open state, and it becomes possible (easy) for the game ball to enter the large prize opening 55.
During the small win game state, a predetermined number of small win games are executed. When "small win symbol 1" to "small win symbol 6" are won, the number of small win games is set to 1 [time].
In addition, if the player wins "small win pattern 1" to "small win pattern 6," the maximum opening time of the special electric device 55a in each small win game is set to a predetermined time (29.0 [s] in this embodiment).
Each small win game ends when one of the following conditions is met: (1) the longest opening time has elapsed since the special electric device 55a was opened, and (2) the number of game balls entering the large prize opening 55 during the small win game reaches a predetermined upper limit (10 balls in this embodiment).
Furthermore, in each small win game, the allocation means is shifted from a non-V-passing state to a V-passing state. At this time, in each small win game, the allocation means is shifted from a non-V-passing state to a V-passing state in such a manner that it becomes easy (possible) for a gaming ball that enters the large prize opening 55 during the execution of the small win game to pass through the V area. As a result, if "small win pattern 1" to "small win pattern 6" are won, it becomes easy (possible) for the gaming ball to pass through the V area during the small win game state. Note that types of "small win patterns" may be specified that make it difficult (impossible) for the gaming ball to pass through the V area during the small win game state.

If the passage of a game ball through the V area is detected during the occurrence of a small win game state (if the passage of a game ball that has entered the large prize opening 55 during the execution of a small win game is detected during the occurrence of a small win game), a large win game state is generated upon the end of the small win game state.
In this case, if the "small win symbol 1" is won and the passage of the game ball through the V area is detected during the small win game state, the number of rounds is set to 9. As a result, the small win game is considered the first round, and 10 rounds will be played.
On the other hand, if the "small win symbol 2" is won and the passage of the game ball through the V area is detected during the small win game state, the number of rounds is set to 6. As a result, the small win game is considered the first round, and 7 rounds will be played.
On the other hand, if the "small win symbol 3" is won and the passage of the game ball through the V area is detected during the small win game state, the number of rounds is set to 4. As a result, 5 rounds will be played, with the small win game being the first round.
On the other hand, if "small win symbol 4" to "small win symbol 6" are won and the passage of the game ball through the V area is detected during the small win game state, the number of rounds is set to 2. As a result, the small win game is considered the first round, and 3 rounds will be played.
In addition, if a "small win pattern 1" to a "small win pattern 6" is won and the passage of the game ball through the V area is detected during the small win game state, the maximum opening time of the special electric device 55a in each round of play is set to a predetermined time (in this embodiment, 29.0 [s]).
Each round of play ends when one of the following conditions is met: (1) the longest opening time has elapsed since the special electric device 55a was opened, and (2) the number of game balls entering the large prize opening 55 during the round of play reaches a predetermined upper limit (10 balls in this embodiment).
On the other hand, if the passage of the game ball through the V area is not detected during the occurrence of a small win game state (if the passage of the game ball that entered the large prize opening 55 during the execution of a small win game is not detected), the large win game state will not occur.

As shown in FIG. 6(c), if a "small win symbol 1" to "small win symbol 5" are selected based on the start determination performed during the "normal state" or "time-saving state 1" to "time-saving state 3," and if the passage of the gaming ball through the V area is detected during the small win gaming state, at the end of the jackpot gaming state, the first time-saving count is set to 100 times, the second time-saving count is set to 1 time, and the third time-saving count is set to 5 times. Then, upon the end of the jackpot gaming state, time-saving control 1 is initiated. As a result, the gaming state after the end of the jackpot gaming state becomes time-saving state 1.
On the other hand, if the "small win symbol 6" is won based on the start determination executed during the "normal state" or "time-saving state 1" to "time-saving state 3," and if the passage of the gaming ball through the V area is detected during the small win gaming state, at the end of the jackpot gaming state, the first time-saving number of times is set to 33 [times], the second time-saving number of times is set to 1 [time], and the third time-saving number of times is set to 5 [times]. Then, in response to the end of the jackpot gaming state, time-saving control 3 is initiated. As a result, the gaming state after the end of the jackpot gaming state becomes time-saving state 3.

(About the Yu-Time Counter)
In the pachinko machine 1, if the total number of special chart changes reaches a predetermined number of play times without a jackpot game state occurring, time-saving control (time-saving state) is initiated.
The "total number of times special patterns change" is the total number of times the first special pattern changes and the number of times the second special pattern changes.
Specifically, the main control board 200 is configured with a play-time counter that counts the total number of times the special symbol changes. During the RAM clear initialization process (step S1-30) described below, the CPU 210 sets the value of the play-time counter to a predetermined number of play-times (600 in this embodiment). Each time the display of a special symbol (first special symbol or second special symbol) changes, the value of the play-time counter is subtracted by "1." When the value of the play-time counter is subtracted from "1" to "0," time-saving control is initiated. Furthermore, when a jackpot gaming state occurs, the value of the play-time counter is set to a predetermined number of play-times (600 in this embodiment) at the end of the jackpot gaming state.
In this embodiment, when the value of the Yu-time counter is subtracted from "1" to "0," the first time-saving count is set to 100 times, the second time-saving count is set to 1 time, and the third time-saving count is set to 5 times, and time-saving control 1 (time-saving state 1) is initiated. Alternatively, when the value of the Yu-time counter is subtracted from "1" to "0," the first time-saving count is set to 100 times, the second time-saving count is set to 1 time, and the third time-saving count is set to 5 times, and time-saving control 2 (time-saving state 2) is initiated. Alternatively, when the value of the Yu-time counter is subtracted from "1" to "0," the first time-saving count is set to 33 times, the second time-saving count is set to 1 time, and the third time-saving count is set to 5 times, and time-saving control 3 (time-saving state 3) is initiated.

(Regarding the timing of the end of the time-saving mode)
Next, the timing of ending the time-saving state will be described.
As described above, in the pachinko machine 1, the time-saving termination condition 1 based on the number of times the normal symbol changes is defined as the time-saving termination condition. That is, when the number of times the normal symbol changes during the time-saving period reaches the first time-saving number set at the end of the jackpot game state, the time-saving termination condition 1 is established and the time-saving control is stopped (the time-saving state is terminated).
In the following explanation, when the variable display of the normal symbol executed during the time-saving state (time-saving state 1 to time-saving state 3) reaches the first time-saving number, the variable display of the normal symbol for the first time-saving number is referred to as the "final normal symbol variable." In other words, the final normal symbol variable is the variable display of the normal symbol that establishes the time-saving end condition 1.
Here, if the configuration is such that "1" is subtracted from the value of the first time-saving counter when the stopped display of the normal pattern begins or ends, if the variable display of the normal pattern that started during the occurrence of a jackpot game state ends after the end of the jackpot game state, the value of the first time-saving counter related to the time-saving state that starts after the end of the jackpot game state will be subtracted based on the variable display of the normal pattern that started during the occurrence of the jackpot game state, and the player will not be able to enjoy the benefits of the time-saving state for one variable display of the normal pattern, which may be detrimental to the player.
Therefore, in this embodiment, when the variable display of the normal symbol starts, "1" is subtracted from the value of the first time-saving counter to determine the end of the time-saving state. This makes it possible to prevent a situation in which the value of the first time-saving counter for the time-saving state that starts after the end of the jackpot gaming state is subtracted based on the variable display of the normal symbol that started during the occurrence of the jackpot gaming state.
Furthermore, when the normal symbol variation display starts, "1" is subtracted from the value of the first time-saving counter, and the end of the time-saving state is determined. If the end of the time-saving state is determined before the start determination based on the normal symbol game information (normal symbol win/lose determination, normal symbol stop symbol determination, normal symbol variation pattern determination, etc.) is made, the time-saving state will end and the normal state will begin before the start determination for the final normal symbol variation is made. As a result, the variation pattern for the final normal symbol variation, the opening pattern of the normal electric device 52a during the normal symbol winning game state for the final normal symbol variation, etc., will be selected to correspond to the normal state, and the player will not be able to enjoy the benefits of the time-saving state for the final normal symbol variation, which may be detrimental to the player.
Therefore, in this embodiment, after the start judgment based on the normal game information (normal game win/loss judgment, normal game stop pattern judgment, normal game change pattern judgment, etc.) is executed, "1" is subtracted from the value of the first time-saving counter, and the end of the time-saving state is judged, and the opening pattern of the normal electric device 52a during the normal game win state is selected based on the game state at the time of the start judgment. This prevents a situation where the benefits of the time-saving state cannot be enjoyed for the final normal game change.

Specifically, in the normal symbol change waiting process (see FIG. 35) executed when the normal symbol change display starts, the CPU 210 first executes a start judgment (normal symbol win/lose judgment process (step S20-5), normal symbol stop symbol judgment process (step S20-6), normal symbol change pattern judgment process (step S20-8), etc.) based on the current game state, then selects the opening pattern of the normal electric device 52a during the occurrence of the normal symbol winning game state based on the current game state, sets information specifying the selected opening pattern in the opening pattern designation flag area (opening pattern setting process (step S20-12)), and then executes the number-cut management process (step S20-14). Then, in the number-cut management process, "1" is subtracted from the value of the first time-shortening counter, and when the value of the first time-shortening counter is subtracted from "1" to "0", the time-shortening control is stopped (the time-shortening state is ended).
In addition, in the normal electric role control data setting process (step S22-4) executed when the normal pattern stop display ends, the CPU 210 selects and sets the normal electric role control table based on the information set in the opening pattern designation flag area.
This makes it possible to select and set the fluctuation pattern (fluctuation time), the opening pattern of the normal electric device 52a during the normal winning game state, etc., for the final normal fluctuation that begins during the occurrence of time-saving states 2 and 3, based on the fact that time-saving states 2 and 3 are occurring.
In other words, if the final normal symbol variation starts during the occurrence of time-saving states 2 and 3, the time-saving states 2 and 3 are ended and the normal state is initiated at the start of the final normal symbol variation. As a result, the normal state is in effect during the execution of the final normal symbol variation, during the execution of the stop display of the normal symbol related to the final normal symbol variation, and during the occurrence of the normal symbol winning game state related to the final normal symbol variation. However, for the variation pattern (variation time) related to the final normal symbol variation, the opening pattern of the normal electric device 52a during the occurrence of the normal symbol winning game state related to the final normal symbol variation, etc., it is possible to select and set information based on the game state being time-saving states 2 and 3.

As described above, the pachinko machine 1 defines a time-saving termination condition 2 based on the number of times the second special symbol changes as a time-saving termination condition. That is, when the number of times the second special symbol changes during the time-saving mode reaches the second time-saving number set at the end of the jackpot game mode, the time-saving termination condition 2 is established, and the time-saving control is stopped (the time-saving mode is terminated).
In the following explanation, when the variable display of the second special symbol executed during the time-saving state (time-saving state 1 to time-saving state 3) reaches the second time-saving number, the variable display of the second special symbol at the second time-saving number is referred to as the "final special symbol 2 variable." In other words, the final special symbol 2 variable is the variable display of the second special symbol that establishes the time-saving end condition 2.
Here, the second special symbol lottery results in a 1/1 chance of winning a "jackpot" or "minor jackpot." This subtracts "1" from the value of the second time-saving counter when the second special symbol begins or ends, determining the end of the time-saving state. If the "long opening pattern" is selected as the opening pattern for the normal electric device 52a associated with the normal symbol winning game state for the normal symbol winning game state that begins during the execution of the final special symbol 2 variation, the normal symbol winning game state will be executed across the jackpot game state associated with the final special symbol 2 variation, which may cause the player to feel uncomfortable. In particular, if a long-time pattern is selected as the normal symbol winning game state pattern for the normal symbol winning game state that begins during the execution of the final special symbol 2 variation, after the jackpot game state associated with the final special symbol 2 variation ends, the player will have to wait until the normal symbol winning game state ends before the next normal symbol winning game state will begin, which may cause the player to feel uncomfortable.
Therefore, in this embodiment, when the variable display of the second special symbol begins, "1" is subtracted from the value of the second time-saving counter, and the end of the time-saving state is determined. This makes it possible to immediately end the time-saving state in response to a game ball entering the second starting hole 52 during a normal winning game state. This makes it possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable as described above.

Specifically, in the special symbol change waiting process (see FIG. 21) executed when the change display of the second special symbol starts, the CPU 210 first executes a start judgment (special symbol hit judgment process (step S11-6), special symbol symbol judgment process (step S11-7), special symbol change pattern judgment process (step S11-10), etc.) based on the current game state, then selects the type of time-saving state (time-saving state 1 to time-saving state 3) and the number of time-saving times (first number of time-saving times, second number of time-saving times, third number of time-saving times) that will start after the end of the jackpot game state based on the current game state, sets information specifying the type of time-saving state selected in the preliminary time-saving control flag area of the RAM 230, and sets the selected number of time-saving times in the preliminary time-saving number counter (game state preliminary setting process (step S11-14)), and then executes the number-cutoff management process (step S11-15). Then, in the cut-off number management process, "1" is subtracted from the value of the second time-saving counter, and when the value of the second time-saving counter is subtracted from "1" to "0", the time-saving control is stopped (the time-saving state is ended).
In addition, in the game state setting process (step S43-2) executed at the end of the jackpot game state, the CPU 210 sets the type of time-saving state (time-saving state 1 to time-saving state 3) that will start after the end of the jackpot game state based on the information set in the preliminary time-saving control flag area, and sets the number of time-saving times (first time-saving number to third time-saving number) of the time-saving state that will start after the end of the jackpot game state based on the number of time-saving times set in the preliminary time-saving counter.
This makes it possible to select and set the fluctuation pattern (fluctuation time), the game state after the end of the jackpot game state (type of time-saving state, number of time-saving states), etc. for the final special chart 2 fluctuation that starts while time-saving states 1, 2, and 3 are occurring, based on the fact that time-saving states 1, 2, and 3 are occurring.
In other words, if the final special symbol 2 variation starts during time-saving states 1, 2, and 3, the time-saving states 1, 2, and 3 end and the normal state begins at the start of the final special symbol 2 variation. As a result, the normal state occurs during the execution of the final special symbol 2 variation, the execution of the stopped display of the second special symbol related to the final special symbol 2 variation, and the occurrence of the jackpot game state related to the final special symbol 2 variation. However, it is possible to select and set information based on whether the game state is time-saving states 1, 2, and 3, such as the variation pattern (variation time) related to the final special symbol 2 variation and the game state after the end of the jackpot game state related to the final special symbol 2 variation (type of time-saving state, number of time-saving states).

(Regarding game progress)
Next, the progress of the game in the pachinko machine 1 will be explained.
FIG. 7 is a diagram showing the transition of the game state.
In the pachinko machine 1, when a "jackpot" is won through the special pattern lottery (first special pattern lottery or second special pattern lottery), a jackpot game state is created in which it is possible (easy) for the game ball to enter the big prize opening 55.
Furthermore, if a "small win" is won by the second special symbol lottery, a small win gaming state is created in which it is possible (easy) for the gaming ball to enter the large prize opening 55. Furthermore, if the passage of the gaming ball that has entered the large prize opening 55 through the V area is detected while the small win gaming state is occurring, a large win gaming state is created in which it is possible (easy) for the gaming ball to enter the large prize opening 55.
The player can win many prize balls by making the game ball enter the big prize opening 55.
In particular, in the pachinko machine 1, the probability that a jackpot game state occurs based on the second special symbol lottery is higher than the probability that a jackpot game state occurs based on the first special symbol lottery.
Specifically, in the first special symbol lottery, a "small win" is not set as a lottery result, so the big win game state is triggered only when a "big win" is won. The probability of winning a "big win" through the first special symbol lottery is 1/219 (a probability according to a set value).
On the other hand, in the second special symbol lottery, a "big win" and a "small win" are set as the lottery results, so if a "big win" is won, a big win gaming state is triggered, and if a "small win" is won and the passage of the gaming ball through the V area is detected during the small win gaming state, a big win gaming state is triggered. In particular, the probability of winning a "big win" or a "small win" through the second special symbol lottery is 1/1.
In this way, in the second special pattern lottery, a big win game state can be generated via a small win game state, so the probability of generating a big win game state is higher compared to the first special pattern lottery.
As a result, in the pachinko machine 1, the possibility of a big win game state occurring is higher when a chance for the second special symbol lottery is obtained than when a chance for the first special symbol lottery is obtained, which is advantageous to the player.

In order to get a chance to draw the second special symbol, it is necessary to win the "normal symbol win" in the normal symbol lottery and to insert a game ball into the second starting hole 52 when the normal electric device 52a is in the open state during the normal symbol game state.
Here, in the pachinko machine 1, a "short release pattern" and a "long release pattern" are specified as the release patterns of the normal electric device 52a during the occurrence of a normal winning game state. When the "short release pattern" is selected, it becomes difficult (impossible) for a game ball to enter the second start hole 52 during the occurrence of a normal winning game state. On the other hand, when the "long release pattern" is selected, it becomes easy (possible) for a game ball to enter the second start hole 52 during the occurrence of a normal winning game state.
In particular, when the normal state occurs, if a "normal symbol win" is won in the normal symbol lottery, the "short opening pattern" is selected with a probability of 1 in 1. As a result, when the normal state occurs, if a "normal symbol win" is won in the normal symbol lottery, it becomes difficult for the game ball to enter the second starting hole 52 (it becomes difficult to get an opportunity to win the second special symbol lottery) with a probability of 1 in 1.
On the other hand, when the time-saving state 1 is occurring, if a "normal symbol win" is won by the normal symbol lottery, the "long opening pattern" is selected with a probability of 1 in 1. As a result, when the time-saving state 1 is occurring, if a "normal symbol win" is won by the normal symbol lottery, it becomes easy for the game ball to enter the second starting hole 52 (it becomes easy to get an opportunity to win the second special symbol lottery) with a probability of 1 in 1.
On the other hand, when time-saving state 2 or time-saving state 3 occurs, if a "normal symbol win" is won by the normal symbol lottery, the "long opening pattern" is selected with a probability of 380/65536. As a result, when time-saving state 2 or time-saving state 3 occurs, if a "normal symbol win" is won by the normal symbol lottery, it becomes easy for the game ball to enter second starting hole 52 (it becomes easy to get an opportunity to win the second special symbol lottery) with a probability of 380/65536.

As described above, during the normal state, if a "normal win" is won in the normal symbol lottery, the "short release pattern" is selected with a 1/1 probability. This means that even if a "normal win" is won in the normal symbol lottery, it is virtually impossible to obtain an opportunity to win the second special symbol lottery. Therefore, the player proceeds with the game with the aim of winning a "jackpot" in the first special symbol lottery in order to transition the game state to time-saving state 1 or time-saving state 2. That is, the player launches the game ball along the left path, aiming for the ball to enter the first starting hole 51. If a "jackpot" is won in the first special symbol lottery, after the jackpot game state ends, the game state transitions to time-saving state 1 or time-saving state 2, depending on the winning symbol.
On the other hand, during the occurrence of time-saving state 1, if a "normal hit" is won in the normal symbol lottery, the "long opening pattern" is selected with a 1/1 probability. This makes it easier to win the second special symbol lottery if a "normal hit" is won in the normal symbol lottery. Therefore, in order to win the second special symbol lottery, the player will play with the aim of winning the "long opening pattern" based on the normal symbol lottery. That is, the player will launch the game ball toward the right path with the aim of passing through the starting gate 41. In particular, in this embodiment, the probability of winning a "normal hit" in the normal symbol lottery is 1/1, and the probability of winning a "jackpot" or "minor hit" in the second special symbol lottery is 1/1. This makes it possible to almost certainly trigger a jackpot game state based on a single normal symbol lottery when transitioning to time-saving state 1. When a "small win" or a "big win" is won by the second special symbol lottery, the game state shifts to time-shortened state 1 or time-shortened state 3 according to the winning symbol after the big win game state ends.

On the other hand, during the occurrence of time-saving state 2, if a "normal win" is won in the normal symbol lottery, the "long opening pattern" is selected with a probability of 380/65536. This makes it easier to win the opportunity to draw the second special symbol with a probability of 380/65536 if a "normal win" is won in the normal symbol lottery. Therefore, in order to win the opportunity to draw the second special symbol, the player will proceed with the game with the aim of winning the "long opening pattern" based on the normal symbol lottery. In other words, the player will shoot the game ball toward the right path, aiming to pass through the start gate 41. Then, if a "small win" or "jackpot" is won in the second special symbol lottery, after the jackpot game state ends, the game state will transition to time-saving state 1 or time-saving state 3, depending on the winning symbol. On the other hand, if the second special pattern lottery does not result in a "small win" or a "big win" and the normal pattern variable display is executed for the first time-saving number of times (100 times), the game state transitions to the normal state.
On the other hand, during the occurrence of time-saving state 3, if a "normal win" is won in the normal symbol lottery, the "long opening pattern" is selected with a probability of 380/65536. This makes it easier to win the opportunity to draw the second special symbol with a probability of 380/65536 if a "normal win" is won in the normal symbol lottery. Therefore, in order to win the opportunity to draw the second special symbol, the player will proceed with the game with the aim of winning the "long opening pattern" based on the normal symbol lottery. That is, the player will launch the game ball toward the right path, aiming to pass through the start gate 41. Then, if a "small win" or "jackpot" is won in the second special symbol lottery, after the jackpot game state ends, the game state will transition to time-saving state 1 or time-saving state 3, depending on the winning symbol. On the other hand, if the second special pattern lottery does not result in a "small win" or "big win" and the normal pattern variable display is executed for the first time reduction number of times (33 times), the game state will transition to the normal state.

In the pachinko machine 1, when the RAM clear initialization process (step S1-30) described later is executed, the normal state is generated. During the normal state, if a "normal symbol win" is won in the normal symbol lottery, the "short opening pattern" is selected with a probability of 1/1 (the probability that the "long opening pattern" is selected is 0%).
7, if "jackpot symbol 1" is selected based on the first special symbol lottery executed during the normal state, time-saving state 2 is initiated upon the end of the jackpot gaming state. On the other hand, if "jackpot symbol 2" is selected based on the first special symbol lottery executed during the normal state, time-saving state 1 is initiated upon the end of the jackpot gaming state.
If a "normal hit" is won based on the normal symbol lottery executed during time-saving state 1, a "long opening pattern" is selected with a probability of 1/1. As a result, if a "normal hit" is won based on the normal symbol lottery executed during time-saving state 1, there is a 1/1 probability that a game ball will enter the second starting hole 52 during the normal hit game state. Furthermore, there is a 1/1 probability that a "jackpot" or "small hit" will be won in the second special symbol lottery. As a result, if a game ball enters the second starting hole 52, there is a 1/1 probability that a jackpot game state will be triggered. In other words, if a "normal hit" is won based on the normal symbol lottery executed during time-saving state 1, there is a 1/1 probability that a jackpot game state will be triggered.

If "Jackpot Symbol 3" to "Jackpot Symbol 7" are selected based on the second special symbol drawing executed during time-saving State 1, time-saving State 1 is initiated upon the end of the jackpot gaming state. On the other hand, if "Jackpot Symbol 8" is selected based on the second special symbol drawing executed during time-saving State 1, time-saving State 3 is initiated upon the end of the jackpot gaming state. On the other hand, if "Small Win Symbol 1" to "Small Win Symbol 5" are selected based on the second special symbol drawing executed during time-saving State 1, and the passage of the gaming ball through the V-area is detected during the small win gaming state, time-saving State 1 is initiated upon the end of the jackpot gaming state. On the other hand, if the "small win symbol 6" is selected based on the second special symbol lottery executed while the time-saving state 1 is occurring, and the passage of the game ball through the V area is detected during the small win gaming state, the time-saving state 3 will be initiated upon the end of the big win gaming state.

If a "normal hit" is won based on the normal symbol lottery executed while time-shortened state 2 is occurring, a "long opening pattern" is selected with a probability of 380/65536. As a result, if a "normal hit" is won based on the normal symbol lottery executed while time-shortened state 2 is occurring, it becomes easier for a game ball to enter the second starting hole 52 during the normal hit game state with a probability of 380/65536. Also, as described above, in the second special symbol lottery, there is a 1/1 probability of winning a "jackpot" or "small hit." As a result, if a game ball enters the second starting hole 52, there is a 1/1 probability of a jackpot game state being triggered. In other words, if a "normal symbol win" is won based on the normal symbol lottery executed while the time-saving state 2 is occurring, a jackpot game state will occur with a probability of 380/65536.
If "jackpot symbol 3" to "jackpot symbol 7" are selected based on the second special symbol lottery executed during time-shortened state 2, time-shortened state 1 is initiated upon the end of the jackpot gaming state. On the other hand, if "jackpot symbol 8" is selected based on the second special symbol lottery executed during time-shortened state 2, time-shortened state 3 is initiated upon the end of the jackpot gaming state. On the other hand, if "small jackpot symbol 1" to "jackpot symbol 5" are selected based on the second special symbol lottery executed during time-shortened state 2 and the passage of the gaming ball through the V area is detected during the small jackpot gaming state, time-shortened state 1 is initiated upon the end of the jackpot gaming state. On the other hand, if the "small win symbol 6" is won based on the second special symbol lottery executed during the occurrence of the time-saving state 2, and if the passage of the game ball through the V area is detected during the occurrence of the small win game state, the time-saving state 3 is triggered upon the end of the big win game state. On the other hand, if the big win game state is not triggered during the occurrence of the time-saving state 2, and the variable display of the normal symbol is executed the first time-saving number of times (specifically, 100 times), the normal state is triggered accordingly.

If a "normal hit" is won based on the normal symbol lottery executed during time-saving state 3, a "long opening pattern" is selected with a probability of 380/65536. As a result, if a "normal hit" is won based on the normal symbol lottery executed during time-saving state 3, it becomes easier for a game ball to enter the second starting hole 52 during the normal hit game state with a probability of 380/65536. Also, as described above, in the second special symbol lottery, there is a 1/1 probability of winning a "jackpot" or "small hit." As a result, if a game ball enters the second starting hole 52, there is a 1/1 probability of a jackpot game state being triggered. In other words, if a "normal symbol win" is won based on the normal symbol lottery executed while the time-saving state 3 is occurring, a jackpot game state will occur with a probability of 380/65536.
If "jackpot symbol 3" to "jackpot symbol 7" are selected based on the second special symbol lottery executed during time-saving state 3, time-saving state 1 is initiated upon the end of the jackpot gaming state. On the other hand, if "jackpot symbol 8" is selected based on the second special symbol lottery executed during time-saving state 3, time-saving state 3 is initiated upon the end of the jackpot gaming state. On the other hand, if "small jackpot symbol 1" to "jackpot symbol 5" are selected based on the second special symbol lottery executed during time-saving state 3, and the passage of the gaming ball through the V area is detected during the small jackpot gaming state, time-saving state 1 is initiated upon the end of the jackpot gaming state. On the other hand, if the "small win symbol 6" is won based on the second special symbol lottery executed during the time-saving state 3, and if the passage of the game ball through the V area is detected during the small win gaming state, the time-saving state 3 is triggered upon the end of the big win gaming state. On the other hand, if the big win gaming state is not triggered during the time-saving state 3, and the variable display of the normal symbol is executed the first time-saving number of times (specifically, 33 times), the normal state is triggered accordingly.

As a result of the above, pachinko machine 1 is able to define multiple game states (specifically, normal state, time-saving state 1, time-saving state 2, and time-saving state 3) with different probabilities of occurrence of a jackpot game state (small jackpot game state).
That is, during the normal state, if a "normal symbol win" is won by the normal symbol lottery, the "short release pattern" is selected with a probability of 1/1. As a result, a jackpot gaming state is not triggered based on the second special symbol lottery, and a jackpot gaming state is triggered only based on the first special symbol lottery. Therefore, a jackpot gaming state is triggered with a probability of 1/219.
On the other hand, during the occurrence of time-saving state 1, if a "normal hit" is won by the normal symbol lottery, the "long opening pattern" is selected with a probability of 1/1. In particular, the probability of winning a "normal hit" by the normal symbol lottery is 1/1, and the probability of winning a "big hit" or "small hit" by the second special symbol lottery is 1/1. As a result, when transitioning to time-saving state 1, it is possible to almost certainly create a big hit game state (small hit game state) based on a single normal symbol lottery. Therefore, a big hit game state is created with a probability of 1/1.
On the other hand, during the occurrence of time-saving state 2 or time-saving state 3, if a "normal hit" is won by the normal symbol lottery, the "long opening pattern" is selected with a probability of 380/65536. In particular, the probability of winning a "normal hit" by the normal symbol lottery is 1/1, and the probability of winning a "big hit" or "small hit" by the second special symbol lottery is 1/1. Therefore, a big hit game state (small hit game state) occurs with a probability of 380/65536.
Therefore, the pachinko machine 1 can improve the playability.

(About the various performances)
Next, various effects executed in the pachinko machine 1 will be explained.
As described above, in the pachinko machine 1, when the normal state or the time-saving state 1 is occurring, a display for notifying the result of the special symbol lottery (first special symbol lottery or second special symbol lottery) is executed in the main effect symbol display area A6 using the first main effect symbol a6. Then, the result of the special symbol lottery (first special symbol lottery or second special symbol lottery) is notified by the combination of three first main effect symbols a6 stopped and displayed in the main effect symbol display area A6.
In addition, when the normal state or time-saving state 1 is occurring, a reserved pattern h corresponding to the special pattern lottery (special pattern 1 game information or special pattern 2 game information) is displayed in the reserved pattern display areas B1 and B2.
Furthermore, when the normal state or time-saving state 1 is occurring, various preview effects suggesting the result of the special symbol lottery (first special symbol lottery or second special symbol lottery) are executed. Specifically, when a start determination based on special symbol game information (special symbol 1 game information or special symbol 2 game information) is executed while the normal state or time-saving state 1 is occurring, during the display of the special symbol variation based on the start determination, a preview effect suggesting the result of the start determination (a preview effect suggesting the result of the special symbol hit determination, a preview effect suggesting the result of the special symbol pattern determination, a preview effect suggesting the result of the special symbol variation pattern determination, etc.) is executed. Note that when the normal state or time-saving state 1 is occurring, various preview effects suggesting the result of the normal symbol lottery are not executed.

On the other hand, when time-saving state 2 or time-saving state 3 is occurring, a display is executed in the main effect symbol display area A6 using the second main effect symbol a6 to notify the result of the normal symbol lottery (particularly, the determination of the normal symbol stop symbol). Then, the result of the normal symbol lottery (particularly, the determination of the normal symbol stop symbol) is notified by the combination of three second main effect symbols a6 stopped and displayed in the main effect symbol display area A6. At this time, if the "long release pattern" is won, a stop symbol corresponding to the "winning symbol" is stopped and displayed in the main effect symbol display area A6. On the other hand, if the "short release pattern" is won, a stop symbol corresponding to the "losing symbol" is stopped and displayed in the main effect symbol display area A6.
Also, when time-saving state 2 or time-saving state 3 is occurring, reserved pattern h corresponding to the normal pattern lottery (normal pattern game information) is displayed in reserved pattern display areas B1 and B2.
Furthermore, when time-saving state 2 or time-saving state 3 is occurring, various preview effects suggesting the result of the normal symbol lottery are executed. Specifically, when a start determination based on normal symbol game information is executed while time-saving state 2 or time-saving state 3 is occurring, a preview effect suggesting the result of the start determination (such as a preview effect suggesting the result of the normal symbol stop symbol determination (specifically, which of the "long opening pattern" and the "short opening pattern" has been won, or the possibility of winning the "long opening pattern")) is executed during the variable display of the normal symbol based on the start determination. Note that when time-saving state 2 or time-saving state 3 is occurring, various preview effects suggesting the result of the special symbol lottery (first special symbol lottery or second special symbol lottery) are not executed.

In addition, a plurality of presentation stages are defined in the pachinko machine 1, and one of the presentation stages is set according to the progress of the game (game state). Then, various presentations corresponding to the presentation stage that has been set are executed.
In this embodiment, a rendering mode corresponding to each rendering stage is defined as a rendering mode for the background rendering, and the background rendering is executed in accordance with the rendering mode corresponding to the set rendering stage.
The "background effect" is an effect that includes a background image displayed as the background of the various effect images (effect symbols a1 to a5, reserved symbol h, etc.) displayed on the display screen 31a, and BGM (music) output from the various speakers 22. This allows the player to grasp (recognize) the current effect stage based on the background effect.
In this embodiment, four production stages (specifically, "production stage A,""production stage B,""production stage C," and "production stage D") are defined.
When the normal state is occurring, "effect stage A" is set, whereby when the normal state is occurring, a background effect corresponding to "effect stage A" is executed.
On the other hand, when the time-shortened state 1 is occurring, a "presentation stage B" is set. As a result, when the time-shortened state 1 is occurring, a background presentation corresponding to the "presentation stage B" is executed.
On the other hand, when the time-shortened state 2 is occurring, a "presentation stage C" is set. As a result, when the time-shortened state 2 is occurring, a background presentation corresponding to the "presentation stage C" is executed.
On the other hand, when the time-shortened state 3 is occurring, a "presentation stage D" is set. As a result, when the time-shortened state 3 is occurring, a background presentation corresponding to the "presentation stage D" is executed.

Here, as described above, when the number of times the normal symbol variable display executed during the occurrence of time-saving state 2 reaches the first time-saving number, time-saving state 2 ends and the normal state begins at the start of the first time-saving number of times of the normal symbol variable display (final normal symbol variable). As a result, the normal state occurs during the execution of the final normal symbol variable. However, for the variable pattern (variation time) related to the final normal symbol variable, information is selected and set based on the game state being time-saving state 2.
Therefore, in this embodiment, when the final normal variation is being performed, the normal state is occurring, but the same effects as when the time-saving state 2 is occurring are executed.
In other words, while time-saving state 2 is occurring, a display is executed in the main effect pattern display area A6 using the second main effect pattern a6 to notify the result of the normal pattern lottery, and in the reserved pattern display areas B1 and B2, a reserved pattern h corresponding to the normal pattern lottery (normal pattern game information) is displayed, and various preview effects suggesting the result of the normal pattern lottery are executed, and further, a ``presentation stage B'' is set (hereinafter referred to as ``time-saving state 2 presentation setting'').
In particular, in this embodiment, when the time-saving state 2 ends based on the final normal symbol change (the establishment of the time-saving end condition 1), the time-saving state 2 effect setting is configured to continue until the end of the normal symbol winning game state related to the final normal symbol change. As a result, during the execution of the final normal symbol change, during the stop display of the normal symbol related to the final normal symbol change, and during the occurrence of the normal symbol winning game state related to the final normal symbol change, although the normal state is occurring, the same effect as during the occurrence of the time-saving state 2 is executed. In other words, while the final normal pattern change is being carried out, while the normal pattern related to the final normal pattern change is stopped and displayed, and while the normal pattern winning game state related to the final normal pattern change is occurring, a display is executed in the main effect pattern display area A6 using the second main effect pattern a6 to notify the result of the normal pattern lottery (start judgment) related to the final normal pattern change (a change display based on the change pattern (change time) selected based on the time-saving state 2), and in the pending pattern display area B2 during change, a reserved pattern h corresponding to the final normal pattern change is displayed, and in the reserved pattern display area B1 before change, a reserved pattern h corresponding to the reserved normal pattern lottery (normal pattern game information) is displayed, and various preview effects suggesting the result of the normal pattern lottery (start judgment) related to the final normal pattern change are executed, and further, a ``performance stage B'' is set.

Similarly, as described above, when the number of times the normal symbol variable display is executed during the occurrence of the time-saving state 3 reaches the first time-saving number, the time-saving state 3 ends and the normal state begins at the start of the first time-saving number of times of the normal symbol variable display (final normal symbol variable). As a result, the normal state occurs during the execution of the final normal symbol variable. However, for the variable pattern (variation time) related to the final normal symbol variable, information is selected and set based on the game state being the time-saving state 3.
Therefore, in this embodiment, when the final normal pattern variation is being executed, the normal state is occurring, but the same effects as when the time-saving state 3 is occurring are executed.
In other words, while time-saving state 3 is occurring, a display is executed in the main effect pattern display area A6 using the second main effect pattern a6 to notify the result of the normal pattern lottery, and in the reserved pattern display areas B1 and B2, a reserved pattern h corresponding to the normal pattern lottery (normal pattern game information) is displayed, and various preview effects suggesting the result of the normal pattern lottery are executed, and further, a ``presentation stage C'' is set (hereinafter referred to as ``time-saving state 3 presentation setting'').
In particular, in this embodiment, when the time-saving state 3 is ended based on the final normal symbol change (the establishment of the time-saving end condition 1), the time-saving state 3 effect setting is configured to continue until the end of the normal symbol winning game state related to the final normal symbol change. As a result, during the execution of the final normal symbol change, during the stop display of the normal symbol related to the final normal symbol change, and during the occurrence of the normal symbol winning game state related to the final normal symbol change, although the normal state is occurring, the same effect as during the occurrence of the time-saving state 3 is executed. In other words, while the final normal pattern change is being carried out, while the normal pattern related to the final normal pattern change is stopped and displayed, and while the normal pattern winning game state related to the final normal pattern change is occurring, a display is executed in the main effect pattern display area A6 using the second main effect pattern a6 to notify the result of the normal pattern lottery (start judgment) related to the final normal pattern change (a change display based on the change pattern (change time) selected based on the time-saving state 3), and in the pending pattern display area B2 during change, a reserved pattern h corresponding to the final normal pattern change is displayed, and in the reserved pattern display area B1 before change, a reserved pattern h corresponding to the reserved normal pattern lottery (normal pattern game information) is displayed, and various preview effects suggesting the result of the normal pattern lottery (start judgment) related to the final normal pattern change are executed, and further, a ``performance stage C'' is set.

(About right-hand hit notification)
Next, the right-hit notification executed in the pachinko machine 1 will be described.
In the pachinko machine 1, a right-hit notification is executed during the right-hit period (right-hit state). The right-hit notification is executed constantly (continuously) during the right-hit period. In this embodiment, as the right-hit notification, right-hit designation information is displayed on the right-hit display device, and a right-hit notification image is displayed on the display screen 31a.
The "right-hand hit designation information" is information that designates the right-hand path as the path along which the game ball should be shot.
The "right hit notification image" is an image (information) that instructs (notifies) the player to hit the game ball to the right path.
In this embodiment, a left-hit period (left-hit state) is set in the RAM clear initialization process (step S1-30). Then, if a "small hit" is won based on the special symbol lottery executed during the left-hit period, the left-hit period ends and the right-hit period begins in response to the start of the small hit gaming state. Alternatively, if a "big hit" is won based on the special symbol lottery executed during the left-hit period, the left-hit period ends and the right-hit period begins in response to the start of the big hit gaming state. Alternatively, the left-hit period ends and the right-hit period begins in response to the value of the Yu-time counter being subtracted from "1" to "0."
The right-hand hitting period continues as long as any one of the time-saving states (time-saving states 1 to 3), the small win game state, and the big win game state is occurring. Then, when the time-saving state (time-saving state 2 or time-saving state 3) ends due to consumption of the time-saving number of times (first time-saving number or third time-saving number), the right-hand hitting period ends and the left-hand hitting period begins.
Here, as described above, when the number of times the normal pattern change display is executed during the occurrence of time-saving states 2 and 3 reaches the first time-saving number (when the first time-saving number has been consumed), time-saving states 2 and 3 are ended and the normal state is initiated at the start of the first time-saving number of times the normal pattern change display (final normal pattern change).
However, in this embodiment, since there is a 1/1 probability of winning a "normal symbol" in the normal symbol lottery, a normal symbol winning game state is always generated after the end of the final normal symbol fluctuation. As a result, if the right-hand hitting period is configured to end at the start of the final normal symbol fluctuation in accordance with the start of the normal state, the game ball will be launched to the left path during the occurrence of the normal symbol winning game state related to the final normal symbol fluctuation, which may be disadvantageous to the player.
Therefore, in this embodiment, when the time-saving states 2 and 3 are ended based on the final normal pattern change (the establishment of time-saving end condition 1), the right-hit period (right-hit notification) is configured to continue at least until the normal pattern winning game state related to the final normal pattern change ends.
In particular, if a game ball is detected entering the second starting hole 52 during the occurrence of a normal winning game state related to the final normal pattern variation (if the second special pattern lottery is executed), the right-hit period (right-hit) continues at least until the variable display and stationary display of the second special pattern based on the detection ends. In this case, since a small win game state or a big win game state always occurs based on the second special pattern lottery, the right-hit period (right-hit notification) continues even after the variable display and stationary display of the second special pattern ends.
On the other hand, if the entry of a game ball into the second starting hole 52 is not detected at the end of the normal winning game state relating to the final normal pattern variation (if the second special pattern lottery is not executed), the right-hand hitting period (right-hand hitting) ends and the left-hand hitting period begins in accordance with the end of the normal winning game state.
As described above, in this embodiment, while the final normal pattern change is being executed, while the normal pattern related to the final normal pattern change is stopped and displayed, and while the normal pattern winning game state related to the final normal pattern change is occurring, the right-hit notification will be executed even though it is in the normal state.
As will be described later, the pachinko machine 1 outputs test information (test signals) indicating the internal state. In particular, test signals are output according to the game state and the right-hand hitting period. That is, while each game state (normal state, time-shortened state 1, time-shortened state 2, and time-shortened state 3) is occurring, a test signal specifying the game state is output. Also, during the left-hand hitting period, a test signal specifying that the left-hand hitting period is in progress is output. On the other hand, during the right-hand hitting period, a test signal specifying that the right-hand hitting period is in progress is output.

(Regarding the output of the symbol confirmation count signal)
Next, the symbol determination count signal output from the pachinko machine 1 will be described.
FIG. 50 is a diagram showing the output timing of the symbol determination count signal.
In the pachinko machine 1, the external signal (external information) output to an external device (electronic device such as a hall computer or a data display device) includes a symbol determination count signal (symbol determination count information).
The "pattern determination count signal (pattern determination count information)" is an external signal (external information) regarding the number of times a special pattern lottery (variable display/stop display of special patterns) is performed and the number of times a normal pattern lottery (variable display/stop display of normal patterns) is performed.
A data display device (not shown) capable of displaying information (information related to games and actions) related to the pachinko machine 1 is arranged in the island equipment of the gaming parlor. The data display device is arranged above the pachinko machine 1. The data display device is configured to include a data display unit (not shown).
The data display unit is capable of displaying various information (various information related to games and operations) related to the pachinko machine 1. In this embodiment, various external signals such as a symbol determination count signal are output from the pachinko machine 1 to the data display unit. Then, based on the symbol determination count signal, the data display unit calculates the total number of times (hereinafter referred to as the "number of starts") that the first special symbol lottery (variable display and stationary display of the first special symbol) has been performed and the normal symbol lottery (variable display and stationary display of the normal symbol) has been performed, and the calculated number of starts is displayed on the data display unit.
The symbol determination count signal (symbol determination count information) is input from the main control board 200 to the external terminal board 450 via the payout control board 400. At this time, the payout control board 400 functions as a relay board. In other words, the symbol determination count signal (symbol determination count information) output from the main control board 200 is not used for control processing by the CPU of the payout control board 400.
The external terminal board 450 outputs the pattern determination count signal (pattern determination count information) related to the external signal to the data display device during the period when the pattern determination count signal (pattern determination count information) is being input from the main control board 200. As a result, every time the pattern determination count signal (pattern determination count information) is input from the main control board 200, the pattern determination count signal (pattern determination count information) related to the external signal is output from the external terminal board 450 to the data display device.
In this embodiment, the symbol determination count signal (symbol determination count information) output by the main control board 200 is input to the external terminal board 450 via the payout control board 400. However, the symbol determination count signal (symbol determination count information) output by the main control board 200 may be input to the external terminal board 450 without going through the payout control board 400.

In the pachinko machine 1, during the normal state, the game progresses mainly by executing the first special symbol lottery, and effects based on the results of the first special symbol lottery are executed, whereas during the time-shortened state, the game progresses mainly by executing the normal symbol lottery, and effects based on the results of the normal symbol lottery are executed.
As a result, if the signal for the number of times the pattern was determined (information on the number of times the pattern was determined) were to be output based solely on the execution of the special pattern lottery (the variable display and stop display of the special pattern), the number of starts would not be updated even though the game was in progress during the time-saving state, which could cause the player to feel uncomfortable.
Therefore, in this embodiment, the pattern determination count signal (pattern determination count information) is output based on the execution of the first special pattern lottery (variable display/stop display of the first special pattern) when the normal state is occurring, and is output based on the execution of the normal pattern lottery (variable display/stop display of the normal pattern) when the time-saving state (time-saving state 1 to time-saving state 3) is occurring.
50, during the normal state, a pattern confirmation count signal (pattern confirmation count information) is output each time the variable display of the first special pattern ends (each time the stationary display of the first special pattern starts). On the other hand, during the time-saving state (time-saving state 1 to time-saving state 3), a pattern confirmation count signal (pattern confirmation count information) is output each time the variable display of the normal pattern ends (each time the stationary display of the normal pattern starts). Here, the pattern confirmation count signal (pattern confirmation count information) output each time the variable display of the first special pattern ends, and the pattern confirmation count signal (pattern confirmation count information) output each time the variable display of the normal pattern ends are the same signal (signal output by the same signal line).

Specifically, the CPU 210 determines the current game state at the end of the variable display of the first special symbol (at the start of the stationary display of the first special symbol). If the CPU 210 determines that the current game state is a normal state, it controls so that a symbol determination count signal (symbol determination count information) is output to the external terminal board 450 (data display device) for a predetermined time (128 ms in this embodiment). On the other hand, if the CPU 210 determines that the current game state is not a normal state (time-saving state 1 to time-saving state 3), it controls so that the symbol determination count signal (symbol determination count information) is not output to the external terminal board 450 (data display device).
Furthermore, at the end of the normal symbol variable display (the start of the normal symbol stop display), the CPU 210 determines the game state at the time of execution of the normal symbol win/loss judgment related to the normal symbol variable display. Then, if it determines that the game state at the time of execution of the normal symbol win/loss judgment related to the normal symbol variable display is a time-saving state (time-saving state 1 to time-saving state 3), it controls so that a pattern confirmation count signal (pattern confirmation count information) for a predetermined time (128 [ms] in this embodiment) is output to the external terminal board 450 (data display device). On the other hand, if it determines that the game state at the time of execution of the normal symbol win/loss judgment related to the normal symbol variable display is not a time-saving state (time-saving state 1 to time-saving state 3) (it is a normal state), it controls so that the pattern confirmation count signal (pattern confirmation count information) is not output to the external terminal board 450 (data display device).
As a result, when the normal pattern change display (final normal pattern change) for the first time reduction (in this embodiment, the 100th time) that is executed while time-saving state 2 is occurring is started, time-saving state 2 ends at the start of the final normal pattern change, and the normal state begins. As a result, the normal state occurs while the final normal pattern change is being executed. However, since the start judgment related to the final normal pattern change (normal pattern win/loss judgment, normal pattern stop pattern judgment, normal pattern change pattern judgment, etc.) is executed while time-saving state 2 is occurring, at the end of the final normal pattern change, a pattern confirmation count signal (pattern confirmation count information) is output to the external terminal board 450 (data display device).
Similarly, when the normal symbol variation display (final normal symbol variation) for the first time reduction (in this embodiment, the 33rd time) that is executed during the occurrence of time reduction state 3 is started, time reduction state 3 is ended and the normal state is started at the start of the final normal symbol variation. As a result, the normal state is generated during the execution of the final normal symbol variation. However, since the start judgment related to the final normal symbol variation (normal symbol win/loss judgment, normal symbol stop symbol judgment, normal symbol variation pattern judgment, etc.) is executed during the occurrence of time reduction state 3, at the end of the final normal symbol variation, a symbol determination number signal (symbol determination number information) is output to the external terminal board 450 (data display device).
It should be noted that during the occurrence of a jackpot gaming state, the gaming state becomes the normal state. As a result, during the occurrence of a jackpot gaming state (during the occurrence of the normal state), start judgments (normal symbol win/loss judgment, normal symbol stop symbol judgment, normal symbol variation pattern judgment, etc.) are executed, the normal symbol variation display begins, and if the normal symbol variation display ends during the occurrence of the time-saving state that started after the end of the jackpot gaming state, at the end of the normal symbol variation display, the symbol determination count signal (symbol determination count information) is not output to the external terminal board 450 (data display device).

As described above, in this embodiment, during the normal state, a symbol confirmation count signal (symbol confirmation count information) is output each time the variable display of the first special symbol ends. On the other hand, during the time-saving state (time-saving state 1 to time-saving state 3), a symbol confirmation count signal (symbol confirmation count information) is output each time the variable display of the normal symbol ends.
As a result, the data display section of the data display device displays the total number of starts, which is the number of times the variable display of the first special pattern was executed while the normal state was occurring and the number of times the variable display of the normal pattern was executed while the time-saving state (time-saving state 1 to time-saving state 3) was occurring.
However, with such a configuration, there will be a difference between the number of starts displayed on the data display unit and the value of the Yu-time counter (the number of spins remaining until the value of the Yu-time counter reaches "0"), so there is a risk that the player will not be able to recognize the number of spins remaining until the value of the Yu-time counter reaches "0" based on the number of starts displayed on the data display unit.
Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1, when the normal state is occurring, the display screen 31a is configured to display the number of remaining spins (total number of remaining special chart spins) until the value of the Yu-time counter reaches "0."
This makes it possible to prevent a situation in which the player is unable to recognize the number of spins remaining until the value of the play time counter reaches "0."

In this embodiment, the signal for the number of times the pattern is determined (information on the number of times the pattern is determined) is not output based on the execution of the second special pattern lottery (the variable display/stop display of the second special pattern).
However, the configuration may be such that a pattern determination count signal (pattern determination count information) is output based on the execution of the second special pattern lottery (variable display/stop display of the second special pattern).
For example, in addition to the above configuration, a configuration may be adopted in which the current game state is determined at the end of the variable display of the second special symbol (at the start of the stationary display of the second special symbol). If the current game state is determined to be a normal state, a symbol determination count signal (symbol determination count information) may be output to the external terminal board 450 (data display device), and if the current game state is determined to be not a normal state (time-saving state 1 to time-saving state 3), the symbol determination count signal (symbol determination count information) may not be output to the external terminal board 450 (data display device).

(Regarding control commands)
Next, we will explain the control commands sent from the main control board 200 to the performance control board 300, and the control commands sent and received between the main control board 200 and the payout control board 400.
The main control board 200 and the performance control board 300 are connected to each other via a serial communication harness. Here, communication between the main control board 200 and the performance control board 300 is performed in only one direction, from the main control board 200 to the performance control board 300, and communication from the performance control board 300 to the main control board 200 is not performed.
Each control command sent from the main control board 200 to the performance control board 300 consists of one byte of upper data indicating the type of control command and one byte of lower data indicating the content of the control command.
Then, the main control board 200 transmits a control command consisting of upper and lower data via serial communication to the performance control board 300. When the performance control board 300 receives a control command from the main control board 200, a serial communication reception interrupt occurs, and this interrupt processing causes the control command data to be stored in a specified area of RAM.

In the pachinko machine 1, the control commands sent from the main control board 200 to the performance control board 300 include a special symbol pattern type designation command, a special symbol variation mode designation command, a special symbol variation pattern designation command, a special symbol stop designation command, a regular symbol pattern designation command, a regular symbol variation pattern designation command, a regular symbol stop designation command, a game status designation command, a special symbol reserved number designation command, a regular symbol reserved number designation command, an opening designation command, a round start designation command, a round end designation command, an ending designation command, a V winning designation command, a first look-ahead designation command, a second look-ahead designation command, a third look-ahead designation command, an error designation command, a demo designation command, a setting value designation command, etc.
The special symbol type designation command is a command that designates the type of stopping symbol of the special symbol (one of the types of "miss symbol,""big win symbol 1" to "big win symbol 8," and "small win symbol 1" to "small win symbol 6"). The special symbol type designation command is transmitted when the variable display of the special symbol starts. Here, the special symbol type designation command is defined to correspond to each of the first special symbol (special symbol 1 game information) and the second special symbol (special symbol 2 game information).

The special symbol fluctuation mode designation command is a command that designates the type of fluctuation mode (fluctuation mode number) of the special symbol. The special symbol fluctuation mode designation command designates the fluctuation time associated with the fluctuation mode number by designating the fluctuation mode number. The special symbol fluctuation mode designation command designates the fluctuation time of the first half period (the aspect of the first half period of the fluctuation performance) of the special symbol fluctuation display (fluctuation performance).
In this embodiment, m (plural) types of special symbol fluctuation modes are set, each corresponding to a different fluctuation time. The special symbol fluctuation mode designation command designates one of the m types of fluctuation modes (variation mode numbers) ("variation mode m").
The special symbol variation pattern designation command is a command that designates the type of variation pattern (variation pattern number) of the special symbol. The special symbol variation pattern designation command designates the variation time associated with the variation pattern number by designating the variation pattern number. The special symbol variation pattern designation command designates the variation time of the latter half period (the aspect of the latter half period of the variation performance) of the variation display (variation performance) of the special symbol.
In this embodiment, n (plural) types of special symbol fluctuation patterns are set, each corresponding to a different fluctuation time. The special symbol fluctuation pattern designation command designates one of the n types of fluctuation patterns (variation pattern numbers) ("variation pattern n").
The special pattern variation mode designation command and the special pattern variation pattern designation command are sent when the display of the special pattern variation starts.

The special symbol stop designation command is a command that designates the stop display of a special symbol. The special symbol stop designation command is transmitted when the stop display of a special symbol starts. Here, the special symbol stop designation command is defined to correspond to each of the first special symbol (special symbol 1 game information) and the second special symbol (special symbol 2 game information).
The normal symbol type designation command is a command that designates the type of normal symbol stop pattern ("normal symbol hit pattern 1" to "normal symbol hit pattern 3"). The normal symbol type designation command is sent when the normal symbol variable display starts.
The normal pattern variation pattern designation command is a command that designates the type of normal pattern variation pattern (variation pattern number). The normal pattern variation pattern designation command designates the variation time associated with the variation pattern number by designating the variation pattern number.
The normal symbol stop command is a command that specifies the normal symbol stop display. The normal symbol stop command is sent when the normal symbol stop display starts.
The game state designation command is a command that designates the game state (game state offset value). Here, the "game state offset value" is information that designates the game state. In this embodiment, the game state offset value is set to a numerical value that corresponds to each combination of the value of the time-saving control flag, the value of the previous jackpot pattern flag, and the value of the post-jackpot spin count counter. The game state designation command designates one game state offset value. The game state designation command is sent when the power is turned on, when the special game phase described below is changed, etc.

The special symbol reservation number designation command is a command that designates the reservation number of the first special symbol. In this embodiment, the special symbol reservation number designation command designates that the special symbol 1 reservation number has increased by "1", that the special symbol 1 reservation number has decreased by "1", the special symbol 1 reservation number, etc.
Here, the "number of reserved special symbols 1" refers to the number of reserved notification displays (variable displays and stop displays) of the first special symbol on the special symbol 1 display device. In other words, the number of reserved special symbols 1 refers to the number of reserved special symbol 1 game information for which start determination is reserved.
The special symbol reservation number designation command is sent when the power is turned on, when game information is stored, when the display of the special symbol changes, etc.
The regular reserved number designation command is a command that designates the reserved number of regular patterns. In this embodiment, the special reserved number designation command designates that the regular reserved number has increased by "1", that the regular reserved number has decreased by "1", the regular reserved number, etc.
Here, the "number of reserved normal symbols" refers to the number of reserved normal symbol notification displays (variable display and stop display) on the normal symbol display device. In other words, the number of reserved normal symbols refers to the number of normal symbol game information for which the normal symbol winning/losing judgment is reserved.
The command to specify the number of reserved normal symbols is sent when the power is turned on, when game information is stored, when the display of changing normal symbols begins, etc.

The opening designation command is a command that designates the start of the opening period (the start of a small win gaming state or a big win gaming state). The opening designation command designates the type of small win gaming state or big win gaming state to start (the type of stopped symbol (specifically, any of the types of "small win symbol 1" to "small win symbol 6" and "big win symbol 1" to "big win symbol 8")). The opening designation command is sent at the start of the opening period (at the start of a small win gaming state or a big win gaming state).
The round start designation command is a command that designates the start of a round (small win game or round game). The round start designation command is transmitted at the start of a round (small win game or round game).
The round end designation command is a command that designates the end of a round (small win game or round game). The round end designation command is transmitted at the end of a round (small win game or round game).
The ending designation command is a command that designates the start of an ending period and is transmitted at the start of the ending period.
The V winning designation command is a command that designates the detection of the gaming ball passing through the V area. The V winning designation command is transmitted when the gaming ball passing through the V area is detected.

The first look-ahead designation command is a command that designates the type of special symbol to be stopped (any of the types of "miss symbol,""big win symbol 1" to "big win symbol 8," and "small win symbol 1" to "small win symbol 6"). Here, the first look-ahead designation command is defined to correspond to each of the first special symbol (special symbol 1 game information) and the second special symbol (special symbol 2 game information).
The second look-ahead designation command is a command that designates the content of the special symbol variation mode. Specifically, the second look-ahead designation command designates that the type of variation mode is indefinite ("indefinite value"), or designates one of m types of variation modes (variation mode number) ("variation mode m"). The second look-ahead designation command is transmitted when game information is stored.
The third look-ahead designation command is a command that designates the content of the variation pattern of the special symbol. Specifically, the third look-ahead designation command designates that the type of variation pattern is indefinite ("indefinite value"), or designates one of n types of variation patterns (variation pattern number) ("variation pattern n"). The third look-ahead designation command is transmitted when game information is stored.

The error specification command is a command that specifies the occurrence of various errors. In this embodiment, the error specification command specifies the occurrence of a vibration error, a magnetic error, a radio wave error, or a right-hit error. The error specification command is transmitted when the occurrence of various errors is detected.
The demo designation command is a command that designates the start of a customer waiting state, and is sent when the customer waiting state starts.
The setting value designation command is a command that designates a setting value stored in the setting value area of the RAM 230. The setting value designation command is sent when the RAM is cleared, when power is restored after being turned on, when the setting change state ends, when the setting confirmation state ends, etc.

The main control board 200 and the dispensing control board 400 are connected to each other via a serial communication harness. Communication between the main control board 200 and the dispensing control board 400 is bidirectional. Each control command sent and received between the main control board 200 and the dispensing control board 400 consists of one byte of data.
The main control board 200 then transmits a control command to the dispensing control board 400 via serial communication. When the dispensing control board 400 receives a control command from the main control board 200, a serial communication reception interrupt occurs, and this interrupt processing causes the control command data to be stored in a predetermined area of RAM. The dispensing control board 400 also transmits a control command to the main control board 200 via serial communication. When the main control board 200 receives a control command from the dispensing control board 400, a serial communication reception interrupt occurs, and this interrupt processing causes the control command data to be stored in a predetermined area of RAM 230.

In the pachinko machine 1, a command to specify the number of prize balls, etc. is set as a control command to be sent from the main control board 200 to the payout control board 400.
The prize ball number designation command is a command that designates the number of prize balls to be paid out. In this embodiment, the prize ball number designation command designates the payout of n prize balls (n = 1 to 15). The prize ball number designation command is sent when the payout control board 400 executes the payout operation of the prize balls.
In addition, in the pachinko machine 1, control commands that specify the occurrence and cancellation of a payout error, the occurrence and cancellation of a full tank error, the occurrence and cancellation of a ball jam error, etc. are set as control commands that are transmitted from the payout control board 400 to the main control board 200. Each control command is transmitted when the occurrence and cancellation of various errors is detected.

(Processing executed on the main control board 200)
Next, the processing executed by the main control board 200 will be described.
First, the functions of the hardware configured on the main control board 200 will be described.
When the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 1, the random number generating circuit 203 starts the hardware random number update process.
In the hard random number update process, the values of the first loop counter to the third loop counter are updated by "1" within a predetermined range (in this embodiment, within the range of 0 to 65535) every time one clock is input from the clock generation circuit 202 (in this embodiment, every 0.083 [μs]).
In addition, in the hard random number update process, the value of the fourth loop counter is updated by "1" within a predetermined range (in this embodiment, within the range of 0 to 10006) every time 32 clocks are input from the clock generation circuit 202 (in this embodiment, every 2.666 [μs]).
Then, the winning random number for the normal symbol lottery, the jackpot random number for the first special symbol lottery, the jackpot random number for the second special symbol lottery, and the reach group random number are updated by the hardware random number update process. Note that the hardware random number update process is executed as a function of the random number generation circuit 203 (hardware), and is executed independently of the process executed by the CPU 210 based on software, which will be described later.

Furthermore, when power is applied to the pachinko machine 1, the transmission shift registers of command output ports 1 and 2 begin a control command transmission process that transmits the control commands stored in the FIFO buffer to the performance control board 300 or payout control board 400. Note that the control command transmission process is executed as a function of command output ports 1 and 2 (hardware), and is executed independently of the processing executed by the CPU 210 based on software, as described below.

Next, a game control process executed by the CPU 210 of the main control board 200 based on a program (software) stored in the ROM 220 will be described.
(CPU initialization process)
First, the CPU initialization process executed by the CPU 210 will be described.
FIG. 8 is a flowchart showing the CPU initialization process.
When the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 1, the CPU 210 starts the CPU initialization process shown in Fig. 8. The CPU initialization process is based on a program for controlling the progress of the game. In other words, the CPU initialization process is based on a program stored in the use area m1 (program area) of the ROM 220.

When the CPU initialization process is started, the process first proceeds to step S1-1.
In step S1-1, an initial setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S1-2. In the initial setting process, a startup program is read from the ROM 220, and settings required for executing various processes, such as register settings, are made.
In the initial setting process, the RAM clear signal from the RAM clear switch 207, the detection signal from the setting key switch 208, and the detection signal from the inner frame opening sensor 108 are read.

Specifically, the value set in the reception memory area corresponding to the RAM clear switch 207 is read twice, and based on the results of these two reads, it is determined whether the RAM clear switch 207 is in the ON state. The determination result is then saved as switch information for the RAM clear switch 207. At this time, if it is determined that the ON state is in the ON state, a value indicating that the ON state is in the ON state (in this embodiment, "1") is saved as the switch information; if it is determined that the ON state is not in the ON state, a value indicating that the ON state is not in the ON state (in this embodiment, "0") is saved as the switch information.

The value set in the receiving memory area corresponding to the setting key switch 208 is read twice, and based on the results of these two reads, it is determined whether the setting key switch 208 is in an ON state. The determination result is then saved as switch information for the setting key switch 208. At this time, if it is determined that the ON state is in an ON state, a value indicating that the ON state is in an ON state (in this embodiment, "1") is saved as the switch information; if it is determined that the ON state is not in an ON state, a value indicating that the ON state is not in an ON state (in this embodiment, "0") is saved as the switch information.

Furthermore, the value set in the receiving memory area corresponding to the inner frame open sensor 108 is read twice, and based on the results of these two reads, it is determined whether the inner frame open sensor 108 is in an ON state. If it is determined that the ON state is not occurring, the switch information of the setting key switch 208 is rewritten to a value indicating that the ON state is not occurring (in this embodiment, "0"). On the other hand, if it is determined that the ON state is occurring, the switch information of the setting key switch 208 is not rewritten.

In step S1-2, a wait processing time setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S1-3. In the wait processing time setting process, a predetermined wait processing time (3.1 seconds in this embodiment) is set in a timer counter. This causes the timer counter to start measuring the set wait processing time.
In step S1-3, it is determined whether the wait processing time set in step S1-2 has elapsed. If it is determined that the wait processing time has elapsed (Yes), the process proceeds to step S1-4. If it is determined that the wait processing time has not elapsed (No), the process of step S1-3 is repeated.
In step S1-4, RAM access permission processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S1-5. In the RAM access permission processing, processing required to permit access to the work area of the RAM 230 is executed.
Specifically, in the RAM access permission process, a value corresponding to the access permission is stored as a RAM protect value in the RAM access protection area of the RAM 230. This allows the CPU 210 to access the RAM 230.

In step S1-5, a gaming machine status flag acquisition process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S1-6. In the gaming machine status flag acquisition process, a gaming machine status flag is acquired.
Specifically, in the gaming machine status flag acquisition process, the value (gaming machine status flag) stored in the gaming machine status flag area of the RAM 230 is saved (loaded) into the D register.
In step S1-6, it is determined whether the backup valid flag is normal or not, and if it is determined that the backup valid flag is normal (Yes), it proceeds to step S1-7, and if it is determined that the backup valid flag is not normal (No), it proceeds to step S1-18.
Here, if the value (backup valid flag) stored in the backup valid flag area of RAM 230 is a predetermined valid value, the backup valid flag is determined to be normal, and if the value stored in the backup valid flag area is not the predetermined valid value, the backup valid flag is determined to be abnormal.

In step S1-7, a checksum calculation process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S1-8. In the checksum calculation process, a checksum is calculated based on the backup information.
Specifically, in the checksum calculation process, first, a checksum is calculated based on the information stored in the used area M1 (F000H to F1FFH) of the RAM 230 out of the backup information.
Next, a checksum is calculated based on the information stored in the non-used area M2 (F300H to F3FFH) of the RAM 230 out of the backup information.
In step S1-8, it is determined whether the checksum calculated in step S1-7 is normal or not. If it is determined that the checksum is normal (Yes), the process proceeds to step S1-9. If it is determined that the checksum is not normal (No), the process proceeds to step S1-18.
Here, if both of the following conditions are met: "The checksum value of the used area M1 calculated in step S1-7 matches the checksum value of the used area M1 stored in the checksum area of RAM 230" and "The checksum value of the unused area M2 calculated in step S1-7 matches the checksum value of the unused area M2 stored in the checksum area," the checksum is determined to be normal.
On the other hand, if at least one of the following conditions is not met: "The checksum value of the used area M1 calculated in step S1-7 matches the checksum value of the used area M1 stored in the checksum area of RAM 230" and "The checksum value of the unused area M2 calculated in step S1-7 matches the checksum value of the unused area M2 stored in the checksum area," the checksum is determined to be abnormal.

In step S1-9, a process for setting an area to be cleared when the power is turned on is executed, and the process proceeds to step S1-10. In the process for setting an area to be cleared when the power is turned on, the areas other than the setting value area and the gaming machine status flag area (specifically, the checksum area, the backup valid flag area, the error-related area, the normal game-related area 1, the normal game-related area 2, and the stack area) are set as the range to be cleared (initialized) in the used area M1 of the RAM 230.
In step S1-10, it is determined whether the RAM clear switch 207 is in the ON state. If it is determined that the ON state is not occurring (No), the process proceeds to step S1-11. If it is determined that the ON state is occurring (Yes), the process proceeds to step S1-21.
Here, based on the switch information of the RAM clear switch 207 saved in step S1-1, it is determined whether or not the ON state has occurred for the RAM clear switch 207. At this time, if a value indicating that the ON state has occurred is saved as the switch information, it is determined that the ON state has occurred, and if a value indicating that the ON state has not occurred is saved, it is determined that the ON state has not occurred.

In step S1-11, it is determined whether a playable state has occurred (set), and if it is determined that a playable state has occurred (Yes), the process proceeds to step S1-12, and if it is determined that a playable state has not occurred (No), the process proceeds to step S1-14.
Here, it is determined whether or not a playable state has occurred based on the gaming machine state flag stored in the D register. At this time, if the gaming machine state flag stored in the D register is a value corresponding to the playable state, it is determined that the playable state has occurred, and if the value is not corresponding to the playable state, it is determined that the playable state has not occurred.

In step S1-12, it is determined whether the setting confirmation condition is met, and if it is determined that the setting confirmation condition is met (Yes), it proceeds to step S1-13, and if it is determined that the setting confirmation condition is not met (No), it proceeds to step S1-14.
The "setting confirmation condition" is met when a playable state has occurred, the RAM clear switch 207 is not in the on state, the setting key switch 208 is in the on state, and the inner frame open sensor 108 is in the on state.
Here, in step S1-1, if the inner frame open sensor 108 is not in an ON state, the switch information of the setting key switch 208 is rewritten to a value indicating that the ON state is not occurring. As a result, if the ON state is occurring for both the setting key switch 208 and the inner frame open sensor 108, a value indicating that the ON state is occurring is saved as the switch information of the setting key switch 208. On the other hand, if the ON state is not occurring for at least one of the setting key switch 208 and the inner frame open sensor 108, a value indicating that the ON state is not occurring is saved as the switch information of the setting key switch 208.
Therefore, in step S1-12, it is determined whether or not the setting confirmation condition is met based on the switch information of the setting key switch 208 saved in step S1-1. At this time, if a value indicating that an ON state has occurred is saved as the switch information, it is determined that the setting confirmation condition is met, and if a value indicating that an ON state has not occurred is saved, it is determined that the setting confirmation condition is not met.

In step S1-13, a setting confirmation state setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S1- 14. In the setting confirmation state setting process, a value corresponding to the setting value confirmation state is set as the gaming machine state flag in the D register.
In step S1-14, a process for setting an area to be cleared when the power is restored is executed, and the process proceeds to step S1-15. In the process for setting an area to be cleared when the power is restored, the range to be cleared (initialized) in the used area M1 of the RAM 230 is set to include the set value area, the gaming machine status flag area, the normal game-related area 2, and other areas excluding the stack area (specifically, the checksum area, the backup valid flag area, the error-related area, and the normal game-related area 1).

In step S1-15, initialization processing upon power restoration is executed, and the process proceeds to step S1-16. In the initialization processing upon power restoration, the range set in step S1-14 of the used area M1 of RAM 230 is cleared (initialized).
In step S1-16, a subcommand transmission process upon power recovery is executed, and the process proceeds to step S1-17. In the subcommand transmission process upon power recovery, a subcommand specifying that power has been restored from a power interruption is stored in the subcommand output request buffer of RAM 230.
In step S1-17, a dispensing command transmission process when power is restored is executed, and the process proceeds to step S1-32. In the dispensing command transmission process when power is restored, a dispensing command specifying that power has been restored from a power outage is stored in the dispensing command output request buffer of RAM 230.

In step S1-18, a backup abnormal state setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S1-19. In the backup abnormal state setting process, a value corresponding to the backup abnormal state is set as the gaming machine state flag in the D register.
In step S1-19, an unused area read/write check process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S1-20. In the unused area read/write check process, the unused area M2 of the RAM 230 is cleared (initialized) and a read/write check is executed.
In step S1-20, an abnormality clearing target area setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S1-21. In the abnormality clearing target area setting process, all areas (specifically, the set value area, gaming machine status flag area, checksum area, backup valid flag area, error-related area, normal game-related area 1, normal game-related area 2, and stack area) are set as the range to be cleared (initialized) in the used area M1 of the RAM 230.

In step S1-21, a used area read/write check process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S1-22. In the used area read/write check process, the range of the used area M1 of RAM 230 set in step S1-20 is cleared (initialized) and a read/write check is performed.
Specifically, in the used area read/write check process, all areas of the used area M1 of RAM 230 (specifically, the setting value area, gaming machine status flag area, checksum area, backup valid flag area, error-related area, normal game-related area 1, normal game-related area 2, and stack area) are cleared (initialized).
This sets a predetermined initial value as the value of each counter for the special chart 1 display pattern counter, the special chart 2 display pattern counter, and the regular chart display pattern counter.

In step S1-22, it is determined whether the results of the read/write checks performed in steps S1-19 and S1-21 are normal. If it is determined that the results of the read/write checks are not normal (No), the process proceeds to step S1-23. If it is determined that the results of the read/write checks are normal (Yes), the process proceeds to step S1-24.
In step S1-23, a RAM abnormal state setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S1-28. In the RAM abnormal state setting process, a value corresponding to the RAM abnormal state is set as the gaming machine state flag in the D register.
In step S1-24, it is determined whether the setting confirmation state has occurred (set), and if it is determined that the setting confirmation state has occurred (Yes), it proceeds to step S1-25, and if it is determined that the setting confirmation state has not occurred (No), it proceeds to step S1-26.
Here, it is determined whether or not the setting confirmation state has occurred based on the gaming machine state flag stored in the D register. At this time, if the gaming machine state flag stored in the D register is a value corresponding to the setting confirmation state, it is determined that the setting confirmation state has occurred, and if the value is not corresponding to the setting confirmation state, it is determined that the setting confirmation state has not occurred.
In step S1-25, a game-ready state setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S1-26. In the game-ready state setting process, a value corresponding to the game-ready state is set as the gaming machine state flag in the D register.

In step S1-26, it is determined whether the setting change conditions are met, and if it is determined that the setting change conditions are met (Yes), it proceeds to step S1-27, and if it is determined that the setting change conditions are not met (No), it proceeds to step S1-28.
The "setting change condition" is met when the RAM clear switch 207 is in the on state, the setting key switch 208 is in the on state, and the inner frame open sensor 108 is in the on state.
Here, as described above, when the ON state occurs for both the setting key switch 208 and the inner frame open sensor 108, a value indicating that the ON state has occurred is stored as the switch information for the setting key switch 208. On the other hand, when the ON state has not occurred for at least one of the setting key switch 208 and the inner frame open sensor 108, a value indicating that the ON state has not occurred is stored as the switch information for the setting key switch 208.
Therefore, in step S1-26, it is determined whether or not the setting change conditions are met based on the switch information of the RAM clear switch 207 and the switch information of the setting key switch 208 saved in step S1-1.
At this time, if values indicating that an ON state has occurred are stored for both the switch information of the RAM clear switch 207 and the switch information of the setting key switch 208, it is determined that the setting change condition is met. On the other hand, if a value indicating that an ON state has not occurred is stored for at least one of the switch information of the RAM clear switch 207 and the switch information of the setting key switch 208, it is determined that the setting change condition is not met.

In step S1-27, a setting change state setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S1-28. In the setting change state setting process, a value corresponding to the setting change state is set as the gaming machine state flag in the D register.
In step S1-28, a gaming machine status flag saving process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S1-29. In the gaming machine status flag saving process, the gaming machine status flag set in the D register is saved in the gaming machine status flag area of the RAM 230.
In step S1-29, a RAM clear subcommand transmission process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S1-30. In the RAM clear subcommand transmission process, a subcommand specifying that the RAM has been cleared is stored in the subcommand output request buffer in RAM 230.

In step S1-30, RAM clear initialization processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S1-31. In the RAM clear initialization processing, initial settings are made for the RAM 230. In the RAM clear initialization processing, the range set in step S1-9 within the used area M1 of the RAM 230 is cleared (initialized).
Specifically, in the initialization process when RAM is cleared, all areas of the used area M1 of RAM 230, excluding the setting value area and the gaming machine status flag area (specifically, the checksum area, backup valid flag area, error-related area, normal game-related area 1, normal game-related area 2, and stack area), are cleared (initialized).
This sets a predetermined initial value as the value of each counter for the special chart 1 display pattern counter, the special chart 2 display pattern counter, and the regular chart display pattern counter.
In addition, a predetermined initial value ("600" in this embodiment) is set as the value of the Yu-time counter. Also, a left-hit period (left-hit state) is set. Furthermore, "0" is set in the time-saving control flag area of RAM 230, and the values of each time-saving counter (first time-saving counter, second time-saving counter, third time-saving counter) are set to "0".
In step S1-31, a payout command transmission process when RAM is cleared is executed, and the process proceeds to step S1-32. In the payout command transmission process when RAM is cleared, a payout command specifying that RAM has been cleared is stored in the payout command output request buffer of RAM 230.

In step S1-32, a sub-command setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S1-33. In the sub-command setting process, a power-on gaming machine state designation command that designates the current gaming machine state is stored in the sub-command output request buffer of the RAM 230.
Specifically, in the subcommand setting process, a power-on gaming machine state designation command that specifies the gaming machine state flag (gaming machine state) stored in the gaming machine state flag area of RAM 230 is stored in the subcommand output request buffer of RAM 230.
In step S1-33, a sub-command group setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S1-34. In the sub-command group setting process, the sub-command group is stored in the sub-command output request buffer in the RAM 230.
Here, the group of subcommands includes a subcommand for specifying the phase when power is restored, a subcommand for specifying the game state (game state offset value), a subcommand for specifying the launch position, a subcommand for specifying the stopping pattern of the first special pattern, a subcommand for specifying the stopping pattern of the second special pattern, a subcommand for specifying the number of reserved special patterns 1, a subcommand for specifying the number of reserved special patterns 2, a subcommand for specifying the value of the time-saving counter, a subcommand for specifying the setting value stored in the setting value area of RAM 230, etc.

In step S1-34, an initial display time setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S1-35. In the initial display time setting process, the initial display time of the performance display device 206 is set in the initial display timer.
In step S1-35, an interrupt setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to the main loop process (step S2-1). In the interrupt setting process, the CTC (counter/timer circuit), which is a peripheral device, is initialized.
Specifically, in the interrupt setting process, an interrupt vector register is set, and an interrupt count value (4.0 [ms] in this embodiment) is set in the CTC.

(Main loop processing)
Next, the main loop process executed by the CPU 210 will be described.
FIG. 9 is a flowchart showing the main loop process.
When the CPU initialization process (step S1-35) shown in Fig. 8 is completed, the CPU 210 starts the main loop process shown in Fig. 9. The main loop process is based on a program for controlling the progress of the game. In other words, the main loop process is based on a program stored in the use area m1 (program area) of the ROM 220.
When the main loop process starts, the process first proceeds to step S2-1.
In step S2-1, an interrupt disable process is executed, and then the process proceeds to step S2-2. In the interrupt disable process, an interrupt disable state is set, which disables interrupts from other processes. As a result, while the interrupt disable state is set, execution of the power-off save process, timer interrupt process, and the like, which will be described later, is prohibited.
In step S2-2, an initial value random number update process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S2-3. In the initial value random number update process, the value of a loop counter for generating initial value random numbers is updated.
Here, "initial value random number" refers to a random number used to determine the initial value and end value of software random numbers (winning pattern random number, reach mode random number, special pattern variation pattern random number, normal pattern variation pattern random number, etc.), which are random numbers generated on the program.
That is, the value of the loop counter that generates the soft random number is updated within a preset range from the initial value to the end value. The initial value and end value of the loop counter that generates the soft random number are changed each time the value of the loop counter reaches the end value. At this time, the initial value and end value of the loop counter are determined based on the initial value random number.

In step S2-3, a main command analysis process is executed, and then the process proceeds to step S2-4. In the main command analysis process, the main command received from the dispensing control board 400 (the control command sent from the dispensing control board 400 to the main control board 200) is analyzed, and processing according to the analysis result is executed.
In step S2-4, a subcommand transmission process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S2-5. In the subcommand transmission process, the subcommand stored in the subcommand output request buffer in RAM 230 is output to the transmission data register of output port 205 (command output port 1).
As a result, the sub-commands input to the transmission data register are stored in the FIFO buffer.The sub-commands stored in the FIFO buffer are then transmitted to the performance control board 300 in a predetermined order by the transmission shift register.
In step S2-5, an interrupt permission process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S2-6. In the interrupt permission process, the interrupt prohibition state is released. As a result, the period from when the interrupt permission process in step S2-5 is executed until when the interrupt prohibition process in step S2-1 is executed becomes an interrupt permission period in which the execution of power-off save process, timer interrupt process, etc. is permitted.
In step S2-6, other random number update processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S2-1. In the other random number update processing, software random numbers excluding winning symbol random numbers (specifically, reach mode random numbers, special symbol variation pattern random numbers, normal symbol variation pattern random numbers, etc.) are updated.

(Evacuation process when power is cut off)
Next, the power-off save process executed by the CPU 210 will be described.
FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing the save process when the power is cut off.
The main control board 200 is configured to include a power interruption detection circuit (not shown) that monitors the power supply voltage supplied from the power supply board 600, and outputs a power interruption warning signal to the input port 204 when the power supply voltage falls below a predetermined reference value.
When the CPU 210 receives the power-off warning signal, it starts the power-off save process shown in Figure 10 during the interrupt-permitted period of the main loop process. The power-off save process is based on a program for controlling the progress of the game. In other words, the power-off save process is based on a program stored in the use area m1 (program area) of the ROM 220.
When the power-off save process is started, the process first proceeds to step S3-1.
In step S3-1, a register save process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S3-2. In the register save process, the values of the registers used during the execution of the main loop process are saved in a save area of the RAM 230.
In step S3-2, a power cutoff notice signal is read, and the process proceeds to step S3-3. In the power cutoff notice signal read process, the power cutoff notice signal is read from the power cutoff detection circuit.
Specifically, in the power cutoff warning signal reading process, the value ("1" or "0") set in the reception storage area of the input port 204 corresponding to the power cutoff warning signal is read.
In step S3-3, based on the value read in step S3-2 (the value set in the receiving memory area corresponding to the power cutoff warning signal), it is determined whether or not a power cutoff warning signal has been input from the power cutoff detection circuit.If it is determined that a power cutoff warning signal has been input (Yes), the process proceeds to step S3-4; if it is determined that a power cutoff warning signal has not been input (No), the process proceeds to step S3-13.

In step S3-4, output port stop processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S3-5, in which the output of control signals and control commands by the output ports 205 (output ports 0 to 4) is stopped.
Specifically, the output port stopping process initializes the values of all bits contained in the port registers of the output ports 205 (output ports 0 to 4), thereby stopping the output of control signals and control commands by the output ports 205 (output ports 0 to 4).
In step S3-5, a backup valid flag setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S3-6. In the backup valid flag setting process, a predetermined valid value is saved in the backup valid flag area of the RAM 230.

In step S3-6, a checksum storage process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S3-7. In the checksum storage process, a checksum is calculated and stored.
Specifically, in the checksum saving process, a checksum is first calculated based on the information stored in the used area M1 (F000H to F1FFH) of the RAM 230. The calculated checksum value is then saved in the checksum area of the RAM 230.
Next, a checksum is calculated based on the information stored in the unused area M2 (F300H to F3FFH) of the RAM 230. The calculated checksum value is then saved in the checksum area.
In step S3-7, a RAM access prohibition process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S3-8. In the RAM access prohibition process, a process for prohibiting access to the RAM 230 is executed.
Specifically, in the RAM access prohibition process, a value corresponding to the access prohibition is stored as a RAM protect value in the RAM access protection area of the RAM 230. As a result, access to the RAM 230 by the CPU 210 is prohibited.

In step S3-8, a loop counter setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S3-9. In the loop counter setting process, a predetermined number of times the power cutoff notice signal has been read is set as the value of the loop counter for determining recovery.
In step S3-9, a power cutoff notice signal is read, and the process proceeds to step S3-10. In the power cutoff notice signal read process, the power cutoff notice signal is read from the power cutoff detection circuit.
Specifically, in the power cutoff warning signal reading process, the value ("1" or "0") set in the reception storage area of the input port 204 corresponding to the power cutoff warning signal is read.
In step S3-10, based on the value read in step S3-9 (the value set in the receiving memory area corresponding to the power cutoff warning signal), it is determined whether or not a power cutoff warning signal has been input from the power cutoff detection circuit.If it is determined that a power cutoff warning signal has not been input (No), the process proceeds to step S3-11, and if it is determined that a power cutoff warning signal has been input (Yes), the process proceeds to step S3-8.

In step S3-11, a loop counter update process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S3-12, where "1" is subtracted from the value set in the return determination loop counter.
In step S3-12, it is determined whether the value of the loop counter for determining return is "0" or not. If it is determined that the value of the loop counter for determining return is "0" (Yes), the process proceeds to the CPU initialization process (step S1-1). If it is determined that the value of the loop counter for determining return is not "0" (No), the process proceeds to step S3-9.
In step S3-13, register restoration processing is executed, the series of processing is terminated, and the program returns to the original processing. In the register restoration processing, the register values saved in step S3-1 are restored. After the register restoration processing is completed, the program returns to the main loop processing (the program address indicated by the stack pointer).

(Timer interrupt processing)
Next, the timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 210 will be described.
FIG. 11 is a flowchart showing the timer interrupt process.
The clock generating circuit 202 generates an interrupt request signal at a predetermined interrupt period (4.0 ms in this embodiment).
In response to the generation of an interrupt request signal, the CPU 210 starts the timer interrupt process shown in Figure 11 during the interrupt permission period of the main loop process. The main loop process is based on a program for controlling the progress of the game. In other words, the main loop process is based on a program stored in the use area m1 (program area) of the ROM 220.
When the timer interrupt process is started, the process first proceeds to step S4-1.
In step S4-1, a register save process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S4-2. In the register save process, the values of all registers used during the execution of the main loop process are saved in a save area in RAM 230.
In step S4-2, an interrupt permission process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S4-3. In the interrupt permission process, an interrupt is permitted.

In step S4-3, a dynamic port output process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S4-4, which will be described later.
In step S4-4, port input processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S4-5. In the port input processing, the state of each switch and sensor is acquired.
The RAM 230 is provided with an ON state storage area corresponding to each switch/sensor connected to the input port 204 (input port 0 to input port 3).
In the port input process, it is determined whether or not an ON state has occurred for each switch/sensor connected to the input port 204 (input port 0 to input port 3). Here, "ON state" refers to a state in which a detection signal has changed from a state in which no detection signal is being input (low level) to a state in which a detection signal is being input (high level). At this time, it is determined whether or not the ON state of the switch/sensor has occurred based on the information set in the reception storage area corresponding to each switch/sensor.
When it is determined that an ON state has occurred for each switch/sensor, "1" is set in the ON state storage area corresponding to that switch/sensor. On the other hand, when it is determined that an ON state has not occurred for each switch/sensor, "0" is set in the ON state storage area corresponding to that switch/sensor.
In the following description, the value stored in the ON state storage area corresponding to each switch/sensor is referred to as the "switch bit data" of that switch/sensor.

In step S4-5, a gaming machine status flag acquisition process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S4-6. In the gaming machine status flag acquisition process, the gaming machine status flag stored in the gaming machine status flag area of the RAM 230 is acquired.
In step S4-6, it is determined whether a playable state has occurred (set), and if it is determined that a playable state has not occurred (No), it proceeds to step S4-7, and if it is determined that a playable state has occurred (Yes), it proceeds to step S4-9.
Here, it is determined whether or not a playable state has occurred based on the gaming machine state flag acquired in step S4-5. At this time, if the acquired gaming machine state flag has a value corresponding to the playable state, it is determined that the playable state has occurred, and if the value does not correspond to the playable state, it is determined that the playable state has not occurred.

In step S4-7, it is determined whether an abnormal condition has occurred (set), and if it is determined that an abnormal condition has not occurred (No), the process proceeds to step S4-8, and if it is determined that an abnormal condition has occurred (Yes), the process proceeds to step S4-19.
Here, it is determined whether an abnormal state has occurred based on the gaming machine status flag acquired in step S4-5. At this time, if the acquired gaming machine status flag is a value corresponding to any of the setting abnormal state, RAM abnormal state, and backup abnormal state, it is determined that an abnormal state has occurred. If the acquired gaming machine status flag is not a value corresponding to any of the setting abnormal state, RAM abnormal state, and backup abnormal state, it is determined that an abnormal state has not occurred.

In step S4-8, a setting-related process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S4-19, which will be described later.
In step S4-9, a timer update process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S4-10. In the timer update process, various timers are updated.
Specifically, the timer update process updates the values of various timer counters (special game timer, normal game timer, security timer, etc.).
In step S4-10, an initial value random number updating process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S4-11. The initial value random number updating process in step S4-10 is the same process as the initial value random number updating process in step S2-2.
Specifically, in the initial value random number update process, the value of the loop counter for generating the initial value random number is updated.
In step S4-11, a winning symbol random number update process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S4-12. In the winning symbol random number update process, the value of the loop counter for generating the winning symbol random number among the software random numbers is updated.
In step S4-12, a switch management process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S4-13. In the switch management process, processes (such as obtaining various random numbers) are executed according to the state (whether or not an ON state is detected) of each switch 101, 102, 104, 110. The switch management process will be described later.

In step S4-13, a special game management process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S4-14. In the special game management process, the operation of the special symbol display device (special symbol 1 display device and special symbol 2 display device) and the operation of the special electric device 55a are managed. The special game management process will be described later.
In step S4-14, a normal game management process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S4-15. In the normal game management process, the operation of the normal map display device and the operation of the normal electric accessory 52a are managed. The normal game management process will be described later.
In step S4-15, a state management process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S4-16. In the state management process, various errors (abnormal states) are detected, and settings are made according to the detection results.

In step S4-16, a prize opening switch process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S4-17. In the prize opening switch process, processes (such as updating various counters) are executed according to the state of each switch 101, 102, 103, 105, 106 (whether or not the on state is detected).
In this embodiment, the prize ball control counters include prize ball control counter 1, which stores the number of game balls that have entered the large prize opening 55; prize ball control counter 2, which stores the number of game balls that have entered the left other prize openings 57a to 57c; prize ball control counter 3, which stores the number of game balls that have entered the right other prize opening 56; prize ball control counter 4, which stores the number of game balls that have entered the first start opening 51; and prize ball control counter 5, which stores the number of game balls that have entered the second start opening 52.
In the prize slot switch processing, it is determined whether or not an on state has been detected for each switch 101, 102, 103, 105, and 106, and if it is determined that an on state has been detected, "1" is added to the value of the prize ball control counter 1 to 5 corresponding to that switch.

In step S4-17, a payout control management process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S4-18. In the payout control management process, a payout command is generated based on the value of the prize ball control counter set in step S4-16, and the generated payout command is transmitted.
Specifically, in the payout control management process, first, it is determined whether the value of the prize ball control counter 1 is equal to or greater than "1." If it is determined that the value of the prize ball control counter 1 is equal to or greater than "1," a payout command specifying the payout of a predetermined number of prize balls (11 balls in this embodiment) is generated, and the generated payout command is stored in the payout command output request buffer of RAM 230. As a result, a payout command specifying the payout of the predetermined number of prize balls is transmitted to the payout control board 400. Thereafter, when the payout of the prize balls by the game ball payout device 440 is completed, the payout control board 400 transmits a main command specifying the completion of the payout to the main control board 200. Then, in response to receiving the main command specifying the completion of the payout, "1" is subtracted from the value of the prize ball control counter 1.

Next, it is determined whether the value of the prize ball control counter 2 is "1" or greater. If it is determined that the value of the prize ball control counter 2 is "1" or greater, a payout command specifying the payout of a predetermined number of prize balls (in this embodiment, four [balls]) is generated, and the generated payout command is stored in the payout command output request buffer of RAM 230. As a result, a payout command specifying the payout of a predetermined number of prize balls is sent to the payout control board 400. Thereafter, "1" is subtracted from the value of the prize ball control counter 2 in response to receiving a main command specifying the completion of the payout.

Next, it is determined whether the value of the prize ball control counter 3 is "1" or greater. If it is determined that the value of the prize ball control counter 3 is "1" or greater, a payout command specifying the payout of a predetermined number of prize balls (four balls in this embodiment) is generated, and the generated payout command is stored in the payout command output request buffer of RAM 230. As a result, a payout command specifying the payout of a predetermined number of prize balls is transmitted to the payout control board 400. Thereafter, "1" is subtracted from the value of the prize ball control counter 3 in response to the reception of a main command specifying the completion of the payout.
Next, it is determined whether the value of the prize ball control counter 4 is "1" or greater. If it is determined that the value of the prize ball control counter 4 is "1" or greater, a payout command specifying the payout of a predetermined number of prize balls (in this embodiment, 1 [ball]) is generated, and the generated payout command is stored in the payout command output request buffer of RAM 230. As a result, a payout command specifying the payout of a predetermined number of prize balls is transmitted to the payout control board 400. Thereafter, "1" is subtracted from the value of the prize ball control counter 4 in response to the reception of a main command specifying the completion of the payout.

Next, it is determined whether the value of the prize ball control counter 5 is "1" or greater. If it is determined that the value of the prize ball control counter 5 is "1" or greater, a payout command specifying the payout of a predetermined number of prize balls (in this embodiment, 1 [ball]) is generated, and the generated payout command is stored in the payout command output request buffer of RAM 230. As a result, a payout command specifying the payout of a predetermined number of prize balls is sent to the payout control board 400. Thereafter, "1" is subtracted from the value of the prize ball control counter 5 in response to receiving a main command specifying the completion of the payout.

In step S4-18, a launch position designation management process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S4-19. In the launch position designation management process, processing related to the designation of the launch position is executed.
Specifically, in the launch position designation management process, when there is a change from a state designating the launch of the game ball to the left path (left hit period) to a state designating the launch of the game ball to the right path (right hit period) (such as at the start of a small win game state or a big win game state), the launch position designation flag area of RAM 230 is set to "1", and a subcommand designating the launch of the game ball to the right path is stored in the subcommand output request buffer of RAM 230. As a result, the subcommand designating the launch of the game ball to the right path is sent to the performance control board 300.
On the other hand, when changing from a state specifying the launch of the game ball to the right path (right hitting period) to a state specifying the launch of the game ball to the left path (left hitting period), the launch position designation flag area of RAM 230 is set to "0".

In step S4-19, an external information management process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S4-20. In the external information management process, external information (external signals) to be output to the hall computer (or data display device) is set.
In this embodiment, the external information output from the pachinko machine 1 to an external device (electronic device such as a hall computer or data display device) includes information on the number of times a pattern has been determined, information on the starting port, information on a jackpot, security information, information on the number of payouts from the outlet, information on error occurrence, etc.
The "pattern determination count information" is external information relating to the number of times a special pattern lottery (variable display and stationary display of special patterns) has been performed and the number of times a normal pattern lottery (variable display and stationary display of normal patterns) has been performed. Each time the variable display of the first special pattern ends (each time the stationary display of the first special pattern starts) during the normal state, the CPU 210 outputs an external signal corresponding to the pattern determination count information to the hall computer (or data display device). Also, each time the variable display of the normal pattern that started during the time-saving state (time-saving state 1 to time-saving state 3) ends (each time the stationary display of the normal pattern starts), the CPU 210 outputs an external signal corresponding to the pattern determination count information to the hall computer (or data display device).
The "starting gate information" is external information relating to the entry of game balls into the starting gates 51 and 52. Each time the CPU 210 detects that the detection signal input from the starting gate switches 101 and 102 is turned on, it outputs an external signal corresponding to the starting gate information to the hall computer (or data display device).
The "jackpot information" is external information relating to the occurrence of a jackpot gaming state. Each time a jackpot gaming state occurs, the main control board 200 outputs an external signal corresponding to the jackpot information to the hall computer (or data display device).
The "outlet payout information" is external information relating to the number of game balls discharged from the discharge path (or the number of game balls discharged from the outlet 58). Each time the value of the external information out ball number counter reaches a predetermined value, the CPU 210 outputs an external signal corresponding to the outlet payout number information to the hall computer.
The "security information" is external information indicating that a setting change state, a setting confirmation state, or various errors (abnormalities) are occurring. When the value of the security timer is "1" or greater, the CPU 210 outputs an external signal corresponding to the security information to the hall computer.

In the external information management process, it is determined whether the value of the external information determination count counter has reached a predetermined value (1 [time] in this embodiment). If it is determined that the value of the external information determination count counter has reached the predetermined value, the symbol determination count information (external signal) is stored in the port output request buffer of RAM 230. Then, the predetermined value (1 [time] in this embodiment) is subtracted from the value of the external information determination count counter. As a result, the symbol determination count information (external signal) is output to the hall computer.
Furthermore, the external information management process determines whether the value of the external information start gate ball scoring counter has reached a predetermined value (1 in this embodiment). If it is determined that the value of the external information start gate ball scoring counter has reached the predetermined value, the start gate information (external signal) is stored in the port output request buffer of RAM 230. Then, the predetermined value (1 in this embodiment) is subtracted from the value of the external information start gate ball scoring counter. As a result, the start gate information (external signal) is output to the hall computer.
Furthermore, in the external information management process, it is determined whether the value of the external information jackpot count counter has reached a predetermined value (1 [time] in this embodiment). If it is determined that the value of the external information jackpot count counter has reached the predetermined value, the jackpot information (external signal) is stored in the port output request buffer of RAM 230. Then, the predetermined value (1 [time] in this embodiment) is subtracted from the value of the external information jackpot count counter. As a result, the jackpot information (external signal) is output to the hall computer.
Furthermore, the external information management process determines whether the value of the external information out ball count counter has reached a predetermined value (10 balls in this embodiment). If it is determined that the value of the external information out ball count counter has reached the predetermined value, the out port payout information (external signal) is stored in the port output request buffer of RAM 230. Then, the predetermined value (10 balls in this embodiment) is subtracted from the value of the external information out ball count counter. As a result, the out port payout information (external signal) is output to the hall computer.
In addition, in the external information management process, it is determined whether or not the value (gaming machine status flag) stored in the gaming machine status flag area of the RAM 230 is a value corresponding to a playable status.
If it is determined that the value stored in the gaming machine status flag area does not correspond to a playable status (i.e., it is determined that the value corresponds to a setting change status, a setting confirmation status, a setting abnormal status, a RAM abnormal status, or a backup abnormal status), the security information is stored in the port output request buffer of RAM 230. As a result, the security information (external signal) is output to the hall computer.
Furthermore, the external information management process determines whether the value of the security timer is equal to or greater than "1." If it is determined that the value of the security timer is equal to or greater than "1," the security information is stored in the port output request buffer of RAM 230. This causes the security information (external signal) to be output to the hall computer.

In step S4-20, an LED display setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S4-21. In the LED display setting process, display data to be output to the main display device 60 or the performance display device 206 is set.
The RAM 230 is provided with a common 0 output request buffer (8 bits), a common 1 output request buffer (8 bits), a common 2 output request buffer (8 bits), and a common 3 output request buffer (8 bits).
In the LED display setting process, first, the common 2 output request buffer is cleared (initialized), and then the common 3 output request buffer is cleared (initialized). Specifically, each bit value of the common 2 output request buffer is set to "0", and each bit value of the common 3 output request buffer is set to "0".
Next, the gaming machine status flag stored in the gaming machine status flag area of the RAM 230 is obtained.
Then, if the acquired gaming machine status flag is a value corresponding to a playable state, a normal state display data setting process, which will be described later, is executed. On the other hand, if the acquired gaming machine status flag is a value corresponding to a setting change state, a setting change display data setting process, which will be described later, is executed. On the other hand, if the acquired gaming machine status flag is a value corresponding to a setting confirmation state, a setting confirmation display data setting process, which will be described later, is executed. On the other hand, if the acquired gaming machine status flag is a value corresponding to an abnormal state (setting abnormal state, RAM abnormal state, or backup abnormal state), an abnormal state display data setting process, which will be described later, is executed.

In the normal display data setting process, first, the value of the special chart 1 display pattern counter is obtained, and the display data (8 bits) corresponding to the obtained value of the special chart 1 display pattern counter is set in the common 0 output request buffer.
As a result, the first special symbol is displayed by LED1 to LED8 among the light-emitting elements that make up the main display device 60.
Next, the value of the special chart 2 display pattern counter is obtained, and the display data (8 bits) corresponding to the obtained value of the special chart 2 display pattern counter is set in the common 1 output request buffer.
As a result, the second special symbol is displayed by LED9 to LED16 among the light-emitting elements that make up the main display device 60.
Next, the value of the normal map display pattern counter is acquired, and the display data corresponding to the acquired value of the normal map display pattern counter is set as output data a.

Next, it is determined whether the value set in the special game phase flag area of RAM 230 when a prize is won is a value that specifies one of the special game phases among ``state before opening of first large prize opening,'' ``state controlled to open first large prize opening,'' ``state effective to close first large prize opening,'' ``state waiting for completion of opening of first large prize opening,'' ``state before opening of second large prize opening,'' ``state controlled to open second large prize opening,'' ``state effective to close second large prize opening,'' and ``state waiting for completion of opening of second large prize opening.''
Then, if it is determined that the value set in the special game phase flag area when winning is a value that specifies one of the special game phases among "state before first large prize opening,""state controlled to open first large prize opening,""state enabled to close first large prize opening,""state waiting for completion of opening of first large prize opening,""state before opening second large prize opening,""state controlled to open second large prize opening,""state enabled to close second large prize opening," and "state waiting for completion of opening of second large prize opening," the value set in the special pattern determination flag area of RAM 230 (a value corresponding to the type of jackpot pattern) is obtained, and the display data corresponding to the obtained value is set as output data b.
On the other hand, if it is determined that the value set in the special game phase flag area when winning is not a value that specifies any of the special game phases among ``state before opening of first large prize opening,'' ``state controlled to open first large prize opening,'' ``state effective to close first large prize opening,'' ``state waiting to finish opening first large prize opening,'' ``state before opening second large prize opening,'' ``state controlled to open second large prize opening,'' ``state effective to close second large prize opening,'' and ``state waiting to finish opening second large prize opening,'' output data b is not set.

Next, the value set in the launch position designation flag area of the RAM 230 is obtained, and the display data corresponding to the obtained value is set as the output data c.
Next, the display data (8 bits) obtained by logically ORing the output data a to c is set in the common 2 output request buffer.
As a result, of the light-emitting elements that make up the main display device 60, LEDs 17 and 18 display normal symbols, LEDs 19 to 23 display the number of rounds of play to be executed during the jackpot game state (type of jackpot game state), and LED 24 displays the path (left path or right path) along which the game ball should be shot.
Next, the value of the special chart 1 reserved number counter is obtained, and the display data corresponding to the obtained value is set as output data d.
Next, the value of the special chart 2 reserved number counter is obtained, and the display data corresponding to the obtained value is set as output data e.
Next, the value of the normal map reservation number counter is obtained, and the display data corresponding to the obtained value is set as output data f.

Next, it is determined whether the power supply has been restored.
If it is determined that the power supply has been restored, the value set in the time-shortening control flag area is acquired, and the display data corresponding to the acquired value is set as output data g.
On the other hand, if it is determined that the power supply has not been restored, the output data g is not set.
Next, the value set in the time-shortening control flag area of the RAM 230 is obtained, and the display data corresponding to the obtained value is set as the output data h.
Next, the display data (8 bits) obtained by logically ORing the output data d to h is set in the common 3 output request buffer.
As a result, of the light-emitting elements that make up the main display device 60, LEDs 25 and 26 display the number of reserved special chart 1, LEDs 27 and 28 display the number of reserved special chart 2, LEDs 29 and 30 display the number of reserved regular charts, LED 31 displays the game status when power is restored (time-saving control is in progress or stopped), and LED 32 displays the current game status (time-saving control is in progress or stopped).

In the display data setting process when the setting is changed, information indicating that a setting change state is occurring is set in the common 0 output request buffer to the common 2 output request buffer, and information indicating the setting value stored in the setting value area of RAM 230 is set in the common 3 output request buffer.
Specifically, the display data (8 bits) of "r" is set in the common 0 output request buffer, the display data (8 bits) of "n." is set in the common 1 output request buffer, the display data (8 bits) of "-" is set in the common 2 output request buffer, and the display data corresponding to the setting value stored in the setting value area of RAM 230 is set in the common 3 output request buffer.
As a result, of the light-emitting elements that make up the performance display device 206, LEDs 33 to 40 display the letter "r", LEDs 41 to 48 display the letter "n.", LEDs 49 to 56 display the letter "-", and LEDs 57 to 64 display numbers indicating the set value.

In the display data setting process during setting confirmation, information indicating that the setting confirmation state is occurring is set in the common 0 output request buffer to the common 2 output request buffer, and information indicating the setting value stored in the setting value area of RAM 230 is set in the common 3 output request buffer.
Specifically, the display data (8 bits) for "r" is set in the common 0 output request buffer, the display data (8 bits) for "n." is set in the common 1 output request buffer, and the display data corresponding to the setting value stored in the setting value area of RAM 230 is set in the common 3 output request buffer. Note that no display data is set for the common 2 output request buffer (it remains cleared).
As a result, of the light-emitting elements that make up the performance display device 206, LEDs 33 to 40 display the letter "r," LEDs 41 to 48 display the letter "n," and LEDs 57 to 64 display numbers that indicate the set value. LEDs 49 to 56 are turned off.

In the abnormality display data setting process, information indicating that an abnormal state (setting abnormal state, RAM abnormal state, or backup abnormal state) is occurring is set in the common 0 output request buffer to the common 2 output request buffer, and an error code corresponding to the abnormality that has occurred is set in the common 3 output request buffer.
Specifically, the display data (8 bits) for "E" is set in the common 0 output request buffer, the display data (8 bits) for "r." is set in the common 1 output request buffer, and the display data (error code) corresponding to the abnormal state that has occurred (setting abnormal state, RAM abnormal state, or backup abnormal state) is set in the common 3 output request buffer. Note that no display data is set for the common 2 output request buffer (it remains cleared).
As a result, of the light-emitting elements that make up the performance display device 206, LED33 to LED40 display the letter "E," LED41 to LED48 display the letter "r.", and LED57 to LED64 display numbers indicating an error code. LED49 to LED56 are turned off.

In step S4-21, a solenoid data setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S4-22. In the solenoid data setting process, the control data (drive data) to be output to each of the solenoids 64, 65, 66 is stored (set) in the port output request buffer of the RAM 230.
In step S4-22, a port output process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S4-23. In the port output process, various signals are output to the hall computer, the solenoids 64, 65, 66, and the like.
Specifically, in the port output process, various information (external signals, control signals, etc.) set in the port output request buffer is output to the output port 205 (output port 2, output port 3). As a result, the external signals set in the port output request buffer are output to the hall computer. In addition, the solenoids 64, 65, 66 are driven and controlled based on the drive signals set in the port output request buffer.
In step S4-23, an interrupt disable process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S4-24. In the interrupt disable process, an interrupt disable state is set to disable interrupts from other processes. As a result, while the interrupt disable state is set, execution of the power-off save process, timer interrupt process, and the like, which will be described later, is prohibited.

In step S4-24, a test signal output process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S4-25, in which test information (test signal) is set.
The test signal output process is based on a program for executing test-related processes stipulated in the gaming machine regulations. That is, the test signal output process is based on a program stored in the unused area m2 (program area) of the ROM 220. The test signal output process is called during execution of the timer interrupt process.
Specifically, in the test signal output process, test information (test signal) indicating the internal state (game state, left hit period, right hit period) is stored in the port output request buffer of RAM 230.
In step S4-25, a performance display device control process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S4-26, which will be described later.
In step S4-26, register restoration processing is executed, the series of processing is terminated, and the program returns to the original processing. In the register restoration processing, the register values saved in step S4-1 are restored. After the register restoration processing is completed, the program returns to the main loop processing (the program address indicated by the stack pointer).

(Dynamic port output processing)
Next, the dynamic port output process in step S4-3 will be described.
FIG. 12 is a flowchart showing the dynamic port output process.
When the dynamic port output process is executed in step S4-3, the process first proceeds to step S29-1 as shown in FIG.
In step S29-1, an output data clear process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S29-2. In the output data clear process, the A register is cleared (initialized). Specifically, each bit value of the A register is set to "0".
In step S29-2, a main display device data output process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S29-3. In the main display device data output process, the value of register A (the value cleared in step S29-1) is output to output port 0. This clears (initializes) output port 0, and each data signal ("SEGDATA0" to "SEGDATA7") for controlling the lighting of the main display device 60 goes low.
In step S29-3, a performance display device data output process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S29-4. In the performance display device data output process, the value of register A (the value cleared in step S29-1) is output to output port 4. This clears (initializes) output port 4, and each data signal ("7SEGDATA0" to "7SEGDATA7") for controlling the lighting of the performance display device 206 goes low.

In step S29-4, a common selection process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S29-5. In the common selection process, the value of the common counter is updated.
Specifically, in the common selection process, it is determined whether the value of the common counter has reached its upper limit ("3" in this embodiment). If it is determined that the value of the common counter has not reached the upper limit, "1" is added to the value of the common counter. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the common counter has reached the upper limit, a predetermined initial value ("0" in this embodiment) is set as the value of the common counter.
In step S29-5, a common output process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S29-6. In the common output process, output data corresponding to the value of the common counter is output to output port 1.
Specifically, in the common output process, when the value of the common counter is "0", output data in which "COM0" is at high level and "COM1", "COM2", and "COM3" are at low level is output to output port 1. As a result, "COM0" is selected (output) from among "COM0" to "COM3".
On the other hand, if the value of the common counter is "1", output data in which "COM1" is at high level and "COM0", "COM2", and "COM3" are at low level is output to output port 1. As a result, "COM1" is selected (output) from among "COM0" to "COM3".
On the other hand, if the value of the common counter is "2", output data that sets "COM2" to high level and "COM0", "COM1", and "COM3" to low level is output to output port 1. As a result, "COM2" is selected (output) from among "COM0" to "COM3".
On the other hand, if the value of the common counter is "3", output data in which "COM3" is at high level and "COM0", "COM1", and "COM2" are at low level is output to output port 1. As a result, "COM3" is selected (output) from among "COM0" to "COM3".

In step S29-6, it is determined whether a playable state has occurred (set), and if it is determined that a playable state has occurred (Yes), the process proceeds to step S29-7, and if it is determined that a playable state has not occurred (No), the process proceeds to step S29-11.
Here, it is determined whether or not a playable state has occurred based on the value (gaming machine state flag) stored in the gaming machine state flag area of the RAM 230. At this time, if the value stored in the gaming machine state flag area is a value corresponding to the playable state, it is determined that the playable state has occurred, and if the value is not a value corresponding to the playable state, it is determined that the playable state has not occurred.

In step S29-7, a main display device data acquisition process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S29-8. In the main display device data acquisition process, display data for the main display device 60 is acquired, and the acquired display data is set in the A register.
Specifically, in the main display device data acquisition process, the value of the common counter is first confirmed, and then the display data set in the output request buffer corresponding to the confirmed common counter value from among the common 0 output request buffer to the common 3 output request buffer in RAM 230 is acquired, and the acquired display data is set in register A.
At this time, if the value of the common counter is "0", the display data set in the common 0 output request buffer is acquired, and the acquired display data is set in the A register.
On the other hand, if the value of the common counter is "1", the display data set in the common 1 output request buffer is acquired, and the acquired display data is set in the A register.
On the other hand, if the value of the common counter is "2", the display data set in the common 2 output request buffer is acquired, and the acquired display data is set in the A register.
On the other hand, if the value of the common counter is "3", the display data set in the common 3 output request buffer is acquired, and the acquired display data is set in the A register.
Here, the display data acquired in the main display device data acquisition process is the display data set in the common 0 output request buffer to common 3 output request buffer in the LED display setting process (specifically, the normal display data setting process) in step S4-20 included in the previous timer interrupt process.

In step S29-8, a main display device data output process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S29-9. In the main display device data output process, the display data set in the A register in step S29-7 is output to output port 0.
As a result, data signals ("SEGDATA0" to "SEGDATA7") based on the display data set in the output request buffer (one of the common 0 output request buffer to common 3 output request buffer) are output to the source driver 250a.
That is, the display on the main display device 60 is controlled based on the display data set in the output request buffer (one of the common 0 output request buffer to common 3 output request buffer).

In step S29-9, an interrupt disable process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S29-10. In the interrupt disable process, an interrupt disable state is set, which disables interrupts from other processes. As a result, while the interrupt disable state is set, execution of the power-off save process, timer interrupt process, and the like, which will be described later, is prohibited.
In step S29-10, a performance display device output process is executed, and the series of processes ends, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-4). The performance display device output process will be described later.

In step S29-11, a performance display device data acquisition process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S29-12. In the performance display device data acquisition process, display data for the performance display device 206 is acquired, and the acquired display data is set in the A register.
Specifically, in the performance display device data acquisition process, the value of the common counter is first confirmed, and then the display data set in the output request buffer corresponding to the confirmed common counter value from among the common 0 output request buffer to the common 3 output request buffer in RAM 230 is acquired, and the acquired display data is set in register A.
At this time, if the value of the common counter is "0", the display data set in the common 0 output request buffer is acquired, and the acquired display data is set in the A register.
On the other hand, if the value of the common counter is "1", the display data set in the common 1 output request buffer is acquired, and the acquired display data is set in the A register.
On the other hand, if the value of the common counter is "2", the display data set in the common 2 output request buffer is acquired, and the acquired display data is set in the A register.
On the other hand, if the value of the common counter is "3", the display data set in the common 3 output request buffer is acquired, and the acquired display data is set in the A register.
Here, the display data acquired in the performance display device data acquisition process is the display data set in the common 0 output request buffer to common 3 output request buffer in the LED display setting process of step S4-20 included in the previous timer interrupt process (specifically, the display data setting process when changing settings, the display data setting process when checking settings, or the display data setting process when an abnormality occurs).

In step S29-12, a performance display device data output process is executed, and the series of processes is terminated, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-4). In the performance display device data output process, the display data set in register A in step S29-11 is output to output port 4.
As a result, data signals ("7SEGDATA0" to "7SEGDATA7") based on the display data set in the output request buffer (one of the common 0 output request buffer to common 3 output request buffer) are output to the source driver 250b.
That is, the display of the performance display device 206 is controlled based on the display data set in the output request buffer (one of the common 0 output request buffer to common 3 output request buffer).

(Performance display device output processing)
Next, the performance display device output process in step S29-10 will be described.
FIG. 13 is a flowchart showing the performance display device output process.
The performance display device output process is based on a program for controlling the display of the performance display device 206. In other words, the performance display device output process is based on a program stored in the unused area m2 (program area) of the ROM 220. The performance display device output process is called during execution of the dynamic port output process.
When the performance display device output process is called in step S29-10, the process first proceeds to step S30-1 as shown in FIG.
In step S30-1, a register save process is executed, and then the process proceeds to step S30-2. In the register save process, the values of all registers used during execution of the processing based on the program stored in the usage area m1 are saved to a save area in RAM. In addition, the values of all stack pointers used during execution of the processing based on the program stored in the usage area m1 are saved to a save area in RAM.

In step S30-2, a performance display device data acquisition process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S30-3. In the performance display device data acquisition process, display data for the performance display device 206 is acquired, and the acquired display data is set in the A register.
Specifically, in the performance display device data acquisition process, the value of the common counter is first confirmed, and then the display data set in the area of the identification segment output request buffer and the ratio segment output request buffer in RAM 230 corresponding to the confirmed common counter value is acquired, and the acquired display data is set in register A.
At this time, if the value of the common counter is "0", the display data set in the upper 8 bits of the identification segment output request buffer is obtained, and the obtained display data is set in the A register.
On the other hand, if the value of the common counter is "1", the display data set in the lower 8 bits of the identification segment output request buffer is obtained, and the obtained display data is set in the A register.
On the other hand, if the value of the common counter is "2", the display data set in the upper 8 bits of the ratio segment output request buffer is obtained, and the obtained display data is set in the A register.
On the other hand, if the value of the common counter is "3", the display data set in the lower 8 bits of the ratio segment output request buffer is obtained, and the obtained display data is set in the A register.
Here, the display data acquired in the performance display device data acquisition process is the display data set in the identification segment output request buffer or ratio segment output request buffer in the performance display device control process of step S4-25 included in the previous timer interrupt process.

In step S30-3, a performance display device data output process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S30-4. In the performance display device data output process, the display data set in register A in step S30-2 is output to output port 4.
As a result, data signals ("7SEGDATA0" to "7SEGDATA7") based on the display data set in the output request buffer (the discrimination segment output request buffer or the ratio segment output request buffer) are output to the source driver 250b.
That is, the display of the performance display device 206 is controlled based on the display data set in the output request buffer (the discrimination segment output request buffer or the ratio segment output request buffer).

In step S30-4, a register restoration process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S30-5. In the register restoration process, the register values saved in step S30-1 (register values used during execution of the processing based on the program stored in the usage area m1) and the stack pointer value saved in step S30-1 (stack pointer value used during execution of the processing based on the program stored in the usage area m1) are restored.
In step S30-5, an interrupt permission process is executed, the series of processes is terminated, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-4). In the interrupt permission process, the interrupt prohibition state is released, and the execution of the power-off save process, timer interrupt process, etc. is permitted.

(Settings related processing)
Next, the setting-related processing in step S4-8 will be described.
FIG. 14 is a flowchart showing the setting-related processing.
When the setting-related process is executed in step S4-8, the process first proceeds to step S37-1 as shown in FIG.
In step S37-1, it is determined whether a setting change state has occurred (set), and if it is determined that a setting change state has occurred (Yes), it proceeds to step S37-2, and if it is determined that a setting change state has not occurred (No), it proceeds to step S37-8.
Here, it is determined whether or not a setting change state has occurred based on the value (gaming machine state flag) stored in the gaming machine state flag area of the RAM 230. At this time, if the value stored in the gaming machine state flag area is a value corresponding to the setting change state, it is determined that a setting change state has occurred, and if the value is not a value corresponding to the setting change state, it is determined that a setting change state has not occurred.

In step S37-2, a setting value acquisition process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S30-3. In the setting value acquisition process, the setting values stored in the setting value area of RAM 230 are acquired (loaded), and the acquired setting values are stored in a register.
In step S37-3, it is determined whether the RAM clear switch 207 has been pressed or not. If it is determined that the RAM clear switch 207 has been pressed (Yes), the process proceeds to step S37-4. If it is determined that the RAM clear switch 207 has not been pressed (No), the process proceeds to step S37-5.
Here, if the RAM clear switch 207 is in an on state, it is determined that the RAM clear switch 207 has been pressed, and if the on state is not occurring, it is determined that the RAM clear switch 207 has not been pressed.
In step S37-4, a set value update process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S37-5. In the set value update process, "1" is added to the set value stored in the register.

In step S37-5, it is determined whether the setting value stored in the register is less than a predetermined setting comparison value (in this embodiment, "6"), and if it is determined that the setting value stored in the register is not less than the predetermined setting comparison value (the setting value is greater than or equal to the predetermined setting comparison value) (No), it proceeds to step S37-6, and if it is determined that the setting value stored in the register is less than the predetermined setting comparison value (Yes), it proceeds to step S37-7.
In step S37-6, a set value initialization process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S37-7. In the set value initialization process, the set values stored in the registers are overwritten with predetermined initial values ("0" in this embodiment).
In step S37-7, a set value saving process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S37-8. In the set value saving process, the set values stored in the registers are saved in the set value area of the RAM 230.

In step S37-8, it is determined whether the setting key switch 208 is in the ON state. If it is determined that the setting key switch 208 is not in the ON state (is in the OFF state) (No), the process proceeds to step S37-9. If it is determined that the setting key switch 208 is in the ON state (Yes), the process ends and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-19).
Here, if the setting key switch 208 is in an ON state, it is determined that the setting key switch 208 is in an ON state, and if the ON state is not occurring, it is determined that the setting key switch 208 is not in an ON state.
In step S37-9, a subcommand setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S37-10. In the subcommand setting process, a setting-related end designation command (subcommand) is stored in the subcommand output request buffer in RAM 230.

In step S37-10, a sub-command group setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S37-11. In the sub-command group setting process, the sub-command group is stored in the sub-command output request buffer in RAM 230.
Here, the group of subcommands includes a subcommand for specifying the game state (game state offset value), a subcommand for specifying the launch position, a subcommand for specifying the stopping pattern of the first special pattern, a subcommand for specifying the stopping pattern of the second special pattern, a subcommand for specifying the number of reserved special patterns 1, a subcommand for specifying the number of reserved special patterns 2, a subcommand for specifying the value of the time-saving counter, a subcommand for specifying a setting value stored in the setting value area of RAM 230, etc.
In step S37-11, RAM set processing is executed, the series of processing is terminated, and the process proceeds to the next processing (step S4-19). In the RAM set processing, the gaming machine state is set to a playable state.
Specifically, a value corresponding to a playable state is saved as the value of the gaming machine state flag area of the RAM 230 (gaming machine state flag).

(Switch management process)
Next, the switch management process in step S4-12 will be described.
FIG. 15 is a flowchart showing the switch management process.
When the switch management process is executed in step S4-12, the process first proceeds to step S5-1 as shown in FIG.
In step S5-1, it is determined whether or not the on state of the gate switch 104 has been detected. If it is determined that the on state of the gate switch 104 has been detected (Yes), the process proceeds to step S5-2. If it is determined that the on state of the gate switch 104 has not been detected (No), the process proceeds to step S5-3.
In step S5-2, a normal starting ball detection process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S5-3. The normal starting ball detection process will be described later.

In step S5-3, it is determined whether or not the on state of the special diagram 1 start port switch 101 has been detected, and if it is determined that the on state of the special diagram 1 start port switch 101 has been detected (Yes), it proceeds to step S5-4, and if it is determined that the on state of the special diagram 1 start port switch 101 has not been detected (No), it proceeds to step S5-5.
In step S5-4, a special drawing 1 starting ball detection process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S5-5. The special drawing 1 starting ball detection process will be described later.
In step S5-5, it is determined whether or not the on state of the special chart 2 start port switch 102 has been detected, and if it is determined that the on state of the special chart 2 start port switch 102 has been detected (Yes), the process proceeds to step S5-6, and if it is determined that the on state of the special chart 2 start port switch 102 has not been detected (No), the process proceeds to step S5-7.

In step S5-6, a special drawing 2 starting ball detection process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S5-7. The special drawing 2 starting ball detection process will be described later.
In step S5-7, it is determined whether or not the on state of the V region switch 110 has been detected. If it is determined that the on state of the V region switch 110 has been detected (Yes), the process proceeds to step S5-8. If it is determined that the on state of the V region switch 110 has not been detected (No), the process ends and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-13).
In step S5-8, V-passing detection processing is executed, the series of processing is ended, and the process proceeds to the next processing (step S4-13).
In the V passage detection process, first, it is determined whether or not the V is in a valid period.
Here, the "V valid period" is the period from the start of the first small win game, which is executed during the occurrence of any of the small win game states among "small win pattern 1" to "small win pattern 4", until the effective time (interval time) for closing the large prize opening has elapsed after the end of the first small win game.
If it is determined that the V valid period is in progress, the V winning flag area of RAM 230 is set to "1" and the V winning designation command is stored in the subcommand output request buffer. On the other hand, if it is determined that the V valid period is not in progress, the process is terminated.

(Normal starting ball detection process)
Next, the normal starting ball detection process in step S5-2 will be described.
FIG. 16 is a flowchart showing the normal starting ball detection process.
When the normal starting ball detection process is executed in step S5-2, it first proceeds to step S6-1 as shown in FIG.
In step S6-1, a random number acquisition process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S6-2. In the random number acquisition process, various random numbers (random value values) such as a winning random number, a winning symbol random number, and a random pattern random number are acquired (loaded) from the loop counter corresponding to each lottery.
In step S6-2, it is determined whether the value of the regular map reservation counter is the upper limit (in this embodiment, "4"), and if it is determined that the value of the regular map reservation counter is not the upper limit (No), it proceeds to step S6-3, and if it is determined that the value of the regular map reservation counter is the upper limit (Yes), it terminates the series of processes and proceeds to the next process (step S5-3).
In step S6-3, the normal map reservation counter update process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S6-4. In the normal map reservation counter update process, the value set in the normal map reservation counter is added with "1" and set as a new normal map reservation counter.

In step S6-4, the normal random number saving process is executed, and the series of processes is terminated and the process proceeds to the next process (step S5-3). In the normal random number saving process, the winning random number, the normal winning symbol random number, and the normal variation pattern random number obtained in step S6-1 are stored as normal game information in the normal game information storage area of RAM 230.
The RAM 230 is configured to include a regular game information storage area in which regular game information is stored.
The regular game information storage area is configured to include storage areas 0 to 4 as storage areas capable of storing regular game information.
Memory area 0 stores regular game information currently being played. Meanwhile, memory areas 1 to 4 store regular game information for which regular win/loss judgment is pending. The priority of each memory area is specified to be memory area 1, memory area 2, memory area 3, and memory area 4 (highest to lowest), in descending order of priority. Then, regular game information stored in memory areas 1 to 4 is judged to be regular win/loss in order of priority, starting with the information stored in the memory area with the highest priority.
In addition, in the normal map random number saving process, a normal map reserved number designation command specifying that the normal map reserved number has increased by "1" is stored in the subcommand output request buffer of RAM 230.

(Special Figure 1 Starting ball detection process)
Next, the special chart 1 starting ball detection process in step S5-4 will be explained.
Figure 17 is a flowchart showing the special chart 1 starting ball detection process.
When the special chart 1 starting ball detection process is executed in step S5-4, it first proceeds to step S7-1, as shown in Figure 17.
In step S7-1, a special symbol identification value setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S7-2. In the special symbol identification value setting process, a special symbol identification value corresponding to the first special symbol lottery is set in the special symbol identification value setting area of RAM 230. In addition, "1" is added to the value of the external information starting hole ball entry count counter.
In step S7-2, a reserved number counter address setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S7-3. In the reserved number counter address setting process, the address of the reserved number counter for special drawing 1 is set in the reserved number counter address setting area of RAM 230.
In step S7-3, a special symbol random number acquisition process is executed, and the series of processes is ended, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S5-5). The special symbol random number acquisition process will be described later.

(Special diagram 2 starting ball detection processing)
Next, the special chart 2 starting ball detection process in step S5-6 will be explained.
Figure 18 is a flowchart showing the special chart 2 starting ball detection process.
When the special chart 2 starting ball detection process is executed in step S5-6, it first proceeds to step S8-1, as shown in Figure 18.
In step S8-1, a special symbol identification value setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S8-2. In the special symbol identification value setting process, a special symbol identification value corresponding to the second special symbol lottery is set in the special symbol identification value setting area of RAM 230. Also, "1" is added to the value of the external information starting hole ball entry count counter.
In addition, in the special symbol identification value setting process, it is determined whether or not it is during a right-hit period. If it is determined that it is not during a right-hit period (it is during a left-hit period), "1" is added to the value of the right-hit error counter.
In step S8-2, a special symbol random number acquisition process is executed, and the series of processes is ended, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S5-7). The special symbol random number acquisition process will be described later.

(Special pattern random number acquisition process)
Next, the special symbol random number acquisition process in steps S7-3 and S8-3 will be described.
FIG. 19 is a flowchart showing the special symbol random number acquisition process.
When the special symbol random number acquisition process is executed in steps S7-3 and S8-3, the process first proceeds to step S9-1 as shown in FIG.
In step S9-1, a special symbol identification value acquisition process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S9-2. In the special symbol identification value acquisition process, the special symbol identification value set in the special symbol identification value setting area of the RAM 230 is acquired (loaded).
In step S9-2, a special symbol random number acquisition process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S9-3. In the special symbol random number acquisition process, various random numbers (random value values) such as a jackpot random number, a winning symbol random number, a reach group random number, a reach mode random number, and a special symbol variation pattern random number are acquired (loaded) from the loop counters corresponding to each lottery. At this time, the corresponding loop counter is selected based on the special symbol identification value acquired in step S9-1.
In step S9-3, it is determined whether the special pattern identification value is a value corresponding to the first special pattern lottery, and if it is determined that the special pattern identification value is a value corresponding to the first special pattern lottery (Yes), the process proceeds to step S9-4, and if it is determined that the special pattern identification value is not a value corresponding to the first special pattern lottery (it is a value corresponding to the second special pattern lottery) (No), the process proceeds to step S9-10.
In step S9-4, the special drawing 1 reservation number acquisition process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S9-5. In the special drawing 1 reservation number acquisition process, the special drawing 1 reservation number counter specified by the address set in the reservation number counter address area is acquired (loaded).

In step S9-5, it is determined whether the number of reserved special drawings 1 obtained in step S9-4 is the upper limit (in this embodiment, "4"), and if it is determined that the number of reserved special drawings 1 is not the upper limit (No), the process proceeds to step S9-6, and if it is determined that the number of reserved special drawings 1 is the upper limit (Yes), the series of processes is terminated and the process proceeds to the next process (step S5-5).
In this embodiment, the upper limit of the number of reserved special symbols is set to "0". In other words, there is no reservation for the second special symbol lottery. However, there may be a reservation for the second special symbol lottery.
In step S9-6, a special drawing 1 reserved number counter update process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S9-7. In the special drawing 1 reserved number counter update process, "1" is added to the value of the special drawing 1 reserved number counter.
In step S9-7, a reserved number designation command setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S9-8. In the reserved number designation command setting process, a reserved number designation command specifying that the reserved number of special drawings 1 has increased by "1" is stored in the subcommand output request buffer of RAM 230.

In step S9-8, a special random number saving process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S9-9. In the special random number saving process, the various random numbers acquired in step S9-2 are stored as special game information (special game information 1 or special game information 2) in a special game information storage area (special game information 1 or special game information storage area) of the RAM 230.
The RAM 230 is configured to include a special chart 1 game information storage area in which special chart 1 game information is stored, and a special chart 2 game information storage area in which special chart 2 game information is stored.
The special chart 1 game information storage area is configured to include memory areas 0 to 4 as storage areas capable of storing special chart 1 game information.
Memory area 0 stores special game information for the currently playing game. Meanwhile, memory areas 1 to 4 store special game information for which start determination is pending. The priority of each memory area is specified as follows, from highest to lowest priority: memory area 1, memory area 2, memory area 3, and memory area 4 (highest to lowest). Then, start determination is performed on the special game information for the currently playing game stored in memory areas 1 to 4 in the order of highest priority, starting with the information stored in the memory area with the highest priority.
The special chart 2 game information storage area is configured to include memory area 0 to memory area 1 as storage areas capable of storing special chart 2 game information.
The memory area 0 stores special game information for the game being played. The memory area 1 stores special game information for the game before the start determination is performed.

In the special symbol random number saving process, if the special symbol identification value acquired in step S9-1 is a value corresponding to the first special symbol lottery, the various random numbers acquired in step S9-2 are stored in the special symbol 1 game information storage area as special symbol 1 game information. At this time, the various random numbers acquired in step S9-2 are stored in an empty storage area among storage areas 1 to 4 (the empty storage area with the highest priority).
That is, if the current value of the special drawing 1 reserved number counter is "1", the various random numbers obtained in step S9-2 are stored in memory area 1. On the other hand, if the current value of the special drawing 1 reserved number counter is "2", the various random numbers obtained in step S9-2 are stored in memory area 2. If the current value of the special drawing 1 reserved number counter is "3", the various random numbers obtained in step S9-2 are stored in memory area 3. If the current value of the special drawing 1 reserved number counter is "4", the various random numbers obtained in step S9-2 are stored in memory area 4.
On the other hand, if the special symbol identification value acquired in step S9-1 is a value corresponding to the second special symbol lottery, the various random numbers acquired in step S9-2 are stored in the special symbol 2 game information storage area as special symbol 2 game information. At this time, the various random numbers acquired in step S9-2 are stored in memory area 1.

In step S9-9, a pre-determination process is executed, the series of processes is terminated, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S5-5 or S5-7). In the pre-determination process, various lottery results are pre-determined based on the game information (special game information 1 or special game information 2) (hereinafter referred to as "pre-determination target game information") saved (stored) in the special game information storage area (special game information 1 or special game information storage area) in step S9-8.
In this embodiment, a pre-determination of various lottery results is performed for all game information (special chart 1 game information and special chart 2 game information).
It is also acceptable to configure the system so that advance determination of various lottery results is not performed for game information acquired (stored) during the occurrence of a jackpot game state. Also, it is acceptable to configure the system so that advance determination of various lottery results is not performed for special chart 2 game information acquired (stored) while time-saving control is stopped, and so that advance determination of various lottery results is not performed for special chart 1 game information acquired (stored) while time-saving control is being executed.

In the preliminary determination process, first, a preliminary special drawing hit determination process is executed.
In the advance special symbol hit determination process, the result of the special symbol lottery ("big hit", "small hit", or "miss") is determined (advance special symbol hit determination).
A special symbol big win lottery table in which big win values for the special symbol lottery are registered, and a special symbol small win lottery table in which small win values for the special symbol lottery are registered are stored in the ROM 220. In addition, as the special symbol small win lottery tables, a special symbol small win lottery table corresponding to the special symbol 1 game information and a special symbol small win lottery table corresponding to the special symbol 2 game information are stored.
In the preliminary special chart hit determination process, first, the preliminary special chart big hit determination process is executed.
In the pre-special chart jackpot determination process, a special chart jackpot lottery table is read out. Then, based on the jackpot random number included in the pre-determination target game information and the read special chart jackpot lottery table, it is determined whether or not a "jackpot" has been won (pre-special chart jackpot determination).
At this time, if the jackpot random number included in the pre-determined game information matches the jackpot value registered in the special jackpot lottery table, it is determined that a "jackpot" has been won (the result of the special symbol lottery is determined to be a "jackpot"). On the other hand, if the jackpot random number included in the pre-determined game information does not match the jackpot value registered in the special symbol jackpot lottery table, it is determined that a "jackpot" has not been won.

If the preliminary special chart big win determination process determines that the player has not won a "big win," the preliminary special chart small win determination process is then executed.
In the preliminary special chart small win determination process, a special chart small win lottery table corresponding to the type of pre-determined game information (special chart 1 game information or special chart 2 game information) is read out. Then, based on the jackpot random number included in the pre-determined game information and the read special chart small win lottery table, it is determined whether or not a "small win" has been won (pre-determined special chart small win determination).
At this time, if the jackpot random number included in the pre-determined game information matches the small jackpot value registered in the special symbol small jackpot lottery table, it is determined that a "small jackpot" has been won (the result of the special symbol lottery is determined to be a "small jackpot"). On the other hand, if the jackpot random number included in the pre-determined game information does not match the small jackpot value registered in the special symbol small jackpot lottery table, it is determined that a "small jackpot" has not been won.
If the preliminary special symbol small win determination process determines that the "small win" has not been won, the result of the special symbol lottery is determined to be a "miss."
In this case, as described above, if the reserved type of the game information to be pre-determined is special chart 1 game information, either a "big hit" or a "miss" will be determined (a "small hit" will never be determined).
On the other hand, if the reserved type of the game information to be pre-determined is special chart 2 game information, either a "big hit" or a "small hit" is determined.

In the preliminary determination process, next, a preliminary special symbol determination process is executed. In the preliminary special symbol determination process, the type of the stopping symbol of the special symbol is determined (preliminary special symbol determination).
In the advance special symbol pattern determination process, if the advance special symbol hit determination determines a "jackpot" (winning), the type of "jackpot symbol" is determined (advance special symbol pattern determination).
A jackpot symbol lottery table in which the correspondence between the winning symbol random number and the type of "jackpot symbol" is registered is stored in the ROM 220. In addition, as the jackpot symbol lottery table, a first jackpot symbol lottery table corresponding to the special symbol 1 game information and a second jackpot symbol lottery table corresponding to the special symbol 2 game information are stored.
In the first jackpot symbol lottery table, "jackpot symbol 1" and "jackpot symbol 2" are registered as types of "jackpot symbols." On the other hand, in the second jackpot symbol lottery table, "jackpot symbol 3" to "jackpot symbol 8" are registered as types of "jackpot symbols."
In the process of determining the type of "jackpot symbol," if the pre-determined game information is special game information 1, the first jackpot symbol lottery table is read out. Then, the type of jackpot symbol is determined based on the winning symbol random number included in the pre-determined game information and the read first jackpot symbol lottery table.
On the other hand, if the pre-determined game information is the special game information 2, the second jackpot symbol lottery table is read out, and the type of the jackpot symbol is determined based on the winning symbol random number included in the pre-determined game information and the read second jackpot symbol lottery table.

On the other hand, in the advance special symbol pattern determination process, if the advance special symbol hit determination determines a "small hit" (win), the type of "small hit symbol" is determined (advance special symbol pattern determination).
The ROM 220 stores a small win symbol lottery table in which the correspondence between the winning symbol random number and the type of "small win symbol"("small win symbol 1" to "small win symbol 6") is registered.
In the process of determining the type of the "small win symbol," the small win symbol lottery table is read out, and the type of the small win symbol is determined based on the winning symbol random number included in the pre-determined game information and the read small win symbol lottery table.
On the other hand, in the advance special pattern determination process, if the advance special pattern hit determination determines that the winning symbol is a "miss" (failed), the type of the stopping symbol is determined to be a "missing symbol" (advance special pattern determination).

In the preliminary determination process, next, a first pre-read designation command setting process is executed.
In the first pre-reading designation command setting process, a first pre-reading designation command that designates the type of the stopping pattern determined by the advance special pattern determination is stored in a sub-command output request buffer of RAM 230.

In the preliminary determination process, next, a preliminary special chart variation mode determination process is executed.
In the preliminary special chart fluctuation mode determination process, the fluctuation mode number (type of fluctuation mode) and the fluctuation pattern number (type of fluctuation pattern) are determined.
In the pre-special chart fluctuation mode determination process, if the pre-special chart hit determination determines a "big hit" or a "small hit," the fluctuation mode number (type of fluctuation mode) and the fluctuation pattern number (type of fluctuation pattern) are determined by the pre-winning fluctuation pattern determination process described below.
On the other hand, if the preliminary special drawing hit judgment determines that the winning ticket is a "miss," the fluctuation mode number (type of fluctuation mode) and the fluctuation pattern number (type of fluctuation pattern) are determined by the preliminary fluctuation pattern judgment process for when the ticket is lost, which will be described later.

In the pre-winning fluctuation pattern determination process, first, the fluctuation mode number (type of fluctuation mode) is determined (pre-winning fluctuation mode determination).
The ROM 220 stores a winning variation mode determination table in which the correspondence between reach mode random numbers and variation mode numbers (types of variation modes) is registered.
In addition, as a winning time change mode determination table, a winning time change mode determination table corresponding to each combination of the hold type (special chart 1 game information or special chart 2 game information), game state ("normal state", "time-saving state 1", "time-saving state 2" or "time-saving state 3"), and type of stopped pattern ("jackpot pattern 1" to "jackpot pattern 8" or "small win pattern 1" to "small win pattern 6") is stored.
In each winning fluctuation mode determination table, a fluctuation mode number (type of fluctuation mode) and a winning fluctuation pattern determination table (information specifying the winning fluctuation pattern determination table) are associated with each reach mode random number. As a result, the fluctuation mode number (type of fluctuation mode) and the winning fluctuation pattern determination table are simultaneously selected based on each winning fluctuation mode determination table.
In the preliminary variable mode determination upon winning, first, the hold type of the game information to be pre-determined (special chart 1 game information or special chart 2 game information), the current game state ("normal state", "time-shortened state 1", "time-shortened state 2" or "time-shortened state 3"), and the type of the stopped pattern determined by the preliminary special chart pattern determination are confirmed, and the winning variable mode determination table corresponding to this confirmation result is read out.
Then, based on the reach mode random number included in the pre-determined game information and the read-out winning time fluctuation mode determination table, the fluctuation mode number (type of fluctuation mode) and the winning time fluctuation pattern determination table are determined.
In the pre-variation pattern determination process at the time of winning, the variation pattern number (type of variation pattern) is next determined (pre-variation pattern determination at the time of winning).
The ROM 220 stores a winning variation pattern determination table in which the correspondence between special chart variation pattern random numbers and variation pattern numbers (variation pattern types) is registered.
In addition, as the winning time fluctuation pattern determination table, a plurality of winning time fluctuation pattern determination tables with mutually different contents are stored.
In the preliminary fluctuation pattern determination at the time of winning, first, the winning fluctuation pattern determination table determined by the preliminary fluctuation mode determination at the time of winning is read out.
Then, the variation pattern number (type of variation pattern) is determined based on the special chart variation pattern random number included in the pre-determined game information and the read-out winning variation pattern determination table.

In the pre-variation pattern determination process when losing, first, the type of reach group random number contained in the pre-determined game information ('indefinite value' or 'fixed value') is determined (pre-random number type determination).
In this embodiment, the types of reach group random numbers are defined as "indefinite value" and "fixed value."
An "indeterminate value" is a type of reach group random number in which the fluctuation mode number (type of fluctuation mode) and fluctuation pattern number (type of fluctuation pattern) are not determined when the game information (special chart 1 game information or special chart 2 game information) is acquired (stored), and the fluctuation mode number (type of fluctuation mode) and fluctuation pattern number (type of fluctuation pattern) are determined based on the number of reserved balls at that time when the start judgment (steps S11-6, S11-7, S11-10) based on the game information is executed.
The "fixed value" is a type of reach group random number for which the fluctuation mode number (type of fluctuation mode) and fluctuation pattern number (type of fluctuation pattern) are determined when game information (special chart 1 game information or special chart 2 game information) is acquired (stored).
In this embodiment, the value of the reach group random number is updated within the range of "0" to "10006." Of the "0" to "10006,""0" to "8499" are set as "indefinite values," and "8500" to "10006" are set as "fixed values."
Therefore, in the preliminary random number type determination, if the value of the reach group random number contained in the pre-determined game information is less than "8500", it is determined to be an "indeterminate value", and if it is "8500" or greater, it is determined to be a "fixed value".

In the pre-fluctuating pattern determination process when losing, if the pre-random number type determination determines that the value is "indeterminate," the process proceeds to the next step without performing the pre-reach group determination, pre-fluctuating mode determination when losing, and pre-fluctuating pattern determination when losing, which will be described later.
On the other hand, if the preliminary random number type determination determines that the value is a "fixed value," preliminary reach group determination, preliminary fluctuation mode determination when losing, and preliminary fluctuation pattern determination when losing are performed.

In the preliminary reach group determination, the reach group number (type of reach group) is determined.
The ROM 220 stores a reach group determination table in which correspondence between reach group random numbers and reach group numbers (reach group types) is registered.
Further, as reach group determination tables, a reach group determination table corresponding to an "indefinite value" and a reach group determination table corresponding to a "fixed value" are stored.
In the reach group determination table corresponding to "indefinite values", reach group numbers corresponding to "indefinite values" (hereinafter referred to as "indefinite value reach groups") are registered as reach group numbers. On the other hand, in the reach group determination table corresponding to "fixed values", reach group numbers corresponding to "fixed values" (hereinafter referred to as "fixed value reach groups") are registered as reach group numbers.
In the advance reach group determination, a reach group determination table corresponding to the "fixed value" is read out. Then, the reach group number (the type of reach group) is determined based on the reach group random number included in the advance determination target game information and the read reach group determination table.

In the pre-fluctuating mode determination when the election is lost, the fluctuating mode number (type of fluctuating mode) is determined (pre-fluctuating mode determination when the election is lost).
The ROM 220 stores a loss-time fluctuation mode determination table in which correspondence between reach mode random numbers and fluctuation mode numbers (types of fluctuation modes) is registered.
In addition, as a loss-time fluctuation mode determination table, a loss-time fluctuation mode determination table corresponding to each combination of reach group number, hold type (special chart 1 game information or special chart 2 game information), hold number, and game state ("normal state,""time-saving state 1,""time-saving state 2," or "game state 3") is stored.
In each loss-time fluctuation mode determination table, a fluctuation mode number (type of fluctuation mode) and a loss-time fluctuation pattern determination table (information specifying the loss-time fluctuation pattern determination table) are associated with each reach mode random number. As a result, the fluctuation mode number (type of fluctuation mode) and the loss-time fluctuation pattern determination table are simultaneously selected based on each loss-time fluctuation mode determination table.
In the pre-fluctuating mode determination when a player loses, first, the reach group number determined by the pre-reach group determination, the hold type of the game information to be pre-determined (special chart 1 game information or special chart 2 game information), the number of holds corresponding to the hold type of the game information to be pre-determined, and the current game state ("normal state,""time-shortened state 1,""time-shortened state 2," or "time-shortened state 3") are confirmed, and the pre-fluctuating mode determination table corresponding to the confirmation result is read out.
Then, based on the reach mode random number included in the pre-determined game information and the read-out loss-time fluctuation mode determination table, the fluctuation mode number (type of fluctuation mode) and the loss-time fluctuation pattern determination table are determined.

In the pre-determination of fluctuation pattern when losing the election, the fluctuation pattern number (type of fluctuation pattern) is determined (pre-determination of fluctuation pattern when losing the election).
The ROM 220 stores a fluctuation pattern determination table for when the winner is unsuccessful, in which the correspondence between the special chart fluctuation pattern random number and the fluctuation pattern number (type of fluctuation pattern) is registered.
In addition, as the unsuccessful election fluctuation pattern determination table, a plurality of unsuccessful election fluctuation pattern determination tables with mutually different contents are stored.
In the pre-fluctuating pattern determination at the time of losing, first, the fluctuation pattern determination table at the time of losing determined by the pre-fluctuating mode determination at the time of losing is read out.
Then, the variation pattern number (type of variation pattern) is determined based on the special chart variation pattern random number included in the pre-determined game information and the read-out variation pattern determination table for when the player loses.

In the preliminary determination process, the second and third pre-read designation command setting processes are then executed.
In the second and third look-ahead designation command setting processes, a second look-ahead designation command that specifies the fluctuation mode number determined by the preliminary fluctuation mode determination, and a third look-ahead designation command that specifies the fluctuation pattern number determined by the preliminary fluctuation pattern determination are stored in a subcommand output request buffer in RAM 230.
Specifically, when the pre-winning fluctuation pattern determination process is executed, a second pre-reading designation command specifying the fluctuation mode number determined by the pre-winning fluctuation mode determination, and a third pre-reading designation command specifying the fluctuation pattern number determined by the pre-winning fluctuation pattern determination are stored in the sub-command output request buffer of RAM 230.
On the other hand, when the pre-fluctuating pattern determination process is executed and the pre-random number type determination determines that the value is a "fixed value," a second look-ahead designation command specifying the fluctuation mode number determined by the pre-fluctuating mode determination process when the election is lost, and a third look-ahead designation command specifying the fluctuation pattern number determined by the pre-fluctuating pattern determination process when the election is lost are stored in the subcommand output request buffer of RAM 230.
On the other hand, when a pre-fluctuating pattern determination process is executed when the result of the pre-random number type determination is an "indeterminate value," a second pre-reading designation command specifying an "indeterminate value" and a third pre-reading designation command specifying an "indeterminate value" are stored in the sub-command output request buffer of RAM 230.

In step S9-10, it is determined whether or not special chart 2 is being played. If it is determined that special chart 2 is not being played (No), the process proceeds to step S9-11. If it is determined that special chart 2 is being played (Yes), the process ends and the next process (step S5-7) is performed.
In this embodiment, if a game based on the special chart 2 game information (any of the following games: the changing display of the second special pattern, the stopped display of the second special pattern, the small win game state based on the special chart 2 game information, and the big win game state based on the special chart 2 game information) is not in progress, it is determined that the special chart 2 game is not in progress, and if a game based on the special chart 2 game information (any of the following games: the changing display of the second special pattern, the stopped display of the second special pattern, the small win game state based on the special chart 2 game information, and the big win game state based on the special chart 2 game information) is in progress, it is determined that the special chart 2 game is in progress.
In step S9-11, the special drawing 2 winning information setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S9-8. In the special drawing 2 winning information setting process, information specifying the occurrence of the special drawing 2 winning ("1" in this embodiment) is set in the special drawing 2 winning information setting flag area of the RAM 230.

(Special game management processing)
Next, the special game management process in step S4-13 will be described.
FIG. 20 is a flowchart showing the special game management process.
In this embodiment, the following situations and stages (hereinafter referred to as "special game phases") of a game (hereinafter referred to as "special game") executed based on a special pattern lottery are defined: "state waiting for special pattern change,""state during special pattern change,""state displaying special pattern stopped by special pattern,""state before first large prize opening,""state controlling opening of first large prize opening,""state enabling closure of first large prize opening,""state waiting for opening of first large prize opening to end,""state before opening of second large prize opening,""state controlling opening of second large prize opening,""state enabling closure of second large prize opening," and "state waiting for opening of second large prize opening to end."
Then, in the special game phase flag area of the RAM 230, a value (special game phase flag) corresponding to one of the special game phases "11" is set.
The ROM 220 also stores special game control modules (programs) for controlling (executing) special games, each special game control module corresponding to a special game phase.
In the special game management process, a special game control module corresponding to the value set in the special game phase flag area of the RAM 230 is selected, and processing based on the selected special game control module is executed.

Specifically, when the special game management process is executed in step S4-13, the process first proceeds to step S10-1 as shown in FIG.
In step S10-1, a special game phase acquisition process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S10-2. In the special game phase acquisition process, the value (special game phase) set in the special game phase flag area of the RAM 230 is acquired (loaded).
In step S10-2, a special game control module acquisition process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S10-3. In the special game control module acquisition process, the special game control module corresponding to the value (special game phase) acquired in step S10-1 is read out.
In step S10-3, a special game control module execution process is executed, and the series of processes is ended, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-14). In the special game control module execution process, processing based on the special game control module read in step S10-2 is started.
Specifically, if the value acquired in step S10-1 is a value corresponding to the "special chart change waiting state", the special chart change waiting process described later is started, if it is a value corresponding to the "special chart changing state", the special chart changing process described later is started, if it is a value corresponding to the "special chart stopped pattern display state", the special chart stopped process described later is started, if it is a value corresponding to the "first large prize opening pre-opening state", the first large prize opening pre-opening process described later is started, if it is a value corresponding to the "first large prize opening opening control state", the first large prize opening opening control process described later is started, if it is a value corresponding to the "first large prize opening closure valid state", the first large prize opening closure valid state is started, The large prize opening closure valid process is started, and if the value corresponds to the ``first large prize opening opening end wait state,'' the first large prize opening opening end wait process described below is started, and if the value corresponds to the ``second large prize opening pre-open state,'' the second large prize opening pre-open process described below is started, and if the value corresponds to the ``second large prize opening opening control state,'' the second large prize opening opening control process described below is started, and if the value corresponds to the ``second large prize opening closure valid state,'' the second large prize opening closure valid process described below is started, and if the value corresponds to the ``second large prize opening opening end wait state,'' the second large prize opening opening end wait process described below is started.

(Waiting for special chart changes)
Next, the special chart change waiting process executed in step S10-3 will be described.
FIG. 21 is a flowchart showing the special chart change waiting process.
When the special chart change waiting process is executed in step S10-3, as shown in FIG. 21, the process first proceeds to step S11-1.
In step S11-1, it is determined whether the value of the special drawing 1 reserved number counter is "1" or greater, and if it is determined that the value of the special drawing 1 reserved number counter is "1" or greater (Yes), it proceeds to step S11-2, and if it is determined that the value of the special drawing 1 reserved number counter is not "1" or greater (No), it proceeds to step S11-17.
In step S11-2, the special symbol 1 reserved number update process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S11-3. In the special symbol 1 reserved number update process, a value (in this embodiment, "0") specifying a game based on the special symbol 1 game information is set as the special symbol discrimination flag setting value, and "1" is subtracted from the value of the special symbol 1 reserved number counter.
Here, in this embodiment, start determination is performed for the special chart 1 game information stored in the special chart 1 game information storage area in priority to the special chart 2 game information stored in the special chart 2 game information storage area.
In step S11-3, a reserved number designation command setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S11-4. In the reserved number designation command setting process, a reserved number designation command specifying that the reserved number of special drawings 1 has decreased by "1" is stored in the subcommand output request buffer of RAM 230.

In step S11-4, a special symbol storage area shift process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S11-5. In the special symbol storage area shift process, the storage area in which game information is stored is shifted.
Specifically, when the special symbol discrimination flag setting value is "1", the contents stored in memory area 1 of the special symbol 2 game information storage area are shifted (moved) to memory area 0. Next, the contents stored in memory area 1 of the special symbol 2 game information storage area are cleared (initialized).
On the other hand, if the special symbol discrimination flag setting value is "0", the memory contents of memory area 1 of the special symbol 1 game information memory area are shifted (moved) to memory area 0. Next, the memory contents of memory area 2 of the special symbol 1 game information memory area are shifted to memory area 1 of the special symbol 1 game information memory area. Next, the memory contents of memory area 3 of the special symbol 1 game information memory area are shifted to memory area 2 of the special symbol 1 game information memory area. Next, the memory contents of memory area 4 of the special symbol 1 game information memory area are shifted to memory area 3 of the special symbol 1 game information memory area. Next, the memory contents of memory area 4 of the special symbol 1 game information memory area are cleared (initialized).

In step S11-5, a setting abnormality determination process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S11-6. In the setting abnormality determination process, occurrence of a setting abnormality is monitored.
Specifically, in the setting abnormality determination process, first, the setting value stored in the setting value area of the RAM 230 is obtained, and then it is determined whether the obtained setting value is less than a predetermined setting comparison value ("6" in this embodiment).
If it is determined that the acquired setting value is not less than the predetermined setting comparison value (is equal to or greater than the predetermined setting comparison value), a value corresponding to the setting abnormality state is saved as the value of the gaming machine status flag area (gaming machine status flag) of RAM 230. Also, a subcommand specifying the occurrence of the setting abnormality is stored in the subcommand output request buffer. Then, the process proceeds to the next step (step S11-6).
On the other hand, if it is determined that the acquired setting value is less than the predetermined setting comparison value, the process proceeds to the next step (step S11-6).

In step S11-6, a special symbol winning determination process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S11-7. In the special symbol winning determination process, the result of the special symbol lottery is determined (special symbol winning determination).
In the special chart hit determination process, first, the special chart big hit determination process is executed.
In the special symbol jackpot determination process, first, the value set in the setting value area (setting value) is confirmed, and the special symbol jackpot lottery table corresponding to this confirmation result is read. Then, based on the jackpot random number included in the game information stored in memory area 0 and the read special symbol jackpot lottery table, it is determined whether the result of the special symbol lottery is a "jackpot" (special symbol jackpot determination).
Specifically, if the value of the jackpot random number contained in the game information stored in memory area 0 matches the jackpot value registered in the special pattern jackpot lottery table, the result of the special pattern lottery is judged to be a "jackpot" (winning).
On the other hand, if the value of the jackpot random number included in the game information stored in the memory area 0 does not match the jackpot value registered in the special jackpot lottery table, it is determined that the "jackpot" has not been won.
If the special chart big win determination process determines that the player has not won a "big win," the special chart small win determination process is executed.
In the special symbol small win determination process, a special symbol small win lottery table corresponding to the special symbol discrimination flag setting value is read out. Then, based on the value of the jackpot random number included in the game information stored in the memory area 0 and the read special symbol small win lottery table, it is determined whether the result of the special symbol lottery is a "small win" (special symbol small win determination).
Specifically, if the value of the jackpot random number contained in the game information stored in memory area 0 matches the small jackpot value registered in the special pattern small jackpot lottery table, the result of the special pattern lottery is judged to be a "small jackpot" (winning).
On the other hand, if the value of the jackpot random number included in the game information stored in the memory area 0 does not match the small jackpot value registered in the special chart small jackpot lottery table, it is determined that the "small jackpot" has not been won.
If the special symbol small win determination process determines that the "small win" has not been won, the result of the special symbol lottery is determined to be a "miss."

In step S11-7, a special symbol determination process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S11-8. In the special symbol determination process, the type of the special symbol stopping symbol is determined (special symbol determination).
Specifically, in the special symbol pattern determination process, first, it is determined whether or not the special symbol hit determination has determined that a "jackpot" (winning) has occurred.
Then, if the special symbol hit determination determines that there has been a "jackpot" (a win), the type of "jackpot symbol" is determined.
For this purpose, a jackpot symbol lottery table corresponding to the special symbol discrimination flag setting value is read out, and the type of jackpot symbol is determined based on the winning symbol random number included in the game information stored in the memory area 0 and the read jackpot symbol lottery table.
At this time, as described above, if the game information stored in memory area 0 is special pattern 1 game information, either "jackpot pattern 1" or "jackpot pattern 2" is determined.
On the other hand, if the game information stored in the memory area 0 is special game information, one of "jackpot pattern 3" to "jackpot pattern 8" is determined.
On the other hand, if the special pattern hit judgment determines that there is a "small hit" (winning), the type of "small hit pattern" is determined.
For this purpose, a small win symbol lottery table corresponding to the special symbol discrimination flag setting value is read out, and the type of small win symbol is determined based on the winning symbol random number included in the game information stored in the memory area 0 and the read small win symbol lottery table.
At this time, one of "small win pattern 1" to "small win pattern 6" is determined.
On the other hand, if the special symbol hit judgment results in a "miss" (failure), the type of the stopping symbol is judged to be a "missing symbol."
Next, the symbol information specifying the type of the determined stop symbol is set (stored) in the symbol information storage area of the RAM 230.

In step S11-8, a symbol type designation command setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S11-9. In the symbol type designation command setting process, the special symbol type designation command that specifies the type of stop symbol determined in step S11-7 is stored in the subcommand output request buffer.

In step S11-9, a special symbol stop symbol number determination process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S11-10. In the special symbol stop symbol number determination process, the stop symbol number of the special symbol is determined.
The ROM 220 stores a stop symbol number lottery table in which the correspondence between the value of the winning symbol random number and the stop symbol number (segment data) is registered.
In addition, as the stop pattern number lottery tables, a stop pattern number lottery table at the time of a big win corresponding to a "big win", a stop pattern number lottery table at the time of a small win corresponding to a "small win", and a stop pattern number lottery table at the time of a loss corresponding to a "miss" are stored.
In addition, as lottery tables for the stop pattern number at the time of a jackpot, a lottery table for the stop pattern number at the time of a jackpot corresponding to the first special pattern (special pattern 1 game information) and a lottery table for the stop pattern number at the time of a jackpot corresponding to the second special pattern (special pattern 2 game information) are stored.
In the special symbol stop symbol number determination process, first, the result of the special symbol hit determination is confirmed.
If the special symbol hit determination determines that a "jackpot" (a win) has occurred, the special symbol discrimination flag setting value is checked, and a lottery table for determining the number of symbols to be stopped at a jackpot corresponding to the result of the check is read out.Then, the stop symbol number is determined based on the winning symbol random number included in the game information stored in memory area 0 and the read lottery table for determining the number of symbols to be stopped at a jackpot.
On the other hand, if the special winning judgment determines that a "small win" (winning) has occurred, the stop symbol number lottery table for a small win is read out. Then, the stop symbol number is determined based on the winning symbol random number included in the game information stored in the memory area 0 and the read out stop symbol number lottery table for a small win.
On the other hand, if the special winning judgment results in a "miss" (losing), the lottery table for determining the stop symbol number when the winning symbol is lost is read out. Then, the stop symbol number is determined based on the winning symbol random number included in the game information stored in the memory area 0 and the lottery table for determining the stop symbol number when the winning symbol is lost.
Next, the determined stop symbol number is stored in the stop symbol number storage area of the RAM 230.

In step S11-10, a special symbol variation pattern determination process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S11-11. In the special symbol variation pattern determination process, the variation mode (type of variation pattern) of the special symbol is determined.
Specifically, in the special chart variation pattern determination process, first, the result of the special chart hit determination is confirmed. Then, if the result of the special chart hit determination is a loss ("miss"), the special chart variation mode determination process when the winner is lost, which will be described later, is executed. On the other hand, if the result of the special chart hit determination is a win ("big win" or "small win"), the special chart variation mode determination process when the winner is won, which will be described later, is executed.

In the process of determining the special chart change pattern when losing, first, the type of reach group random number ('undefined value' or 'fixed value') contained in the game information stored in memory area 0 is determined (random number type determination).
In determining the random number type, if the value of the reach group random number contained in the game information stored in memory area 0 is less than "8500", it is determined to be an "indefinite value", and if it is "8500" or greater, it is determined to be a "fixed value".
In the process of determining the special chart change pattern when losing, the reach group number (reach group type) is next determined (reach group determination).
In the reach group determination, if the random number type determination determines a "fixed value," the reach group determination table corresponding to the "fixed value" is read out. On the other hand, if the random number type determination determines an "indefinite value," the reach group determination table corresponding to the "indefinite value" is read out. Then, the reach group number (type of reach group) is determined based on the reach group random number included in the game information stored in memory area 0 and the read reach group determination table.
In the process of determining the special chart fluctuation mode when the winner is defeated, the fluctuation mode number (type of fluctuation mode) is next determined (determination of fluctuation mode when the winner is defeated).
In determining the variable mode when a player loses, the reach group number determined by the reach group determination, the hold type (the type of game information stored in memory area 0), the hold number (the hold number corresponding to the type of game information stored in memory area 0), and the current game status ("normal status,""time-saving status 1," or "time-saving status 2") are confirmed, and the variable mode determination table when a player loses corresponding to the confirmation result is read out.
Then, based on the reach mode random number included in the game information stored in memory area 0 and the read-out loss-time fluctuation mode determination table, the fluctuation mode number (type of fluctuation mode) and the loss-time fluctuation pattern determination table are determined.
In the process of determining the special chart fluctuation pattern when losing, the fluctuation pattern number (type of fluctuation pattern) is next determined (determining the fluctuation pattern when losing).
In the determination of the fluctuation pattern at the time of losing the election, first, the fluctuation pattern determination table at the time of losing the election determined by the fluctuation mode determination at the time of losing the election is read out.
Then, the variation pattern number (type of variation pattern) is determined based on the special chart variation pattern random number included in the game information stored in memory area 0 and the read-out variation pattern determination table when losing.

In the process of determining the special chart variation mode when winning, first, the variation mode number (type of variation mode) is determined (variation mode determination when winning).
In determining the winning variable mode, first, the hold type (type of game information stored in memory area 0), the current game state ("normal state", "time-saving state 1", "time-saving state 2" or "time-saving state 3"), and the type of the stopped pattern determined by the special pattern determination are confirmed, and the winning variable mode determination table corresponding to this confirmation result is read out.
Then, based on the reach mode random number included in the game information stored in memory area 0 and the read-out winning time fluctuation mode determination table, the fluctuation mode number (type of fluctuation mode) and the winning time fluctuation pattern determination table are determined.
In the process of determining the special chart fluctuation mode when winning, the fluctuation pattern number (type of fluctuation pattern) is next determined (decision of fluctuation pattern when winning).
In the winning fluctuation pattern determination, first, the winning fluctuation pattern determination table determined by the winning fluctuation mode determination is read out.
Then, the variation pattern number (type of variation pattern) is determined based on the special chart variation pattern random number contained in the game information stored in memory area 0 and the read-out winning variation pattern determination table.

In step S11-11, a variation pattern command setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S11-12. In the variation pattern command setting process, a special pattern variation pattern designation command that specifies the variation pattern number (variation pattern type) determined in step S11-10 is stored in the subcommand output request buffer.
In step S11-12, a special symbol variation time setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S11-13. In the special symbol variation time setting process, the time for the variation display of the special symbol is set.
Specifically, in the special game variable time setting process, first, the variable time corresponding to the variable pattern number determined in step S11-10 is acquired, and then the acquired variable time is set in the special game timer.

In step S11-13, a special chart variable display data setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S11- 14. In the special chart variable display data setting process, data for controlling the variable display of the special chart display device is set.
Specifically, in the special chart variable display data setting process, first, a predetermined display time is set in the special chart display timer.
Next, if the special symbol discrimination flag setting value is "0", a predetermined initial value is set in the special symbol 1 display symbol counter. As a result, among the predetermined number of segments constituting the special symbol 1 display device, the segment corresponding to the value of the special symbol 1 display symbol counter is controlled to light up.
On the other hand, if the special symbol discrimination flag setting value is "1", a predetermined initial value is set in the special symbol 2 display symbol counter. As a result, among the predetermined number of segments constituting the special symbol 2 display device, the segment corresponding to the value of the special symbol 2 display symbol counter is controlled to light up.

In step S11-14, a game state preliminary setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S11-15. In the game state preliminary setting process, if the result of the special winning judgment is a win (a "big win" or a "small win"), the game state after the end of the big win game state is preliminarily set.
Specifically, in the game state preliminary setting process, first, it is determined whether the result of the special symbol hit determination is a "big hit" or a "small hit". Then, if it is determined that the result of the special symbol hit determination is a "big hit" or a "small hit", a preliminary flag setting process to be described later is executed, and the process moves to the next process (step S11-15). On the other hand, if it is determined that the result of the special symbol hit determination is a "miss", the process moves to the next process (step S11-15) without executing the preliminary flag setting process.
In the preliminary flag setting process, the type of time-shortening state to be started after the end of the big win game state and the number of times of time-shortening are preliminary set.
Specifically, in the preliminary flag setting process, first, the current game state ("normal state,""time-saving state 1,""time-saving state 2," or "time-saving state 3") and the type of stopped symbol ("jackpot symbol 1" to "jackpot symbol 8" or "small jackpot symbol 1" to "small jackpot symbol 6") are confirmed.
Then, when the current game state is the "normal state" and the stopped symbol is the "jackpot symbol 1," a value specifying the "time-shortened state 2"("2" in this embodiment) is set in the preliminary time-shortened control flag area of the RAM 230. Also, the value of the preliminary first time-shortened counter is set to "100," the value of the preliminary second time-shortened counter is set to "1," and the value of the preliminary third time-shortened counter is set to "5."
On the other hand, if the current game state is "time-shortened state 1" to "time-shortened state 3" and the stopped symbol is "jackpot symbol 1," a value specifying "time-shortened state 2"("2" in this embodiment) is set in the preliminary time-shortened control flag area of RAM 230. Also, the value of the preliminary first time-shortened counter is set to "100," the value of the preliminary second time-shortened counter is set to "1," and the value of the preliminary third time-shortened counter is set to "5."
On the other hand, if the current game state is the "normal state" and the stopped symbols are "jackpot symbol 2" to "jackpot symbol 7," a value specifying "time-shortened state 1"("1" in this embodiment) is set in the preliminary time-shortened control flag area of the RAM 230. Also, the value of the preliminary first time-shortened counter is set to "100," the value of the preliminary second time-shortened counter is set to "1," and the value of the preliminary third time-shortened counter is set to "5."
On the other hand, if the current game state is "time-shortened state 1" to "time-shortened state 3" and the stopped symbols are "jackpot symbol 2" to "jackpot symbol 7," a value specifying "time-shortened state 1"("1" in this embodiment) is set in the preliminary time-shortened control flag area of RAM 230. Also, the value of the preliminary first time-shortened counter is set to "100," the value of the preliminary second time-shortened counter is set to "1," and the value of the preliminary third time-shortened counter is set to "5."
On the other hand, if the current game state is the "normal state" and the stopped symbol is the "jackpot symbol 8," a value specifying the "time-shortened state 3"("3" in this embodiment) is set in the preliminary time-shortened control flag area of the RAM 230. Also, the value of the preliminary first time-shortened counter is set to "33," the value of the preliminary second time-shortened counter is set to "1," and the value of the preliminary third time-shortened counter is set to "5."
On the other hand, if the current game state is "time-shortened state 1" to "time-shortened state 3" and the stopped symbol is "jackpot symbol 8," a value specifying "time-shortened state 3"("3" in this embodiment) is set in the preliminary time-shortened control flag area of RAM 230. Also, the value of the preliminary first time-shortened counter is set to "33," the value of the preliminary second time-shortened counter is set to "1," and the value of the preliminary third time-shortened counter is set to "5."
On the other hand, if the current game state is the "normal state" and the stopped symbols are "small win symbol 1" to "small win symbol 5," a value specifying "time-shortened state 1"("1" in this embodiment) is set in the preliminary time-shortened control flag area of the RAM 230. Also, the value of the preliminary first time-shortened counter is set to "100," the value of the preliminary second time-shortened counter is set to "1," and the value of the preliminary third time-shortened counter is set to "5."
On the other hand, if the current game state is "time-shortened state 1" to "time-shortened state 3" and the stopped symbols are "small win symbol 1" to "small win symbol 5," a value specifying "time-shortened state 1"("1" in this embodiment) is set in the preliminary time-shortened control flag area of RAM 230. Also, the value of the preliminary first time-shortened counter is set to "100," the value of the preliminary second time-shortened counter is set to "1," and the value of the preliminary third time-shortened counter is set to "5."
On the other hand, if the current game state is the "normal state" and the stopped symbol is the "small win symbol 6," a value specifying the "time-shortened state 3"("3" in this embodiment) is set in the preliminary time-shortened control flag area of the RAM 230. Also, the value of the preliminary first time-shortened counter is set to "33," the value of the preliminary second time-shortened counter is set to "1," and the value of the preliminary third time-shortened counter is set to "5."
On the other hand, if the current game state is "time-shortened state 1" to "time-shortened state 3" and the stopped symbol is "small win symbol 6," a value specifying "time-shortened state 3"("3" in this embodiment) is set in the preliminary time-shortened control flag area of RAM 230. Also, the value of the preliminary first time-shortened counter is set to "33," the value of the preliminary second time-shortened counter is set to "1," and the value of the preliminary third time-shortened counter is set to "5."

In step S11-15, a number cutoff management process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S11-16. The number cutoff management process will be described later.
In step S11-16, a special game phase update process is executed, the series of processes is ended, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-14). In the special game phase update process, a value corresponding to the "special game phase changing state" is set in the special game phase flag area of the RAM 230.
In step S11-17, it is determined whether or not information specifying the occurrence of a special chart 2 win (in this embodiment, "1") is set in the special chart 2 winning information flag area of RAM 230, and if it is determined that information specifying the occurrence of a special chart 2 win is set ("1" is set) (Yes), the process proceeds to step S11-18, and if it is determined that information specifying the occurrence of a special chart 2 win is not set ("0" is set) (No), the process proceeds to step S11-19.
In step S11-18, the special symbol 2 winning information release process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S11-4. In the special symbol 2 winning information release process, a value (in this embodiment, "1") specifying a game based on the special symbol 2 game information is set as the special symbol discrimination flag setting value, and information (in this embodiment, "0") specifying non-occurrence of the special symbol 2 winning is set in the special symbol 2 winning information setting flag area.
In step S11-19, a customer waiting setting process is executed, and the series of processes is ended, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-14). In the customer waiting setting process, the demo designation command is stored in the subcommand output request buffer of RAM 230.

(Number of cut-off times management processing)
Next, the cut-off number management process executed in step S11-15 will be described.
FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing the number of cutoff management process.
When the cut-off number management process is executed in step S11-15, the process first proceeds to step S28-1 as shown in FIG.
In step S28-1, it is determined whether or not time-saving control (time-saving control 1, time-saving control 2, or time-saving control 3) is in progress, and if it is determined that time-saving control is in progress (Yes), the process proceeds to step S28-2, and if it is determined that time-saving control is not in progress (No), the series of processes is terminated and the process proceeds to the next process (step S11-16).
Here, if the value set in the time-saving control flag area of RAM 230 is "1" to "3", it is determined that time-saving control is in progress, and if the value set in the time-saving control flag area is "0", it is determined that time-saving control is not in progress.
In step S28-2, a third time-saving counter update process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S28-3. In the third time-saving counter update process, "1" is subtracted from the value of the third time-saving counter.
In step S28-3, it is determined whether the value of the third time-saving counter has been updated from "1" to "0" (whether "time-saving termination condition 3" has been met), and if it is determined that the value of the third time-saving counter has not been updated from "1" to "0"("time-saving termination condition 3" has not been met) (No), the process proceeds to step S28-4, and if it is determined that the value of the third time-saving counter has been updated from "1" to "0"("time-saving termination condition 3" has been met) (Yes), the process proceeds to step S28-7.

In step S28-4, it is determined whether or not to start the variable display of the second special symbol, and if it is determined that the variable display of the second special symbol should be started (Yes), the process proceeds to step S28-5, and if it is determined that the variable display of the second special symbol should not be started (the variable display of the first special symbol should be started) (No), the process ends and proceeds to the next process (step S11-16). In this embodiment, if the special symbol discrimination flag setting value = "1", it is determined that the variable display of the second special symbol should be started, and if the special symbol discrimination flag setting value = "0", it is determined that the variable display of the second special symbol should not be started.
In step S28-5, a second time-saving counter update process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S28-6. In the second time-saving counter update process, "1" is subtracted from the value of the second time-saving counter.
In step S28-6, it is determined whether the value of the second time-saving counter has been updated from "1" to "0" (whether "time-saving termination condition 2" has been met), and if it is determined that the value of the second time-saving counter has been updated from "1" to "0"("time-saving termination condition 2" has been met) (Yes), the process proceeds to step S28-7, and if it is determined that the value of the second time-saving counter has not been updated from "1" to "0"("time-saving termination condition 2" has not been met) (No), the process ends and the process proceeds to the next step (step S11-16).

In step S28-7, a time-saving control stop process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S28-8. In the time-saving control stop process, "0" is set in the time-saving control flag area of RAM 230. Also, "0" is set as the value of each time-saving counter (first time-saving counter, second time-saving counter, third time-saving counter). This stops the time-saving control.
In step S28-8, a subcommand setting process is executed, the series of processes is terminated, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S11-16). In the subcommand setting process, a subcommand specifying a change in the game state (stopping the time-saving control) is stored in the subcommand output request buffer of RAM 230.

(Special chart change processing)
Next, the special chart change processing executed in step S10-3 will be described.
FIG. 23 is a flowchart showing the processing during special chart change.
When the special chart change processing is executed in step S10-3, as shown in FIG. 23, the processing first proceeds to step S12-1.
In step S12-1, it is determined whether the value of the special game timer is "0" or not, and if it is determined that the value of the special game timer is "0" (Yes), it proceeds to step S12-2, and if it is determined that the value of the special game timer is not "0" (No), it proceeds to step S12-10.
In step S12-2, a special symbol stop time setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S12-3. In the special symbol stop time setting process, a predetermined stop time is set in the special game timer.

In step S12-3, a special picture stop display data setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S12-4. In the special picture stop display data setting process, data for controlling the stop display of the special picture display device is set.
Specifically, in the special symbol stop display data setting process, the stop symbol number stored in the stop symbol number storage area of RAM 230 is obtained.
Next, if the special symbol discrimination flag setting value is "0", the acquired stop symbol number (data corresponding to the stop symbol number) is set as the value of the special symbol 1 display symbol counter. As a result, among the predetermined number of segments constituting the special symbol 1 display device, the segment corresponding to the set stop symbol number is controlled to light up (stop display).
On the other hand, if the special symbol discrimination flag setting value is "1", the acquired stop symbol number (data corresponding to the stop symbol number) is set as the value of the special symbol 2 display symbol counter. As a result, of the predetermined number of segments constituting the special symbol 2 display device, the segment corresponding to the set stop symbol number is controlled to light up (stop display).

In step S12-4, a stop command setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S12-5. In the stop command setting process, the special drawing stop command is stored in the subcommand output request buffer.
In step S12-5, it is determined whether or not to end the variable display of the first special symbol, and if it is determined that the variable display of the first special symbol should be ended (Yes), the process proceeds to step S12-6, and if it is determined that the variable display of the first special symbol should not be ended (the variable display of the second special symbol should be ended) (No), the process proceeds to step S12-8. In this embodiment, if the special symbol discrimination flag setting value = "0", it is determined that the variable display of the first special symbol should be ended, and if the special symbol discrimination flag setting value = "1", it is determined that the variable display of the first special symbol should not be ended.
In step S12-6, it is determined whether the current game state is the "normal state" or not, and if it is determined that the current game state is the "normal state" (Yes), it proceeds to step S12-7, and if it is determined that the current game state is not the "normal state" (it is in the time-shortened state) (No), it proceeds to step S12-8.
In step S12-7, an external signal setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S12-8. In the external signal setting process, "1" is added to the value of the external information determination number counter.

In step S12-8, the YU-time management process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S12-9. In the YU-time management process, first, "1" is subtracted from the value of the YU-time counter.
Next, it is determined whether the value of the Yu-time counter has been subtracted from "1" to "0". If it is determined that the value of the Yu-time counter has been subtracted from "1" to "0", the value of the first time-saving counter is set to "100", the value of the second time-saving counter is set to "1", the value of the third time-saving counter is set to "1", and "1" is set in the time-saving control flag area of RAM 230. This starts time-saving control 1. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the Yu-time counter has not been subtracted from "1" to "0", the process proceeds to the next process (step S12-9).
In step S12-9, a special game phase update process is executed, the series of processes is ended, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-14). In the special game phase update process, a value corresponding to the "special game stop symbol display state" is set in the special game phase flag area of the RAM 230.

In step S12-10, it is determined whether the value of the special chart display timer is "0" or not, and if it is determined that the value of the special chart display timer is "0" (Yes), it proceeds to step S12-11, and if it is determined that the value of the special chart display timer is not "0" (No), it terminates the series of processes and proceeds to the next process (step S4-14).
In step S12-11, a special chart variable display data update process is executed, the series of processes is terminated, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-14). In the special chart variable display data update process, data for controlling the variable display of the special chart display device is updated.
Specifically, in the special symbol variable display data update process, when the variable display of the first special symbol is being executed, "1" is added to the value of the special symbol 1 display symbol counter. On the other hand, when the variable display of the second special symbol is being executed, "1" is added to the value of the special symbol 2 display symbol counter.

(Processing during special map stop)
Next, the special drawing stop processing executed in step S10-3 will be described.
FIG. 24 is a flowchart showing the processing during special chart stop.
When the special drawing stop processing is executed in step S10-3, it first proceeds to step S13-1 as shown in FIG.
In step S13-1, it is determined whether the value of the special game timer is "0" or not, and if it is determined that the value of the special game timer is "0" (Yes), it proceeds to step S13-2, and if it is determined that the value of the special game timer is not "0" (No), it terminates the series of processes and proceeds to the next process (step S4-14).

In step S13-2, it is determined whether the type of the stopped pattern is a "jackpot pattern," and if it is determined that the type of the stopped pattern is a "jackpot pattern" (Yes), the process proceeds to step S13-3, and if it is determined that the type of the stopped pattern is not a "jackpot pattern" (No), the process proceeds to step S13-8.
In step S13-3, a game status update process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S13-4. In the game status update process, the game status is updated.
Specifically, in the game status update process, the value of the play time counter is set to "0".
In the game status update process, it is next determined whether or not "1" to "3" is set in the time-reduction control flag area of the RAM 230.
Then, when it is determined that "1" to "3" are set in the time-saving control flag area, "0" is set as the value of each time-saving counter (first time-saving counter, second time-saving counter, third time-saving counter), and "0" is set in the time-saving control flag area of RAM 230. As a result, the time-saving control (time-saving control 1, time-saving control 2, or time-saving control 3) is stopped.
On the other hand, if it is determined that "1" to "3" is not set in the time-shortening control flag area ("0" is set), the process proceeds to the next step (step S13-4).
In step S13-4, a special electric role control data setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S13-5. In the special electric role control data setting process, control data for controlling the opening and closing of the special electric role 55a is set.
A second special electric role control table corresponding to each type of "jackpot symbol" is stored in the ROM 220. Each second special electric role control table specifies the opening time, the effective time for closing the large prize opening, the closing time for the large prize opening, the ending time, the number of rounds (number of rounds of play), the number of opening/closing switches corresponding to each round (round of play), and the control data (solenoid control data and control time data) for the special electric role solenoid 65 corresponding to each opening/closing switch.
In the special electric role control data setting process, the second special electric role control table corresponding to the type of "jackpot pattern" determined in step S11-8 is read out, and the read second special electric role control table is set in the special electric role control table area of RAM 230.
Next, the special electric role continuous operation number counter is set to "0".

In step S13-5, an opening time setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S13-6. In the opening time setting process, a predetermined opening time is set in the special game timer by referring to the second special electric role control table set in the special electric role control table area of the RAM 230.
In step S13-6, an opening designation command setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S13-7. In the opening designation command setting process, the opening designation command that specifies the type of "jackpot symbol" determined in step S11-8 is stored in the subcommand output request buffer. Also, a predetermined number (in this embodiment, 1 [time]) is added to the value of the external information jackpot count counter.
In step S13-7, a special game phase update process is executed, and the series of processes is ended, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-14). In the special game phase update process, a value corresponding to the "state before the second large prize opening" is set in the special game phase flag area of the RAM 230.

In step S13-8, it is determined whether the type of the stopped pattern is a "small win pattern" or not, and if it is determined that the type of the stopped pattern is a "small win pattern" (Yes), it proceeds to step S13-9, and if it is determined that the type of the stopped pattern is not a "small win pattern" (it is a "losing pattern") (No), it proceeds to step S13-13.
In step S13-9, a special electric role control data setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S13-10. In the special electric role control data setting process, control data for controlling the opening and closing of the special electric role 55a is set.
A first special electric role control table corresponding to each type of "small win symbol" is stored in the ROM 220. Each first special electric role control table specifies the opening time, the effective time for closing the large prize opening, the closing time for the large prize opening, the ending time, the number of rounds (number of small win games), the number of opening/closing switches corresponding to each round (small win game), the control data (solenoid control data, control time data, etc.) of the special electric role solenoid 65 corresponding to each opening/closing switch, and the control data (solenoid control data and control time data) of the V-region solenoid 66 corresponding to each round (small win game).
In the special electric role control data setting process, the first special electric role control table corresponding to the type of "small winning pattern" determined in step S11-8 is read out, and the read out first special electric role control table is set in the special electric role control table area of RAM 230.
Next, the special electric role continuous operation number counter is set to "0".

In step S13-10, an opening time setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S13-11. In the opening time setting process, a predetermined opening time is set in the special game timer by referring to the first special electric role control table set in the special electric role control table area of the RAM 230.
In step S13-11, an opening designation command setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S13-12. In the opening designation command setting process, the opening designation command that designates the type of "small win symbol" determined in step S11-5 is stored in the subcommand output request buffer.
In step S13-12, a special game phase update process is executed, and the series of processes is ended and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-14). In the special game phase update process, a value corresponding to the "state before the first large prize opening" is set in the special game phase flag area of the RAM 230.

In step S13-13, the special game phase update process is executed, ending the series of processes and moving on to the next process (step S4-14). In the special game phase update process, a value corresponding to the "special game phase change waiting state" is set in the special game phase flag area of RAM 230.

(Processing before opening the first large prize opening)
Next, the pre-opening process for the first large prize opening executed in step S10-3 will be explained.
Figure 25 is a flowchart showing the processing before the first large prize opening is opened.
When the first large prize opening pre-processing is executed in step S10-3, the process first proceeds to step S14-1 as shown in FIG.
In step S14-1, it is determined whether the value of the special game timer is "0" or not, and if it is determined that the value of the special game timer is "0" (Yes), it proceeds to step S14-2, and if it is determined that the value of the special game timer is not "0" (No), it terminates the series of processes and proceeds to the next process (step S4-12).
In step S14-2, a special electric role continuous operation counter update process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S14-3. In the special electric role continuous operation counter update process, "1" is added to the value of the special electric role continuous operation counter.
In step S14-3, a round start command setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S14-4. In the round start command setting process, a round start command that specifies the start of the round corresponding to the value of the special electric role continuous operation number counter is stored in the subcommand output request buffer.

In step S14-4, a special electric role open/close switching count setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S14-5. In the special electric role open/close switching count setting process, the first special electric role control table set in the special electric role control table area of RAM 230 is referenced, and the open/close switching count corresponding to the value of the special electric role continuous operation count counter is read. Then, the read open/close switching count is set in the special electric role open/close switching count counter. Next, the value of the special electric role winning count counter is set to "0".
In step S14-5, a special electric service open/close switching process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S14-6. The special electric service open/close switching process will be described later.
In step S14-6, a special game phase update process is executed, the series of processes is terminated, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-12). In the special game phase update process, a value corresponding to the "first large prize opening control state" is set in the special game phase flag area of the RAM 230.

(First major prize opening control process)
Next, the first big prize opening control process executed in step S10-3 will be described.
FIG. 26 is a flowchart showing the first large prize opening control process.
When the first large prize opening control process is executed in step S10-3, the process first proceeds to step S16-1 as shown in FIG.
In step S16-1, it is determined whether the value of the special game timer is "0" or not, and if it is determined that the value of the special game timer is "0" (Yes), it proceeds to step S16-2, and if it is determined that the value of the special game timer is not "0" (No), it proceeds to step S16-4.
In step S16-2, it is determined whether the value of the special electric service opening/closing switching counter is "0" or not, and if it is determined that the value of the special electric service opening/closing switching counter is not "0" (No), it proceeds to step S16-3, and if it is determined that the value of the special electric service opening/closing switching counter is "0" (Yes), it proceeds to step S16-5.
In step S16-3, a special electric service open/close switching process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S16-4. The special electric service open/close switching process will be described later.
In step S16-4, it is determined whether the value of the special electric winning number counter has reached a predetermined upper limit value (10 [balls] in this embodiment), and if it is determined that the value of the special electric winning number counter has reached the predetermined upper limit value (Yes), it proceeds to step S16-5, and if it is determined that the value of the special electric winning number counter has not reached the predetermined upper limit value (No), it terminates the series of processes and proceeds to the next process (step S4-12).

In step S16-5, the process for ending the control of opening the special prize opening is executed, and the process proceeds to step S16-6. In the process for ending the control of opening the special prize opening, the solenoid control data for stopping the power supply is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 230. This causes the special electric device 55a to be controlled to a closed state.
In step S16-6, a special prize opening closure effective time setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S16-7. In the special prize opening closure effective time setting process, a predetermined special prize opening closure effective time (interval time) is set in the special game timer by referring to the first special electric role control table set in the special electric role control table area of RAM 230.
In step S16-7, a round end command setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S16-8. In the round end command setting process, a round end command that specifies the end of the round (small win game) is stored in the subcommand output request buffer.
In step S16-8, a special game phase update process is executed, the series of processes is terminated, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-12). In the special game phase update process, a value corresponding to the "first big prize opening closure valid state" is set in the special game phase flag area of the RAM 230.

(First major prize gate closure effective processing)
Next, the first big prize opening closing validity process executed in step S10-3 will be described.
Figure 27 is a flowchart showing the first large prize opening closure validity process.
When the first large prize opening closure validity process is executed in step S10-3, the process first proceeds to step S17-1 as shown in FIG.
In step S17-1, it is determined whether the value of the special game timer is "0" or not, and if it is determined that the value of the special game timer is "0" (Yes), it proceeds to step S17-2, and if it is determined that the value of the special game timer is not "0" (No), it terminates the series of processes and proceeds to the next process (step S4-12).
In step S17-2, it is determined whether the value of the special electric role continuous operation counter has reached a specified value, and if it is determined that the value of the special electric role continuous operation counter has reached the specified value (Yes), it proceeds to step S17-3, and if it is determined that the value of the special electric role continuous operation counter has not reached the specified value (No), it proceeds to step S17-9.
Here, the first special electric role control table set in the special electric role control table area of RAM 230 is referenced, and the number of rounds specified in the special electric role control table is obtained as a specified value to make a judgment.
In step S17-3, it is determined whether the value set in the V prize flag area of RAM 230 is "1", and if it is determined that the value set in the V prize flag area is "1" (Yes), it proceeds to step S17-4, and if it is determined that the value set in the V prize flag area is "0" (No), it proceeds to step S17-11.

In step S17-4, a game status update process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S17-5. In the game status update process, the game status is updated.
Specifically, in the game status update process, the value of the play time counter is set to "0".
In the game status update process, it is next determined whether or not "1" to "3" is set in the time-reduction control flag area of the RAM 230.
Then, when it is determined that "1" to "3" are set in the time-saving control flag area, a predetermined initial value ("0" in this embodiment) is set as the value of the time-saving counter (first time-saving counter, second time-saving counter, third time-saving counter), and "0" is set in the time-saving control flag area of RAM 230. This stops the time-saving control.
On the other hand, if it is determined that "1" to "3" is not set in the time-shortening control flag area ("0" is set), the process proceeds to the next step (step S17-5).

In step S17-5, a special electric role control data setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S17-6. In the special electric role control data setting process, control data for controlling the opening and closing of the special electric role 55a is set.
A second special electric role control table corresponding to each type of "small win symbol" is stored in the ROM 220. Each second special electric role control table specifies the opening time, the effective time for closing the large prize opening, the closing time for the large prize opening, the ending time, the number of rounds (number of rounds of play), the number of opening/closing switches corresponding to each round (round of play), and the control data (solenoid control data, control time data, etc.) of the special electric role solenoid 65 corresponding to each opening/closing switch.
In the special electric role control data setting process, the second special electric role control table (for big wins) corresponding to the type of "small win pattern" determined in step S11-5 is read out, and the read second special electric role control table (for big wins) is set in the special electric role control table area of RAM 230.
Next, the special electric role continuous operation number counter is set to "0".

In step S17-6, an opening time setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S17-7. In the opening time setting process, a predetermined opening time is set in the special game timer by referring to the second special electric role control table set in the special electric role control table area of the RAM 230.
In step S17-7, an opening designation command setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S17-8. In the opening designation command setting process, an opening designation command that designates the start of a big win gaming state is stored in the subcommand output request buffer.
In step S17-8, a special game phase update process is executed, the series of processes is terminated, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-12). In the special game phase update process, a value corresponding to the "state before the second large prize opening" is set in the special game phase flag area of the RAM 230.

In step S17-9, a special prize opening closing time setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S17-10. In the special prize opening closing time setting process, a predetermined special prize opening closing time is set in the special game timer by referring to the first special electric role control table set in the special electric role control table area of the RAM 230.
In step S17-10, a special game phase update process is executed, the series of processes is terminated, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-12). In the special game phase update process, a value corresponding to the "state before the first large prize opening" is set in the special game phase flag area of the RAM 230.

In step S17-11, an ending time setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S17-12. In the ending time setting process, a predetermined ending time is set in the special game timer by referring to the first special electric role control table set in the special electric role control table area of the RAM 230.
In step S17-12, an ending designation command setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S17-13. In the ending designation command setting process, an ending designation command that designates the end of the small win gaming state is stored in the subcommand output request buffer.
In step S17-13, a special game phase update process is executed, the series of processes is terminated, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-12). In the special game phase update process, a value corresponding to the "first large prize opening end waiting state" is set in the special game phase flag area of the RAM 230.

(Wait processing for the end of the first large prize opening)
Next, the first large prize opening end wait process executed in step S10-3 will be described.
Figure 28 is a flowchart showing the wait process for the end of the first large prize opening.
When the first large prize opening end wait process is executed in step S10-3, as shown in FIG. 28, the process first proceeds to step S18-1.
In step S18-1, it is determined whether the value of the special game timer is "0" or not, and if it is determined that the value of the special game timer is "0" (Yes), it proceeds to step S18-2, and if it is determined that the value of the special game timer is not "0" (No), it terminates the series of processes and proceeds to the next process (step S4-12).
In step S18-2, a V non-winning command setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S18-3. In the V non-winning command setting process, the V non-winning command is stored in the subcommand output request buffer.
In step S18-3, a special game phase update process is executed, the series of processes is ended, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-12). In the special game phase update process, a value corresponding to the "special game phase change waiting state" is set in the special game phase flag area of the RAM 230.

(Pre-opening process for the second prize winning slot)
Next, the pre-opening process for the second large prize opening executed in step S10-3 will be explained.
Figure 29 is a flowchart showing the processing before the second large prize opening is opened.
When the pre-opening process for the second large prize opening is executed in step S10-3, the process first proceeds to step S40-1 as shown in FIG.
In step S40-1, it is determined whether the value of the special game timer is "0" or not, and if it is determined that the value of the special game timer is "0" (Yes), it proceeds to step S40-2, and if it is determined that the value of the special game timer is not "0" (No), it terminates the series of processes and proceeds to the next process (step S4-12).
In step S40-2, a special electric role continuous operation counter update process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S40-3. In the special electric role continuous operation counter update process, "1" is added to the value of the special electric role continuous operation counter.
In step S40-3, a round start command setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S40-4. In the round start command setting process, a round start command that specifies the start of the round corresponding to the value of the special electric role continuous operation number counter is stored in the subcommand output request buffer.

In step S40-4, a special electric role open/close switching count setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S40-5. In the special electric role open/close switching count setting process, the second special electric role control table set in the special electric role control table area of RAM 230 is referenced, and the open/close switching count corresponding to the value of the special electric role continuous operation count counter is read. Then, the read open/close switching count is set in the special electric role open/close switching count counter.
Next, the value of the special electric winning number counter is set to "0".
In step S40-5, a special electric service switching process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S40-6. The special electric service switching process will be described later.
In step S40-6, a special game phase update process is executed, the series of processes is terminated, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-12). In the special game phase update process, a value corresponding to the "second large prize opening control state" is set in the special game phase flag area of the RAM 230.

(Second large prize opening control process)
Next, the second large prize opening control process executed in step S10-3 will be described.
Figure 30 is a flowchart showing the second large prize opening control process.
When the second large prize opening control process is executed in step S10-3, as shown in FIG. 30, the process first proceeds to step S41-1.
In step S41-1, it is determined whether the value of the special game timer is "0" or not, and if it is determined that the value of the special game timer is "0" (Yes), it proceeds to step S41-2, and if it is determined that the value of the special game timer is not "0" (No), it proceeds to step S41-4.
In step S41-2, it is determined whether the value of the special electric service opening/closing switching counter is "0" or not, and if it is determined that the value of the special electric service opening/closing switching counter is not "0" (No), it proceeds to step S41-3, and if it is determined that the value of the special electric service opening/closing switching counter is "0" (Yes), it proceeds to step S41-5.
In step S41-3, a special electric service open/close switching process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S41-4. The special electric service open/close switching process will be described later.
In step S41-4, it is determined whether the value of the special electric winning number counter has reached a predetermined upper limit value (8 [balls] in this embodiment), and if it is determined that the value of the special electric winning number counter has reached the predetermined upper limit value (Yes), it proceeds to step S41-5, and if it is determined that the value of the special electric winning number counter has not reached the predetermined upper limit value (No), it terminates the series of processes and proceeds to the next process (step S4-12).

In step S41-5, the special prize opening control end process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S41-6. In the special prize opening control end process, the solenoid control data specifying the power supply stop is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 230. This causes the second special electric device 55a to be controlled to a closed state.
In step S41-6, a special prize opening closure effective time setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S41-7. In the special prize opening closure effective time setting process, a predetermined special prize opening closure effective time (interval time) is set in the special game timer by referring to the second special electric role control table set in the special electric role control table area of the RAM 230.
In step S41-7, a round end command setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S41-8. In the round end command setting process, a round end command that specifies the end of a round of play is stored in the subcommand output request buffer.
In step S41-8, a special game phase update process is executed, the series of processes is terminated, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-12). In the special game phase update process, a value corresponding to the "second large prize opening closure valid state" is set in the special game phase flag area of the RAM 230.

(Second major prize opening closure effective process)
Next, the second large prize opening closing validity process executed in step S10-3 will be described.
Figure 31 is a flowchart showing the second large prize opening closure validity process.
When the second large prize opening closure validity process is executed in step S10-3, the process first proceeds to step S42-1 as shown in FIG.
In step S42-1, it is determined whether the value of the special game timer is "0" or not, and if it is determined that the value of the special game timer is "0" (Yes), it proceeds to step S42-2, and if it is determined that the value of the special game timer is not "0" (No), it terminates the series of processes and proceeds to the next process (step S4-12).
In step S42-2, it is determined whether the value of the special electric role continuous operation counter has reached a specified value, and if it is determined that the value of the special electric role continuous operation counter has reached the specified value (Yes), the process proceeds to step S42-3, and if it is determined that the value of the special electric role continuous operation counter has not reached the specified value (No), the process proceeds to step S42-6.
Here, the second special electric role control table set in the special electric role control table area of RAM 230 is referenced, and the number of rounds of play specified in the special electric role control table is obtained as a specified value and a judgment is made.

In step S42-3, an ending time setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S42-4. In the ending time setting process, a predetermined ending time is set in the special game timer by referring to the second special electric role control table set in the special electric role control table area of the RAM 230. In addition, a predetermined number of play times (600 times in this embodiment) is set as the value of the play time counter.
In step S42-4, an ending designation command setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S42-5. In the ending designation command setting process, an ending designation command that designates the end of the big win gaming state is stored in the subcommand output request buffer.
In step S42-5, a special game phase update process is executed, the series of processes is terminated, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-12). In the special game phase update process, a value corresponding to the "second large prize opening end waiting state" is set in the special game phase flag area of the RAM 230.
In step S42-6, a special prize opening closing time setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S42-7. In the special prize opening closing time setting process, a predetermined special prize opening closing time is set in the special game timer by referring to the second special electric role control table set in the special electric role control table area of the RAM 230.
In step S42-7, a special game phase update process is executed, the series of processes is terminated, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-12). In the special game phase update process, a value corresponding to the "state before the second large prize opening" is set in the special game phase flag area of the RAM 230.

(Wait processing for the end of the second large prize opening)
Next, the second large prize opening end wait process executed in step S10-3 will be explained.
Figure 32 is a flowchart showing the waiting process for the end of the second large prize opening.
When the second large prize opening end wait process is executed in step S10-3, the process first proceeds to step S43-1 as shown in FIG.
In step S43-1, it is determined whether the value of the special game timer is "0" or not, and if it is determined that the value of the special game timer is "0" (Yes), it proceeds to step S43-2, and if it is determined that the value of the special game timer is not "0" (No), it terminates the series of processes and proceeds to the next process (step S4-12).

In step S43-2, a game status setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S43-3. In the game status setting process, the game status is set.
Specifically, in the game state setting process, the same value as that set in the preliminary time-shortening control flag area of RAM 230 is set in the time-shortening control flag area of RAM 230. Also, the same value as that set in the preliminary first time-shortening counter is set in the first time-shortening counter. Also, the same value as that set in the preliminary second time-shortening counter is set in the second time-shortening counter. Furthermore, the same value as that set in the preliminary third time-shortening counter is set in the third time-shortening counter. In this way, the game state after the end of the jackpot game state (type of time-shortening state and number of time-shortening times) is set based on the information set in the game state preliminary setting process (steps S11-14).
In the game status setting process, next, "0" is set in the V winning flag area of RAM 230.
In step S43-3, a special game phase update process is executed, the series of processes is terminated, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-12). In the special game phase update process, a value corresponding to the "special game phase change waiting state" is set in the special game phase flag area of the RAM 230.

(Special electric service switching process)
Next, the special electric utility open/close switching process of steps S14-5, S16-3, S40-5, and S41-3 will be described.
Figure 33 is a flowchart showing the special electric service opening and closing switching process.
When the special electric utility opening/closing switching process is executed in steps S14-5, S16-3, S40-5, and S41-3, it first proceeds to step S15-1 as shown in FIG.
In step S15-1, it is determined whether the value of the special electric service opening/closing switching counter is "0" or not. If it is determined that the value of the special electric service opening/closing switching counter is not "0" (No), the process proceeds to step S15-2. If it is determined that the value of the special electric service opening/closing switching counter is "0" (Yes), the process ends and the process proceeds to the next process (steps S14-6, S16-4, S40-6, S41-4).
In step S15-2, a special electric role control data setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S15-3. In the special electric role control data setting process, control data for controlling the special electric role 55a to the open state or the closed state is set.
Specifically, in the special electric role control data setting process, the first special electric role control table or the second special electric role control table set in the special electric role control table area of the RAM 230 is referenced to read out the solenoid control data corresponding to the value of the special electric role open/close switch count counter. Then, the read out solenoid control data (control data specifying whether to energize or de-energize) is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 230. As a result, control of the special electric role solenoid 65 is started based on the set solenoid data, and the special electric role 55a is controlled to an open state or a closed state.

In step S15-3, a special electric control time setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S15-4. In the special electric control time setting process, a control time for continuing control based on the solenoid control data set in step S15-2 is set.
Specifically, in the special electric role control time setting process, the control time corresponding to the value of the special electric role open/close switch count counter is read by referring to the first special electric role control table or the second special electric role control table set in the special electric role control table area of the RAM 230. Then, the read control time is set in the special game timer.
In step S15-4, the special electric service switching counter update process is executed, the series of processes is terminated, and the process proceeds to the next process (steps S14-6, S16-4, S40-6, S41-4). In the special electric service switching counter update process, "1" is subtracted from the value of the special electric service switching counter.

(Regular game management processing)
Next, the normal game management process in step S4-14 will be described.
FIG. 34 is a flowchart showing the normal game management process.
Here, in this embodiment, seven situations/stages (hereinafter referred to as "normal game phases") of a game (hereinafter referred to as "normal game") executed based on a normal symbol lottery are defined: "normal symbol change waiting state,""normal symbol changing state,""normal symbol stop symbol display state,""normal symbol electric device pre-opening state,""normal symbol electric device opening control state,""normal symbol electric device closure enabled state," and "normal symbol electric device opening end waiting state."
Then, in the normal game phase flag area of the RAM 230, a value (normal game phase flag) corresponding to one of the seven normal game phases is set.
In addition, the ROM 220 stores normal game control modules (programs) for controlling (executing) normal games, which correspond to each normal game phase.
Then, in the normal game management process, a normal game control module corresponding to the value set in the normal game phase flag area of RAM 230 is selected, and processing based on the selected normal game control module is executed.

Specifically, when the normal game management process is executed in step S4-14, it first proceeds to step S19-1 as shown in FIG.
In step S19-1, a normal game phase acquisition process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S19-2. In the normal game phase acquisition process, the value (normal game phase) set in the normal game phase flag area of the RAM 230 is acquired (loaded).
In step S19-2, a normal game control module acquisition process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S19-3. In the normal game control module acquisition process, the normal game control module corresponding to the value (normal game phase) acquired in step S19-1 is read out.

In step S19-3, a normal game control module execution process is executed, and the series of processes is ended, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-15). In the normal game control module execution process, processing based on the normal game control module read in step S19-2 is started.
Specifically, if the value acquired in step S19-1 is a value corresponding to the "normal map change waiting state", the normal map change waiting process described below is started; if the value is a value corresponding to the "normal map changing state", the normal map changing process described below is started; if the value is a value corresponding to the "normal map stopped pattern display state", the normal map stopped process described below is started; if the value is a value corresponding to the "normal electric feature pre-opening state", the normal electric feature pre-opening process described below is started; if the value is a value corresponding to the "normal electric feature opening control state", the normal electric feature opening control process described below is started; if the value is a value corresponding to the "normal electric feature closing effective state", the normal electric feature closing effective process described below is started; and if the value corresponds to the "normal electric feature opening end wait state", the normal electric feature opening end wait process described below is started.

(Waiting for normal map changes)
Next, the normal map change waiting process executed in step S19-3 will be described.
FIG. 35 is a flowchart showing the process of waiting for a change in the general map.
When the normal map change waiting process is executed in step S19-3, as shown in FIG. 35, the process first proceeds to step S20-1.
In step S20-1, it is determined whether the value of the regular map reservation counter is greater than or equal to "1", and if it is determined that the value of the regular map reservation counter is greater than or equal to "1" (Yes), the process proceeds to step S20-2, and if it is determined that the value of the regular map reservation counter is not greater than or equal to "1" (No), the process ends and the process proceeds to the next step (step S4-15).

In step S20-2, a regular map reservation number update process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S20-3. In the regular map reservation number update process, "1" is subtracted from the value of the regular map reservation number counter.
In step S20-3, a reservation number designation command setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S20-4. In the reservation number designation command setting process, a reservation number designation command specifying that the reservation number of normal maps has decreased by "1" is stored in the subcommand output request buffer of RAM 230.
In step S20-4, a normal symbol storage area shift process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S20-5. In the normal symbol storage area shift process, the storage area in which game information is stored is shifted.
Specifically, the storage contents of storage area 1 of the regular game information storage area are shifted (moved) to storage area 0. Next, the storage contents of storage area 2 of the regular game information storage area are shifted to storage area 1 of the regular game information storage area. Next, the storage contents of storage area 3 of the regular game information storage area are shifted to storage area 2 of the regular game information storage area. Next, the storage contents of storage area 4 of the regular game information storage area are shifted to storage area 3 of the regular game information storage area. Next, the storage contents of storage area 4 of the regular game information storage area are cleared (initialized).

In step S20-5, a normal symbol winning/losing determination process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S20-6. In the normal symbol winning/losing determination process, the result of the normal symbol lottery is determined (normal symbol winning/losing determination).
The ROM 220 stores a regular symbol winning/losing lottery table in which winning values for regular symbol lotteries are registered.
Then, in the normal winning/losing determination process, a normal winning/losing determination is performed based on the winning random number contained in the game information stored in memory area 0 and the normal winning/losing lottery table corresponding to the current execution status of the time-saving control (ongoing or stopped).
Specifically, if the value of the winning random number contained in the game information stored in memory area 0 matches the winning value, the result of the normal pattern lottery is determined to be a "normal pattern win" (win).
On the other hand, if the value of the winning random number contained in the game information stored in memory area 0 does not match the winning value, the result of the normal pattern lottery is judged to be a "miss" (lost).

In step S20-6, a normal stop symbol determination process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S20-7. In the normal stop symbol determination process, the type of the normal stop symbol (stop symbol number) is determined (normal stop symbol determination).
In the normal lottery stop pattern determination process, if the normal lottery win/loss determination determines that the lottery is a "normal lottery win" (winning), the type of "normal lottery winning pattern" is determined (normal lottery stop pattern determination).
A regular winning symbol lottery table in which the correspondence between the regular winning symbol random number and the type of "regular winning symbol" is registered is stored in the ROM 220. In addition, in the regular winning symbol lottery table, "regular winning symbol 1,""regular winning symbol 2," and "regular winning symbol 3" are registered as the types of "regular winning symbol."
Then, in the normal symbol stop pattern determination process, the type of normal symbol win pattern (stop pattern number) is determined based on the normal symbol win pattern random number contained in the game information stored in memory area 0 and the normal symbol win pattern lottery table.
On the other hand, if the normal winning/losing judgment results in a "loser" (failure), the type of stopping symbol (stopping symbol number) is judged to be a "loser symbol."
Next, the type of the determined stop symbol (stop symbol number) is stored in the stop symbol storage area of the RAM 230.
In step S20-7, a symbol type designation command setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S20-8. In the symbol type designation command setting process, a normal symbol type designation command that designates the type of the stopped symbol (stop symbol number) determined in step S20-6 is stored in the subcommand output request buffer.

In step S20-8, a normal symbol fluctuation pattern determination process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S20-9. In the normal symbol fluctuation pattern determination process, the type of normal symbol fluctuation pattern (fluctuation pattern number) is determined (normal symbol fluctuation pattern determination).
ROM 220 stores a general map fluctuation pattern determination table in which the correspondence between general map fluctuation pattern random numbers and fluctuation pattern numbers (types of fluctuation patterns) is registered.
In addition, as a normal symbol fluctuation pattern determination table, a normal symbol fluctuation pattern determination table corresponding to each combination of the game state ("normal state", "time-saving state 1", "time-saving state 2" or "time-saving state 3") and the type of stopping symbol ("normal symbol winning symbol 1", "normal symbol winning symbol 2" or "normal symbol winning symbol 3") is stored.
In the normal symbol fluctuation pattern determination process, first, the normal symbol fluctuation pattern determination table corresponding to the combination of the current game state and the type of the stop symbol determined in step S20-7 is read out. Then, the type of normal symbol fluctuation pattern (variation pattern number) is determined based on the normal symbol fluctuation pattern random number included in the game information stored in memory area 0 and the normal symbol fluctuation pattern determination table.
In step S20-9, a fluctuation pattern command setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S20-10. In the fluctuation pattern command setting process, a general fluctuation pattern designation command that specifies the fluctuation pattern number (type of fluctuation pattern) determined in step S20-8 is stored in the subcommand output request buffer.

In step S20-10, the normal game variable time setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S20-11. In the normal game variable time setting process, the variable time corresponding to the type of normal game variable pattern (variation pattern number) determined in step S20-8 is acquired. Then, the acquired variable time is set in the normal game timer.
In step S20-11, a general map change display data setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S20-12. In the general map change display data setting process, data for controlling the change display of the general map display device is set.
Specifically, in the process of setting data for the map fluctuation display, first, a predetermined display time is set in the map display timer.
Next, a predetermined initial value is set in the normal map display pattern counter. As a result, among the predetermined number of segments constituting the normal map display device, the segment corresponding to the value of the normal map display pattern counter is controlled to light up.
Next, predetermined segment data is set as the segment data corresponding to the general map display device. As a result, among the predetermined number of segments constituting the general map display device, the segments corresponding to the set segment data are controlled to light up.

In step S20-12, an opening pattern setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S20-13. In the opening pattern setting process, the type of opening pattern ("short opening pattern" or "long opening pattern") of the normal electric device 52a during the normal winning game state is selected and set.
Specifically, in the opening pattern setting process, first, the type of opening pattern of the normal electric device 52a during the occurrence of a normal winning game state is selected.
ROM 220 stores an opening pattern selection table in which the correspondence between the combination of the game state ("normal state,""time-saving state 1,""time-saving state 2," or "time-saving state 3") and the "normal winning pattern"("normal winning pattern 1,""normal winning pattern 2," or "normal winning pattern 3") and the type of opening pattern ("short opening pattern" or "long opening pattern") is registered.
In the opening pattern selection table, a "short opening pattern" is specified as the type of opening pattern corresponding to the case where the current game state is "normal state" (time-saving control flag area = "0") and the type of normal stopping pattern is "normal winning pattern 1,""normal winning pattern 2," or "normal winning pattern 3."
In addition, in the opening pattern selection table, a "long opening pattern" is specified as the type of opening pattern corresponding to the case where the current game state is "time-saving state 1" (time-saving control flag area = "1") and the type of normal stopping pattern is "normal winning pattern 1,""normal winning pattern 2," or "normal winning pattern 3."
In addition, in the opening pattern selection table, a "short opening pattern" is specified as the type of opening pattern corresponding to the case where the current game state is "time-saving state 2" (time-saving control flag area = "2") and the type of normal stopping pattern is "normal winning pattern 1" or "normal winning pattern 2."
In addition, in the opening pattern selection table, a "long opening pattern" is specified as the type of opening pattern corresponding to the case where the current game state = "time-saving state 2" (time-saving control flag area = "2") and the type of normal stopping pattern = "normal winning pattern 3".
In addition, in the opening pattern selection table, a "short opening pattern" is specified as the type of opening pattern corresponding to the case where the current game state is "time-saving state 3" (time-saving control flag area = "3") and the type of normal stopping pattern is "normal winning pattern 1" or "normal winning pattern 2."
In addition, in the opening pattern selection table, a "long opening pattern" is specified as the type of opening pattern corresponding to the case where the current game state = "time-saving state 3" (time-saving control flag area = "3") and the type of normal stopping pattern = "normal winning pattern 3".
In the release pattern setting process, a type of release pattern corresponding to the combination of the current game state (value of the time-saving control flag area) and the type of the stopped normal symbol selected in step S20-6 is selected based on the release pattern selection table. Then, a value specifying the type of the selected release pattern is set in the release pattern designation flag area of RAM 230.

In step S20-13, a game state saving process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S20-14. In the game state saving process, a value specifying the current game state is set (saved) in the game state saving flag area of RAM 230. Specifically, in the game state saving process, the same value as the value of the current time-saving control flag area is set in the game state saving flag area of RAM 230.
In step S20-14, a number cutoff management process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S20-15, which will be described later.
In step S20-15, a normal game phase update process is executed, the series of processes is terminated, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-15). In the normal game phase update process, a value corresponding to the "normal game phase changing state" is set in the normal game phase flag area of RAM 230.

(Number of cut-off times management processing)
Next, the cut-off number management process executed in step S20-14 will be described.
FIG. 36 is a flowchart showing the number of cutoff management process.
When the cut-off number management process is executed in step S20-14, the process first proceeds to step S44-1 as shown in FIG.
In step S44-1, it is determined whether or not time-saving control (time-saving control 1, time-saving control 2, or time-saving control 3) is in progress, and if it is determined that time-saving control is in progress (Yes), the process proceeds to step S44-2, and if it is determined that time-saving control is not in progress (No), the series of processes is terminated and the process proceeds to the next process (step S20-15).
Here, if the value set in the time-saving control flag area of RAM 230 is "1" to "3", it is determined that time-saving control is in progress, and if the value set in the time-saving control flag area is "0", it is determined that time-saving control is not in progress.
In step S44-2, a first time-saving counter update process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S44-3. In the first time-saving counter update process, "1" is subtracted from the value of the first time-saving counter.
In step S44-3, it is determined whether the value of the first time-saving counter has been updated from "1" to "0" (whether "time-saving termination condition 1" has been met), and if it is determined that the value of the first time-saving counter has been updated from "1" to "0"("time-saving termination condition 1" has been met) (Yes), the process proceeds to step S44-4, and if it is determined that the value of the first time-saving counter has not been updated from "1" to "0"("time-saving termination condition 1" has not been met) (No), the process ends and the process proceeds to the next step (step S20-15).
In step S44-4, a time-saving control stop process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S44-5. In the time-saving control stop process, "0" is set in the time-saving control flag area of RAM 230. Also, "0" is set as the value of each time-saving counter (first time-saving counter, second time-saving counter, third time-saving counter). This stops the time-saving control.
In step S44-5, a subcommand setting process is executed, the series of processes is terminated, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S20-15). In the subcommand setting process, a subcommand specifying a change in the game state (stopping the time-saving control) is stored in the subcommand output request buffer of RAM 230.

(Processing during normal map fluctuations)
Next, the normal map change processing executed in step S19-3 will be described.
FIG. 37 is a flowchart showing the process during normal map fluctuation.
When the normal map fluctuation processing is executed in step S19-3, as shown in FIG. 37, the processing first proceeds to step S21-1.
In step S21-1, it is determined whether the value of the normal game timer is "0" or not, and if it is determined that the value of the normal game timer is "0" (Yes), it proceeds to step S21-2, and if it is determined that the value of the normal game timer is not "0" (No), it proceeds to step S21-8.
In step S21-2, a normal game stop time setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S21-3. In the normal game stop time setting process, a predetermined stop time is set in the normal game timer.
In step S21-3, a general map stop display data setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S21-4. In the general map stop display data setting process, data for controlling the stop display of the general map display device is set.
Specifically, in the normal symbol stop display data setting process, the stop symbol number stored in the stop symbol storage area of RAM 230 is obtained.
Next, the acquired stop pattern number is set as the value of the normal map display pattern counter. As a result, among the predetermined number of segments that make up the normal map display device, the segment corresponding to the value of the normal map display pattern counter is controlled to light up (stop display).

In step S21-4, a stop command setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S21-5. In the stop command setting process, a normal stop command is stored in the subcommand output request buffer.
In step S21-5, it is determined whether the game state at the time of the normal winning/losing judgment was in the time-saving state (time-saving state 1 to time-saving state 3), and if it is determined that the game state at the time of the normal winning/losing judgment was in the time-saving state (Yes), it proceeds to step S21-6, and if it is determined that the game state at the time of the normal winning/losing judgment was not in the time-saving state (it was in the normal state) (No), it proceeds to step S21-7. In this embodiment, the game state at the time of the normal winning/losing judgment is determined based on the value set in the game state save flag area of RAM 230.
In step S21-6, an external signal setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S21-7. In the external signal setting process, "1" is added to the value of the external information determination number counter.
In step S21-7, a normal game phase update process is executed, the series of processes is terminated, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-15). In the normal game phase update process, a value corresponding to the "normal game stop symbol display state" is set in the normal game phase flag area of RAM 230.

In step S21-8, it is determined whether the value of the general map display timer is "0" or not, and if it is determined that the value of the general map display timer is "0" (Yes), it proceeds to step S21-9, and if it is determined that the value of the general map display timer is not "0" (No), it terminates the series of processes and proceeds to the next process (step S4-15).
In step S21-9, the data update process for the map change display is executed, the series of processes is terminated, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-15). In the data update process for the map change display, the data for controlling the change display of the map display device is updated.
Specifically, in the normal map change display data update process, "1" is added to the value of the normal map display pattern counter.

(Processing during normal map stoppage)
Next, the normal map stop processing executed in step S19-3 will be described.
FIG. 38 is a flowchart showing the processing during normal map stoppage.
When the normal map stop processing is executed in step S19-3, the process first proceeds to step S22-1 as shown in FIG.
In step S22-1, it is determined whether the value of the normal game timer is "0" or not, and if it is determined that the value of the normal game timer is "0" (Yes), it proceeds to step S22-2, and if it is determined that the value of the normal game timer is not "0" (No), it terminates the series of processes and proceeds to the next process (step S4-15).
In step S22-2, it is determined whether the stopping pattern is a "normal winning pattern," and if it is determined that the stopping pattern is not a "normal winning pattern" (No), it proceeds to step S22-3, and if it is determined that the stopping pattern is a "normal winning pattern" (Yes), it proceeds to step S22-4.
In step S22-3, a normal game phase update process is executed, the series of processes is terminated, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-15). In the normal game phase update process, a value corresponding to the "normal game phase change waiting state" is set in the normal game phase flag area of RAM 230.

In step S22-4, a normal electric role control data setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S22-5. In the normal electric role control data setting process, control data for controlling the opening and closing of the normal electric role 52a is set.
A normal electric control table corresponding to the "short circuit opening pattern" and a normal electric control table corresponding to the "short circuit opening pattern" are stored in the ROM 220. Each normal electric control table specifies the time before the normal electric release, the normal electric closing effective time, the opening end wait time, the number of opening/closing switches, and the control data (solenoid control data, control time data) corresponding to each opening/closing switch.
In the normal electric role control data setting process, the normal electric role control table corresponding to the type of opening pattern ("long opening pattern" or "short opening pattern") specified by the value set in the opening pattern designation flag area of RAM 230 is read, and the read normal electric role control table is set in the normal electric role control table area of RAM 230. As a result, the normal electric role control table corresponding to the type of opening pattern selected in the opening pattern setting process (step S20-12) is set in the normal electric role control table area of RAM 230.
Next, the normal electric role control table set in the normal electric role control table area of RAM 230 is referenced to read the number of times of opening and closing switches. The read number of times of opening and closing switches is then set in the normal electric role opening and closing switch number counter. Also, the value of the normal electric role winning number counter is set to "0".

In step S22-5, a normal electric role release time setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S22-6. In the normal electric role release time setting process, a normal electric role control table set in the normal electric role control table area of RAM 230 is referenced, and a predetermined normal electric role release time is set in the normal game timer.
In step S22-6, a normal game phase update process is executed, the series of processes is terminated, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-15). In the normal game phase update process, a value corresponding to the "normal electric accessory pre-open state" is set in the normal game phase flag area of RAM 230.

(Pre-processing before opening normal electric accessories)
Next, the pre-opening process for the normal electric device, which is executed in step S19-3, will be described.
Figure 39 is a flowchart showing the pre-opening processing of normal electric devices.
When the pre-processing for opening the normal electric device is executed in step S19-3, the process first proceeds to step S23-1 as shown in FIG.
In step S23-1, it is determined whether the value of the normal game timer is "0" or not, and if it is determined that the value of the normal game timer is "0" (Yes), it proceeds to step S23-2, and if it is determined that the value of the normal game timer is not "0" (No), it terminates the series of processes and proceeds to the next process (step S4-15).
In step S23-2, a normal electric utility switching process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S23-3. The normal electric utility switching process will be described later.
In step S23-3, a normal game phase update process is executed, the series of processes is terminated, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-15). In the normal game phase update process, a value corresponding to the "normal electric accessory release control state" is set in the normal game phase flag area of RAM 230.

(Normal electric utility switching process)
Next, the normal electric utility switching process in steps S23-2 and S25-3 will be described.
Figure 40 is a flowchart showing the normal electric utility opening and closing switching process.
When the normal electric utility opening/closing switching process is executed in steps S23-2 and S25-3, as shown in FIG. 40, the process first proceeds to step S24-1.
In step S24-1, it is determined whether the value of the normal electric service opening/closing switching counter is "0" or not. If it is determined that the value of the normal electric service opening/closing switching counter is not "0" (No), the process proceeds to step S24-2. If it is determined that the value of the normal electric service opening/closing switching counter is "0" (Yes), the process ends and the next process (step S23-3 or S25-4) is proceeded to.
In step S24-2, a normal electric role control data setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S24-3. In the normal electric role control data setting process, control data for controlling the normal electric role 52a to the open state or the closed state is set.
Specifically, in the normal electric role control data setting process, the normal electric role control table set in the normal electric role control table area of RAM 230 is referenced to read out solenoid control data corresponding to the value of the normal electric role open/close switch count counter. Then, the read out solenoid control data (control data specifying whether to energize or de-energize) is set in a predetermined area of RAM 230. This starts control of the normal electric role solenoid 64 based on the set solenoid data, and the normal electric role 52a is controlled to an open or closed state.

In step S24-3, a normal electric control time setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S24-4. In the normal electric control time setting process, a control time for continuing control based on the solenoid control data set in step S24-2 is set.
Specifically, in the normal electric role control time setting process, the control time corresponding to the value of the normal electric role open/close switch count counter is read by referring to the normal electric role control table set in the normal electric role control table area of the RAM 230. Then, the read control time is set in the normal game timer.
In step S24-4, a normal electric service switching switching counter update process is executed, the series of processes is terminated, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S23-3 or S25-4). In the normal electric service switching switching counter update process, a value obtained by subtracting "1" from the value set in the normal electric service switching switching counter is set as a new normal electric service switching switching counter.

(Normal electric feature release control processing)
Next, the normal electric accessory opening control process executed in step S19-3 will be described.
Figure 41 is a flowchart showing the normal electric device release control process.
When the normal electric accessory release control process is executed in step S19-3, it first proceeds to step S25-1 as shown in FIG.
In step S25-1, it is determined whether the value of the normal game timer is "0" or not, and if it is determined that the value of the normal game timer is "0" (Yes), it proceeds to step S25-2, and if it is determined that the value of the normal game timer is not "0" (No), it proceeds to step S25-4.
In step S25-2, it is determined whether the value of the normal electric service opening/closing switching counter is "0" or not, and if it is determined that the value of the normal electric service opening/closing switching counter is not "0" (No), it proceeds to step S25-3, and if it is determined that the value of the normal electric service opening/closing switching counter is "0" (Yes), it proceeds to step S25-5.
In step S25-3, the normal electric utility opening/closing switching process (see FIG. 39) is executed, and then the process proceeds to step S25-4.
In step S25-4, it is determined whether the value of the normal electric winning number counter has reached a predetermined upper limit value (in this embodiment, 3 [balls]), and if it is determined that the value of the normal electric winning number counter has reached the predetermined upper limit value (Yes), it proceeds to step S25-5, and if it is determined that the value of the normal electric winning number counter has not reached the predetermined upper limit value (No), it terminates the series of processes and proceeds to the next process (step S4-15).

In step S25-5, the normal electric role opening control end process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S25-6. In the normal electric role opening control end process, the solenoid control data specifying the de-energization is set in a predetermined area of RAM 230. As a result, the normal electric role 52a is controlled to the closed state.
In step S25-6, a normal electric role closing effective time setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S25-7. In the normal electric role closing effective time setting process, a normal electric role control table set in the normal electric role control table area of RAM 230 is referenced, and a predetermined normal electric role closing effective time is set in the normal game timer.
In step S25-7, a normal game phase update process is executed, the series of processes is terminated, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-15). In the normal game phase update process, a value corresponding to the "normal electric accessory closure enabled state" is set in the normal game phase flag area of RAM 230.

(Normal electric device closure effective processing)
Next, the normal electric accessory closure validity process executed in step S19-3 will be described.
Figure 42 is a flowchart showing the normal electric device closure activation process.
When the normal electric feature closure activation process is executed in step S19-3, as shown in FIG. 42, the process first proceeds to step S26-1.
In step S26-1, it is determined whether the value of the normal game timer is "0" or not, and if it is determined that the value of the normal game timer is "0" (Yes), it proceeds to step S26-2, and if it is determined that the value of the normal game timer is not "0" (No), it terminates the series of processes and proceeds to the next process (step S4-15).
In step S26-2, the opening end wait time setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S26-3. In the opening end wait time setting process, the normal electric role control table set in the normal electric role control table area of the RAM 230 is referenced, and a predetermined opening end wait time is set in the normal game timer.
In step S26-3, a normal game phase update process is executed, the series of processes is ended, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-15). In the normal game phase update process, a value corresponding to the "normal electric accessory release end wait state" is set in the normal game phase flag area of RAM 230.

(Normal electric device release end wait processing)
Next, the normal electric accessory release end wait process executed in step S19-3 will be described.
Figure 43 is a flowchart showing the waiting process for the end of the normal electric device release.
When the normal electric accessory release end wait process is executed in step S19-3, as shown in FIG. 43, the process first proceeds to step S27-1.
In step S27-1, it is determined whether the value of the normal game timer is "0" or not, and if it is determined that the value of the normal game timer is "0" (Yes), it proceeds to step S27-2, and if it is determined that the value of the normal game timer is not "0" (No), it terminates the series of processes and proceeds to the next process (step S4-15).
In step S27-2, a normal game phase update process is executed, the series of processes is terminated, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-15). In the normal game phase update process, a value corresponding to the "normal game phase change waiting state" is set in the normal game phase flag area of RAM 230.

(Performance display device control process)
Next, the performance display device control process in step S4-25 will be described.
FIG. 44 is a flowchart showing the performance display device control process.
The performance display device control process is based on a program for controlling the display of the performance display device 206. In other words, the performance display device control process is based on a program stored in the unused area m2 (program area) of the ROM 220. The performance display device control process is called during execution of the timer interrupt process.
When the performance display device control process is called in step S4-25, the process proceeds to step S38-1 as shown in FIG.
In step S38-1, a register save process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S38-2. In the register save process, the values of all registers used during execution of the processing based on the program stored in the usage area m1 are saved to a save area in RAM. In addition, the values of all stack pointers used during execution of the processing based on the program stored in the usage area m1 are saved to a save area in RAM.

In step S38-2, it is determined whether a playable state has occurred (set), and if it is determined that a playable state has occurred (Yes), the process proceeds to step S38-3, and if it is determined that a playable state has not occurred (No), the process proceeds to step S38-11.
Here, it is determined whether or not a playable state has occurred based on the value (gaming machine state flag) stored in the gaming machine state flag area of the RAM 230. At this time, if the value stored in the gaming machine state flag area is a value corresponding to the playable state, it is determined that the playable state has occurred, and if the value is not a value corresponding to the playable state, it is determined that the playable state has not occurred.
In step S38-3, a total out counter increment process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S38-4.
In the total count counter increment process, it is determined whether or not the on state of the out switch 109 has been detected. If it is determined that the on state of the out switch 109 has been detected, "1" is added to the value of the total out counter. On the other hand, if it is determined that the on state of the out switch 109 has not been detected, the value of the total out counter is not added.

In step S38-4, it is determined whether or not the specified gaming state is in effect, and if it is determined that the specified gaming state is in effect (Yes), the process proceeds to step S38-5, and if it is determined that the specified gaming state is not in effect (No), the process proceeds to step S38-7.
Here, the "predetermined gaming state" is a gaming state in which the time-saving control (time-saving control 1, time-saving control 2, and time-saving control 3) is stopped and a jackpot gaming state has not occurred.
In step S38-5, a normal out counter increment process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S38-6.
In the normal out counter increment process, it is determined whether or not the on state of the out switch 109 has been detected. If it is determined that the on state of the out switch 109 has been detected, "1" is added to the value of the normal out counter. On the other hand, if it is determined that the on state of the out switch 109 has not been detected, the value of the normal out counter is not added.

In step S38-6, the normal prize ball counter addition process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S38-7.
In the normal prize ball counter addition process, first, it is determined whether or not the on state of the special figure 1 start port switch 101 has been detected. Then, if it is determined that the on state of the special figure 1 start port switch 101 has been detected, the value of the normal prize ball counter is added by "1", which is the number of prize balls paid out in response to the entry of a game ball into the first start port 51. On the other hand, if it is determined that the on state of the special figure 1 start port switch 101 has not been detected, the value of the normal prize ball counter is not added.
Next, it is determined whether or not the on state of the special figure 2 start port switch 102 has been detected. If it is determined that the on state of the special figure 2 start port switch 102 has been detected, the value of the normal prize ball counter is incremented by "1", which is the number of prize balls paid out in response to a game ball entering the second start port 52. On the other hand, if it is determined that the on state of the special figure 2 start port switch 102 has not been detected, the value of the normal prize ball counter is not incremented.
Next, it is determined whether or not the on state of the right prize entrance switch 105 has been detected. If it is determined that the on state of the right prize entrance switch 105 has been detected, the value of the normal prize ball counter is incremented by "4", which is the number of prize balls paid out in response to a game ball entering the right other prize entrance 56. On the other hand, if it is determined that the on state of the right prize entrance switch 105 has not been detected, the value of the normal prize ball counter is not incremented.
Next, it is determined whether or not the on state of the left prize entrance switch 106 has been detected. If it is determined that the on state of the left prize entrance switch 106 has been detected, the value of the normal prize ball counter is incremented by "4," which is the number of prize balls paid out in response to game balls entering the left other prize entrances 57a to 57c. On the other hand, if it is determined that the on state of the left prize entrance switch 106 has not been detected, the value of the normal prize ball counter is not incremented.

In step S38-7, it is determined whether the value of the total out counter has reached the reference value, and if it is determined that the value of the total out counter has reached the reference value (Yes), it proceeds to step S38-8, and if it is determined that the value of the total out counter has not reached the reference value (No), it proceeds to step S38-9.
In this embodiment, the reference value is 60000×n (n = integer), where "n" is a value indicating the current interval, and is initially set to "1."
In step S38-8, a section update process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S38-9. In the section update process, the section is updated.
In the interval update process, first, the base ratio stored in the base value buffer 1 of the RAM 230 is shifted (moved) to the base value buffer 2 of the RAM 230 .
Next, a predetermined initial value ("0" in this embodiment) is set as the value of the normal out counter. Also, a predetermined initial value ("0" in this embodiment) is set as the value of the normal prize ball counter.
Next, "1" is added to the value (n) indicating the current interval, thereby updating the reference value.
In step S38-9, a base ratio calculation process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S38-10. In the base ratio calculation process, a base ratio is calculated.
Specifically, in the base ratio calculation process, a base ratio is calculated based on the value of the normal out counter and the value of the normal prize ball counter. The calculated base ratio is then stored in the base value buffer 1 of the RAM 230.
Here, the base ratio is the ratio of the value of the normal prize ball counter to the value of the normal out counter.

In step S38-10, a base ratio display data setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S38-11. In the base ratio display data setting process, display data to be output to the performance display device 206 is set.
The RAM 230 is provided with a discrimination segment output request buffer (16 bits) and a ratio segment output request buffer (16 bits).
In the base ratio display data setting process, first, it is selected which base ratio to display, the base ratio for the current section or the base ratio for the previous section.
Then, when the display of the base ratio of the current section is selected, information indicating that this is the base ratio of the current section is set in the identification segment output request buffer, and information indicating the base ratio of the current section is set in the ratio segment output request buffer.
Specifically, the display data (8 bits) of "b" is set to the upper 8 bits of the identification segment output request buffer, the display data (8 bits) of "b" is set to the lower 8 bits of the identification segment output request buffer, the display data corresponding to the tens digit of the base ratio stored in the base value buffer 1 is set to the upper 8 bits of the ratio segment output request buffer, and the display data corresponding to the ones digit of the base ratio stored in the base value buffer 1 is set to the lower 8 bits of the ratio segment output request buffer.
As a result, of the light-emitting elements that make up the performance display device 206, LEDs 33 to 40 display the letter "b," LEDs 41 to 48 display the letter "b," LEDs 49 to 56 display a number indicating the tens digit of the current base ratio, and LEDs 57 to 64 display a number indicating the ones digit of the current base ratio.

On the other hand, if the display of the base ratio of the previous section is selected, information indicating that it is the base ratio of the previous section is set in the identification segment output request buffer, and information indicating the base ratio of the previous section is set in the ratio segment output request buffer.
Specifically, the display data (8 bits) of "b" is set to the upper 8 bits of the identification segment output request buffer, the display data (8 bits) of "c" is set to the lower 8 bits of the identification segment output request buffer, the display data corresponding to the tens digit of the base ratio stored in the base value buffer 2 is set to the upper 8 bits of the ratio segment output request buffer, and the display data corresponding to the ones digit of the base ratio stored in the base value buffer 2 is set to the lower 8 bits of the ratio segment output request buffer.
As a result, of the light-emitting elements that make up the performance display device 206, LEDs 33 to 40 display the letter "b," LEDs 41 to 48 display the letter "c," LEDs 49 to 56 display a number indicating the tens digit of the current base ratio, and LEDs 57 to 64 display a number indicating the ones digit of the current base ratio.

In step S38-11, a register restoration process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S38-12. In the register restoration process, the register values saved in step S38-1 (register values used during execution of the processing based on the program stored in the usage area m1) and the stack pointer value saved in step S38-1 (stack pointer value used during execution of the processing based on the program stored in the usage area m1) are restored.
In step S38-12, interrupt permission processing is executed, the series of processing is terminated, and the process proceeds to the next processing (step S4-26). In the interrupt permission processing, the interrupt prohibition state is released, and the execution of power-off save processing, timer interrupt processing, etc. is permitted.

(Variation effects and stop effects executed in pachinko machine 1)
Next, the change effect and stop effect executed in the pachinko machine 1 will be explained.
In pachinko machine 1, when a start judgment (special symbol hit judgment, special symbol pattern judgment, special symbol change pattern judgment, etc.) based on special symbol 1 game information is executed, the special symbol 1 display device executes a change display of the first special symbol, and then executes a stop display of the first special symbol in a manner according to the result of the start judgment.
At this time, as a change display corresponding to the change display of the first special pattern, a change display of the special mini performance pattern a1 is executed in the special mini pattern display area A1 (three special pattern display areas), and a change display of the special chart 1 fourth performance pattern a2 is executed in the special chart 1 fourth pattern display area A2.
In addition, as a stop effect corresponding to the stop display of the first special symbol, the stop display of the special mini symbol effect symbol a1 is executed in the special symbol mini symbol display area A1 (three special symbol display areas), and the stop display of the special symbol 1 fourth symbol effect symbol a2 is executed in the special symbol 1 fourth symbol display area A2. At this time, the stop display of the effect symbols a1 and a2 is executed in a manner according to the result of the start determination.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1, when a start judgment (special symbol hit judgment, special symbol pattern judgment, special symbol change pattern judgment, etc.) based on the special symbol 2 game information is executed, the special symbol 2 display device executes a change display of the second special symbol, and then executes a stop display of the second special symbol in a manner according to the result of the start judgment.
At this time, as a change display corresponding to the change display of the second special pattern, a change display of the special mini pattern display pattern a1 is executed in the special mini pattern display area A1 (three special pattern display areas), and a change display of the special chart 2 fourth pattern display pattern a3 is executed in the special chart 2 fourth pattern display area A3.
In addition, as a stop effect corresponding to the stop display of the second special symbol, the stop display of the special mini symbol effect symbol a1 is executed in the special symbol mini symbol display area A1 (three special symbol display areas), and the stop display of the special symbol 2 fourth symbol effect symbol a3 is executed in the special symbol 2 fourth symbol display area A3. At this time, the stop display of the effect symbols a1 and a2 is executed in a manner according to the result of the start determination.

In addition, in pachinko machine 1, when a start judgment based on the normal game information (normal game win/lose judgment, normal game stop pattern judgment, normal game change pattern judgment, etc.) is executed, the normal game display device executes a change display of the normal game pattern, and then executes a stop display of the normal game pattern in a manner according to the result of the start judgment.
At this time, as a change display corresponding to the change display of the normal pattern, a change display of the normal mini pattern display pattern a4 is executed in the normal mini pattern display area A4 (three normal pattern display areas), and a change display of the normal fourth pattern display pattern a5 is executed in the normal fourth pattern display area A5.
In addition, as a stop effect corresponding to the stop display of the normal symbol, the stop display of the normal mini symbol a4 is executed in the normal mini symbol display area A4 (three normal symbol display areas), and the stop display of the normal fourth symbol a5 is executed in the normal fourth symbol display area A5. At this time, the stop display of the symbol a4, a5 is executed in a manner according to the result of the start determination.

In particular, in the pachinko machine 1, in the main effect pattern display area A6 (three effect pattern display areas), depending on the game status, a change effect/stop effect corresponding to the change display/stop display of a special pattern, or a change effect/stop effect corresponding to the change display/stop display of a normal pattern, is executed.
In this embodiment, the probability of winning a "normal symbol win" through the normal symbol lottery is 1/1. However, during the normal state, if a "normal symbol win" is won through the normal symbol lottery, the "short opening pattern" is selected with a 1/1 probability. As a result, even if the normal symbol lottery is won during the normal state, the second special symbol lottery is not executed. Therefore, the jackpot game state is generated only based on the first special symbol lottery. In other words, during the normal state, the player does not pay attention to the result of the normal symbol lottery, but rather pays attention to the result of the first special symbol lottery.
Therefore, when the normal state occurs, a variable effect corresponding to the variable display of the first special pattern is executed in the main effect pattern display area A6 (three effect pattern display areas), and a stop effect corresponding to the stop display of the first special pattern is executed.
That is, during the occurrence of the normal state, during the variable display of the first special symbol on the special symbol 1 display device, a variable display of the first main symbol a6 is executed in the main symbol display area A6 (each special symbol display area) as a variable display corresponding to the variable display of the special symbol. Also, during the stopped display of the first special symbol on the special symbol 1 display device, a stopped display of the first main symbol a6 is executed in the main symbol display area A6 (each special symbol display area) as a stop display corresponding to the stopped display of the special symbol.

On the other hand, in this embodiment, the probability of winning a "normal symbol win" through the normal symbol lottery is 1/1. Furthermore, during the occurrence of time-saving state 1, the "long opening pattern" is selected with a 1/1 probability. As a result, during the occurrence of time-saving state 1, if the normal symbol lottery is won, the game ball can always enter the second starting hole 52, and the second special symbol lottery is executed. Therefore, during the occurrence of time-saving state 1, the player does not pay attention to the result of the normal symbol lottery, but rather pays attention to the result of the second special symbol lottery.
Therefore, while the time-saving state 1 is occurring, a variable effect corresponding to the variable display of the second special pattern is executed in the main effect pattern display area A6 (three effect pattern display areas), and a stop effect corresponding to the stop display of the second special pattern is executed.
That is, during the occurrence of time-saving state 1, during the variable display of the second special symbol on the special symbol 2 display device, a variable display of the first main effect symbol a6 is executed in the main effect symbol display area A6 (each special symbol display area) as a variable effect corresponding to the variable display of the special symbol. Also, during the stopped display of the second special symbol on the special symbol 2 display device, a stopped display of the first main effect symbol a6 is executed in the main effect symbol display area A6 (each special symbol display area) as a stop effect corresponding to the stopped display of the special symbol.

On the other hand, when time-saving state 2 or time-saving state 3 is occurring, the "long release pattern" is selected with a probability of 380/65536. In particular, the probability of winning a "big hit" or a "small hit" through the second special symbol lottery is set to 1/1. As a result, when the "long release pattern" is won during the time-saving state (time-saving state 2 or time-saving state 3), the occurrence of a big hit game state is confirmed. In this sense, players pay attention to the results of the normal symbol lottery (in particular, whether or not the "long release pattern" is won).
Therefore, when time-saving state 2 or time-saving state 3 occurs, a variable effect corresponding to the variable display of the normal pattern is executed in the main effect pattern display area A6 (three effect pattern display areas), and a stop effect corresponding to the stop display of the normal pattern is executed.
That is, during the occurrence of time-saving state 2 or time-saving state 3, during the variable display of the normal pattern on the normal pattern display device, a variable display of the second main effect pattern a6 is executed in the main effect pattern display area A6 (each special pattern display area) as a variable effect corresponding to the variable display of the normal pattern. Also, during the stopped display of the normal pattern on the normal pattern display device, a stopped display of the second main effect pattern a6 is executed in the main effect pattern display area A6 (each special pattern display area) as a stop effect corresponding to the stopped display of the normal pattern.
In this case, if the "normal winning pattern 3"("long opening pattern") is won based on the normal pattern lottery executed during the occurrence of time-saving state 2 or time-saving state 3, the stopping pattern corresponding to the "winning pattern" is displayed in the main performance pattern display area A6.
On the other hand, if the player wins "normal winning pattern 1" or "normal winning pattern 2"("short opening pattern") based on the normal pattern lottery executed during the occurrence of time-saving state 2 or time-saving state 3, the stopping pattern corresponding to the "losing pattern" is displayed in the main performance pattern display area A6.
This makes it possible to determine whether or not a "long opening pattern" has been won based on the stopping pattern displayed in the main performance pattern display area A6 while the time-saving state 2 or time-saving state 3 is occurring.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 1, during the normal state or the time-saving state 1, an effect for notifying the result of the special symbol lottery is executed in the main effect symbol display area A6 by the first main effect symbol a6. On the other hand, during the time-saving state 2 or the time-saving state 3, an effect for notifying the result of the normal symbol lottery is executed in the main effect symbol display area A6 by the second main effect symbol a6.
As a result, in the pachinko machine 1, when the normal state or time-saving state 1 is occurring, a performance is mainly executed to notify the result of the special symbol lottery, and when the time-saving state 2 or time-saving state 3 is occurring, a performance is mainly executed to notify the result of the normal symbol lottery. This makes it possible to improve the playability.

(Modification)
Although the embodiment of the present invention has been described above, various modifications can be made to the above embodiment.
For example, in the above embodiment, when the passage of a gaming ball through the start gate 41 is detected, normal game information (specifically, a winning random number, a normal winning symbol random number, and a normal variation pattern random number) is acquired. Furthermore, a normal win/loss determination is executed based on the normal game information. Then, when a "normal win" is determined by the normal win/loss determination, a normal win game state is triggered. At this time, the probability of a "normal win" being determined by the normal win/loss determination is 1/1. As a result, when the passage of a gaming ball through the start gate 41 is detected (when a normal win/loss determination is executed), a normal win game state is triggered with a 100% probability, and the normal electric device 52a is set to an open state.
However, the probability that a "normal win" is determined by the normal win/loss determination may be lower than 1/1. As a result, when the passage of the game ball through the start gate 41 is detected (when the normal win/loss determination is executed), a normal win game state can be generated with a predetermined probability of less than 100%, and the normal electric device 52a can be opened.
Alternatively, it may be configured such that normal game information (specifically, winning random number, normal winning symbol random number, and normal symbol variation pattern random number) is not acquired when the passage of a game ball through the start gate 41 is detected. In other words, it may be configured such that when the passage of a game ball through the start gate 41 is detected, a normal winning game state is always generated and the normal electric device 52a is set to an open state. In this case, the opening pattern of the normal electric device 52a (the "short opening pattern" or "short opening pattern") is selected by lottery, and in particular, the probability of the "long opening pattern" being selected differs depending on the game state (the "normal state,""time-saving state 1," or "time-saving state 2").

(Action of Pachinko Machine 1)
The pachinko machine 1 includes a main control board 200 (step S11-13) that displays the first special symbol, a main control board 200 (step S20-11) that displays the normal symbol, a main control board 200 (step S4-19) and an external terminal board 450 that output a symbol determination count signal, and a main control board 200 (step S43-2) that generates one of a plurality of game states including a normal state and a time-saving state (time-saving state 1 to time-saving state 3). When the first special symbol is stopped and displayed during the normal state, the symbol determination count signal is output, and when the normal symbol whose variable display has started during the time-saving state (time-saving state 1 to time-saving state 3) is stopped and displayed, the symbol determination count signal is output.
This allows the pachinko machine 1 to output a symbol confirmation count signal based on the variable display of the first special symbol when the normal state is occurring, and to output a symbol confirmation count signal based on the variable display of the normal symbol when the time-saving state (time-saving state 1 to time-saving state 3) is occurring. That is, during the normal state in which the game progresses mainly based on the variable display of the first special symbol, the symbol confirmation count signal is output based on the variable display of the first special symbol, and during the time-saving state (time-saving state 1 to time-saving state 3) in which the game progresses mainly based on the variable display of the normal symbol, the symbol confirmation count signal is output based on the variable display of the normal symbol. Therefore, it is possible to appropriately output a symbol confirmation count signal depending on the game state, and to appropriately notify the state of the gaming machine.
In particular, during the normal state in which the game progresses mainly based on the variable display of the first special symbol, it becomes possible to update the number of starts displayed on the data display device based on the variable display of the first special symbol, and during the time-saving state (time-saving state 1 to time-saving state 3) in which the game progresses mainly based on the variable display of the normal symbol, it becomes possible to update the number of starts displayed on the data display device based on the variable display of the normal symbol. Therefore, it becomes possible to prevent a situation in which the player feels uncomfortable.

In addition, the pachinko machine 1 is equipped with a performance control board 300 that displays the first main performance symbol a6 and the special mini performance symbol a1, which is smaller than the first main performance symbol a6, as performance symbols corresponding to the first special symbol, and the second main performance symbol a6 and the regular mini performance symbol a4, which is smaller than the second main performance symbol a6, as performance symbols corresponding to the regular symbol. The first main performance symbol a6 and the second main performance symbol a6 have different display modes. The first main performance symbol a6 and the special mini performance symbol a1 have the same display mode. The second main performance symbol a6 and the regular mini performance symbol a4 have the same display mode.
That is, in the pachinko machine 1, the first main effect symbol a6 and the special mini effect symbol a1 are displayed as effect symbols corresponding to the first special symbol. This makes it possible to emphasize the effect display corresponding to the first special symbol. Also, the second main effect symbol a6 and the normal mini effect symbol a4 are displayed as effect symbols corresponding to the normal symbol. This makes it possible to emphasize the effect display corresponding to the normal symbol.
In particular, the first main effect symbol a6 and the special mini effect symbol a1 have the same display mode, which makes it easy for the player to understand that the first main effect symbol a6 and the special mini effect symbol a1 correspond to the first special symbol.
In addition, the display mode is the same for the second main effect symbol a6 and the normal mini effect symbol a4, which makes it easy for the player to understand that the second main effect symbol a6 and the normal mini effect symbol a4 correspond to the normal symbol.
Furthermore, the first main effect symbol a6 and the second main effect symbol a6 have different display modes, and as a result, the special mini effect symbol a1 and the regular mini effect symbol a4 have different display modes, which makes it easier for the player to distinguish between the effect symbol corresponding to the first special symbol and the effect symbol corresponding to the regular symbol.
As a result, it is possible to properly notify the status of the gaming machine.

1 Pachinko machine 11 Game board 14 Outer rail 41 Start gate 51 First start gate 52 Second start gate 55 Big prize gate 200 Main control board 300 Performance control board gh Guide hole

Claims (1)

a first identification information display means for displaying first identification information corresponding to the special symbol lottery;
A second identification information display means for displaying second identification information corresponding to the normal symbol lottery;
an output means for outputting an external signal;
a game state control means for generating one of a plurality of game states including a first game state and a second game state;
the external signal is output after the first identification information is statically displayed during the first gaming state;
The external signal is output after the second identification information, the variable display of which has started during the second gaming state, is displayed in a static state .
During the occurrence of the first gaming state, the display of the first identification information becomes the main focus of the game, and the display of the effect pattern corresponding to the display of the first identification information is executed,
During the occurrence of the second game state, the display of the second identification information becomes the main focus of the game, and the display of the effect pattern corresponding to the display of the second identification information is executed,
It is possible to display a mini performance pattern corresponding to the display of the second identification information,
A gaming machine characterized in that the mode of the mini performance pattern that is stopped and displayed when the result of the normal pattern lottery becomes a specific result can be changed depending on the game status .